SECTION 4_MATERIALS

4.1

General

4.1.1

Miscellaneous informaton is contaned n 4.1.1.1 through 4.1.1.4.

4.1.'1.1 See the Data Sheet for material specifications.

4.1.1.2

Rmmed or capped steels are not permtted.

4.1.1.3 Use of cast

iron for any pressure part or any part attached to the tank by welding is prohibited.

4.1.1.4 Because of hydrogen embrittlement and toxicity concerns, cadmium-plated components shall not be used
without the expressed consent of the Purchaser.

1.1.2 Materials used in the constructon of tanks shall conform to the specifcaons listed n ths section, subject to
the modificaons and limitations indicated in this standard. Material produced to specifications other than those listed
in ths secton may be employed, provded that the materal is cenifed to meet all of the requirements of an applicable
materal specilicaton lsted in ths standard and the material's use s approved by the Purchaser. The Manufacturer's
proposal shall dentify e material specfications to be used. When this standard does not address rnaterial
requirements for miscellaneous items and appurtenarrces, the Purchaser and/or the Manufacturer shall supply
additonal riaterial requirements using a supplement to the Data Sheet.

4.1.3 When any new or unused plate and pipe material cannot be completely

identfed by records that are

sasfactory to the Purchaser as material conforming to a specificaon listed n ths standard. the material or product
may be used in the construcon of tanks covered by this standard only if the material passes the tests prescribed n
Annex N.

4.1.4

Where materals of construcon are used that are certifed to two or more rnaterial specificaons, the materal
specifcation chosen for the desgn calculaons shall also be used consstently in the applicaon of all other
provisions of this standard. The Purchaser shall be notjfied of ths choce and receve confrmaton that the material
fully comples with the chosen material specification n all respects.

4.1.5 When a tank is designed to e requirements of this standard usng plate material from Group-l

through

Group-lllA steels, the tank Manufacturer responsible for any proposed material substtution to use GrouFlV through
Group-Vl steels must do the followng.

a)

Maintain all of the orignal design criteria for the lower sess Group-l through Group lllA steels.

b)

Obiain the prior written approval ofthe Purchaser.

c)

Ensure that all of the design, fabrcaon, erection, and inspection requremenb for the material beng substuted
will meet the lower stress Group I through Group lllA specifications for items ncludng but not limited to:

1) material properties and production process methods;

2) allowable stress levels;

3) notch toughness;
4) welding procedures and consumables;
5) thermal stress relief;
4-1

API

STANDARo

650

6) temporary and permanent attachment detrils and Procedures;

7) nondesructive examinations.

d)

Include the pennent nformaon n the documents proded to the Purchaser, including a certmcaton statement
that the substiuited material fully complies wth 4.1.5 n all respects, and provde all other records covered by the
work pocesses applied to th material such as mpact testng, weld procedures, nondestructive examinaons,
and heat Eeanents.

4.2

Plates

4.2.1

General

Except as otherwse provided for in 4.1, plates shall conform to one of the specmcatons listed n 4.2.2
through 4.2.6, subject to the modifications and limitations n this standard.

4.2.1.1

plate for shells, roofs, and bottoms may be ordered on an edge-thckness basis or on a weight (kgm2 [lb/ftzl)
basis, as spcified in 4.2.1 .2.'1, 4.2.'1.?.2, and 4.2.'1.2.3.

4.2.1.2

4.2.1,2.1 fhe edge ickness ordered shall not be less than lhe computed design thickness or e minimum
permitted thickness.

4.2.1.2.2 rheweght ofdered shall be great enough to pfovide an edge thckness not less than the computed desgn
thckness or the mnmum permtted thickness.

4.2.1.2.3 Whether an edge-thickness or a weght bass

s used, an undemn not more than 0.3 mm (0.01 in ) from

the computed degn thckness or the minimum permitted thickness is acceptable.

4.2.1.3 All plates shall be manufactured by the open-hearth, electric-furnace, or basic oxygen process' Steels
produced Uy the tnermo-mechanical control process CIMCP) may be used, provided that the combination of
tnemicat cnposition and ntegrated controls of the steel manufacturing s mutually acceptable to. the Purchaser
and the Manuiacturer, and provided that the specifed mechanical propertes in the required plate thicknesses are
achieved. Copper-bearing steel shall be used if specfied by the Purchaser.

are lmited to a maximum thickness of 45 mm (1.75 n.) unless a lesser thckness s statd in this
plate
specification. Plates used as inserts or flanges may be thicker than 45 mm (1 75 in.). Plates,
in
|e
or
standard
as designated n .Z.lO.i anO thicker than 40 mm (1.5 in.), shall be normalzed or quench temPered, killed, rnade to
fne-gran practice, and mpact tested.

,f.2.1.4 Shell plates

t.2.1.5 plate components not listed in 4.2.10.1 (i.e. nonpressure boundary compression .components) shall be
limited to the maxmum thickness as designated by ASTM, CSA, lSO, EN, or other recognzed natonal standard.

4.2.2 ASTMSpecifications
plates that conform to the following ASTM specifcations are acceptable as long as the plates are within the stated
limitatiom.
maxmum thickness of 40 mm (1.5 n.). None of the specfications for the
ujprrt"nunt ,"terials listed in Table 1 of ASTM A361VUA36 are considered accePtable for tanks consucted under

a)' ASTM A36WA36 for ptates to a

ttii standard unless it is expressly stated in this standard that the specificaons are acceptable.

(0 5 in'); Grade B for plates to a

thckness of 45 mm (1 75 in )
plates
maxmum
a
for
to
(1
EH36
Grade
in.);
and
25
mm
maximum thckness of

b) ASTM A131t/uA131, Grade A, for plates to a maximum thckness of 13 mm

(nsert plates and flanges to a maxmum thckness of 50 mm [2 in.l).

wEroED

4-3

TANKS FoR OrL SToRAGE

c)

ASTM A283M/A283, Grade C, for plates to a maximum thickness of 25 mm (1 n.).

ASTM A285fWA285, Grade C, for plates to a maximum thickness of 25 mm (1 in.).

e)

ASTM A516M Grades 380, 415, 450, 485/A516, Grades 55.60,65, and 70, for plates to a maximum thickness of
40 mm (1.5 n.) (insert plates and flanges to a maxmum thickness of l0o mm [4 in.D.

ASTM A537t\i4lA537, Class 1 and Class 2, for plates to a maximum thckness of 45 mm (1.75 n.) (nsert plates to
a maximum thckness of 100 mm [4 in.l).

g)

ASTM A573M Grades 400, 450, 485/A573, Grades 58, 65, and 70, for plates to a maximum thickness of 40 mm
(1.5 in.)-

h) ASTM A633M/A633, Grades

C and D, for pates to a maximum thickness of 45 mm (1.75 in.) (insert plates to a

maximum thickness of 100 mm [4.0 in.]).

j)

ASTM A662t\r1A662, Grades B and C, for plates to a maximum thickness of 40 mm (1.5 in.).
ASTM A678tvUA678, Grade A, for plates to a maxmum thckness of 40 mm (1.5 in.) (insert plates to a maximum
thickness of 65 mm [2.5 in.]) and Grade B for plates to a maximum ckness of 45 mm (1.75 n.) (insert plates to a
maximum thckness of 65 mm [2.5 in.D. Boron addtions are not permined.

k)

ASTM 4737t\illA737, Grade B, for plates to a maximum thckness of 40 mm (1.5 n.).

l)

ASTM A841fWA841 Grade A, Class 1 and Grade B, Class 2 for plates to a maximum thickness of 40 mm (1.5 in.)
(insert plates to a maximum thickness of 65 mm [2.5 in.l).

4.2.3 CSASpecifcations
csA

G40.21 in Grades 260W(38Vy), 300W(44W), and 350W(50W) is acceptabte within rhe

(lf impact tests are requred, Grades 260W[38VV|, 300W[44W, and 350W[50W are
designated as Grades 260WT/[38UrL 30oWT/[44WTl, and 350WT/[50Wfl, respecvely.) lmperial unit equivalenr
Plate fumished ro

lmfraons stated below.

grades of CSA Specfication G40.21, shown n parenthess, are also acceptable.

a)

The W grades may be semi-klled or fully kilted.

b)

Fully killed steel made to fine-gran practice must be specifed when required.

c)

Elements added for gran refinng or strengthenng shall be restricted n accordance wth Table 4.1

d)

Plates shall have tensile strengths that are not more than 140 MPa (20 ksD above the mnmum specified for the
grade.

e)

Grades 260W(38W) and 300W(44\ /) are acceptable for plate to a maxmum thickness of 25 mm (1 in.) if semklled and to a maxmum thckness of 40 mm (1.5 n.) if fully killed and made to fne-gran practce.

Grade 350W(50w) is acceptable for plate to a maximum thickness of 45 mm (1.75 n.) (insert plates to a rnaximum
thickness of 10O mm [4 in.D if fufly klled and made to fne-gran practce.

4.2.4 lSOSpecfcations
Plate furnished to ISO 630 in Grades E275 and E355 is acceptable within rhe followng limitaons:

\-

a)

Grade E275 n Qualies C and D for plate to a maximum thickness of 40 mm (1.5 in.);

API

4-4

STANoARD

650

Table 4.1-Maximum Permssble Alloy Content

Alloy
Columbium
Vanadum
Columbum (< 0.05 o/.) plus Vanadum
Nitrogen

Heat Analyss (%)

Notes

0.05

1,2,3

0.10
0.10
0.015

1,2,4

|
I

1,2.3
1,2,4

Copper

0.35

1,2

Nickel

0.50

'1, 2

Chromium

0.25

Molybdenum

0.08

1,2
't, 2

when the use of these allovs or clmbinations of them s not irrcluded in the maleria specficaon, their
shall be at the oDtron of the olate roducer, subect to the approval ol the Purchaser' These elements shall be
.epone wtren reqeSed by the prchase. Whn rnore rctiEictive limhaons are ncluded in the material
specificaton, those shall govem.

NTE

u+

NOTE
On product analyss, the rnaterial shall confom to these requirements, subjecl to the product analyss
tderances of le specfication.
NOTE
When colnbium s added either snqty or n combination with vanadium, it shall be restricted to plates
ot 13 rm (0.50 in.) maximum thickness unless c'oinbned with 0 15 % minimum slcon.

NOTE

when niboqen (<O.Ol5%) is added as a supplement to vanadium, it shall be reported, and the

minmum ratio o{ vanadum to nitrogen shall be 4:1.

b) Grade E3SS

n Quaties C and D for plate to

a maximum thckness of 45 mm (1.75 in.)

(nsert plates

to a

maximum thckness of 50 mm [2 in.]).

4.2.5 ENSpecifcatons
plate tumshed to EN 10025 in Grades 5275 and 5355 s acceptable within the following lmitations:

a)

Grade 5275 n Quales JO and J2 for plate to a maxmum thckness of 40 mm (1.5 n.);

b)

Grade 5355 in Qualities JO, JZ and K2 for plate to a maximum thickness of 45 mm (1.75 n-) [nsert plates to a
maximum thickness of 50 mm (2 n.)1.

4.2.6 NationalStandards
plates produced and tested in accordance with the requirements of a recognzed national standard and withn the
mecha;ical and chemical lmitations of one of the grads listed in Table 4.2 are acceptable when approved by the
in 4.2.2,
eurcttaser. tne requremenE of this group do not apply to the ASTM, CSA, lSO, and EN specifcations lsted
sanconed
has
been
that
standard
4.2.3, 4.2.4, and 4.:2.s. for e purpoies bf this stanrd, a naonal standard is a
by the govemment of the country from whch the standard originates.

4.2.7

General Requrements for Delivery

marerial furnished shall conform to the applcable requirements of the lsted specmcaons but is not
restricted with respect to the location of the place of manufacure.

4.2.7.1 fhe

mportance,
material is ntended to be suitable for fusion weldng. Welding technique s of fundamental
rnaterial
with
the.plate
consistent
are
and welding procedures rrust provide welds whose strength an toughness
elecrodes
welding
low-hydrogen
wth
done
shall
be
rg ir".hn welding pelormed to repair surface def1s
comue in chemstry, stfength, and quality with the plale rnaterial'

1.2.7.2 fhis

wELoED TaNKS FoR

O[

4.5

SToMGE

Table 4.2-Acceptable Grades of Plate Material Produced to Natonal standafds (see 4.2.6)
Chemical Compostion

Mechanical Properles
Tensile Strengtha
Minimumc

Maximum

Gradeb MPa ksi

MPa

235d 360 52
4m 58
zfi
275 430 62

510
530
560

a
b

Maxmum

Maxmum
Percent

Maximum
Percent
Phosphorus and

Thickness

carbon

Sulfur

Minimum

ks
74
17
81

Yield
Strengthc

MPa

235
250
215

ks

mm n.

Heat Producl Heat

?o 0.75
40 1.5
40 1.5

0.20 0.24
0.23 0.21
0.25 0.29

34
36

40

0.04
0.04
0.04

f'roduct
0.05
0.05
0.05

fhe loclbn and number of tes specirlens, elongatioo and bend tests, and acceptance criteria are to be n accoldarce wilh lhe approprate
mtimal gandard, ISO stardard, o. ASTM specification
Semlki[ed or fu y kiled quality; as rolled or TMCP (20 mm [0.75 in.] rnaxmLm wen TMCP is used in place of rprmalized steel), or
mfmalized.

c
d

yield srength = tensle srength s 0.75, based on

the Pufchasef.

e minirum

specifed yield and tenle sengi unless aclual

te$ values are requred by

Nonrimming only.

by the plate purchaser, the steel shall be fully killed. When specified by the plae purchaser,
fully killed steel shall be made to fine-grain practice.

4.2.7.3 When specfied

4.2.7.4 For plate that is to be made to specilcaons that limit the maxmum manganese content to less than 1 .60 %,
e limit of th manganese content may be ncreased to 1.60 7" (heat) at the option of the date producer to mantan
the requred strength level, provided that the maximum carbon content is reduced to 0.20 % (heat) and the weldabilty
of the ilate s given consderation. The materal shall be marked "Mod'followng the specificaon lsting. The material
shall conform to the product analysis tolerances of fable B n ASTM A6lvUA6'

of columbium, vanadium, nitrogen, copper, nckel, chromium, or molybdenum shall not

exceed the lmitations of fable 4.1 for all Group Vl materals (see Table 4.4a and Table 4.4b) and ISO 630, Grade

4.2.7,5 The use or presence

E355.

4.2.8

Heat Treatment of Plates

4.2.8.1 When specmed by the plate purchaser, fully killed plates shall be heat treated to produce grain refnement by
ether normalzing or heatng uniformly for hot forming. lf the requred treatrnent is to be obiained n conjunction with
hot fomng, the temperature to which the plates are heated for hot forming shall be equvalent to and shall not
sgnifcantly exceed the normalzing temperature. lf the treatment of the plates s not specmed to be done at the plate
producer's plant, testing shall be canied out n accordance with 4.2.8.2.

,f.2.8.2 When a plate purchaser elects to perform the required

normalzng or fabricates by hot formng (see 4.2.8.1),

the plates shall be accepted on the bass of mll tests made on full-thickness specmens heat treated n accordance
with the plate purchaser's order. lf the heat-reatment temperatures are not ndcated on the contracl the sPecimens
shall be heat treated under conditons consdered appropriate for grain refnement and for rneeting the test
requirements. The plate producer shall nform the plate purchaser of the procedure followed in treating the specimens
at the steel mll.

4.2.8.3 On the purchase ordet the plate purchaser shall ndcate to the plate producer whether the producer shall
perfom the heat treatment of the plates.

4.2.8.4 The tensile tests shall be pelormed on each plate as heat treated.

API

STANoARD

650

4.2,9 lmpact Testing of Plates

.l

,[.2.9.1 When required by the Purchaser or by 4.2.10, a set of Charpy V-notch mpact specmens shall be taken
from plates after heat treatment (if the plates have been heat treated), and the specmens shall futfll the stated
energy requrements. Test coupons shall be obtained adjacent to a tenson-test coupon. Each full-size impact
specmen shall have iE central axs as close to the plane of one-quaner plate thckness as the plate thckness wll
permit.

4.2.9.2 When

it s necessary to prepare test specirnens from separate coupons or when plates are furnished by the
plate producer in a hot-rolled condtion w subsequent heat treatTent by the fabricator, the procedure shall conform
tO ASTM A2O.

4,2.9,3 An

mpact test shall be performed on three specmens taken from a sngle test coupon or test locaton. The
average value of the specimens (with no rnre than one specrnen value beng less than the specifed minmum
value) shall comply with the specmed minimum valu. lf rnore than one value is less than the specified minmum

value, or if one value s less than two-thrds the spcmed mnmum value, three addtonal specimens shall be tested,
and each of these must have a value greater than or equalto the specifed mnmum value.

4.2.9.4 The test specinens shall be Charpy V-notch Type A specmens (see ASTM A370), with the notch
prpendcular to the surface of the plate being tested.
preparaon of full-size specnens [10 mm x 10 mm
tests shall be made on the largest subsze specmens that can be prepared from the plate.

4.2.9.5 For a plate whose thickness is insufficent to permit

(0.394 n. x 0.394

n.1,

Subsze specmens shall have a dth along the notch of at least 80 % of the material thckness.

1.2.9.6 The impact energy values obtained from subsze specrnens shall not be less than values that are
proportional to the energy values requred for full-size specmens of the same materal.

t.2.9.7 The testing apparatus, ncluding the calbration of impact machines and the permssble variations n the
tempera[e of specimens, shall conform to ASTM A370 or an equivalent testing apparatus confomng to natonal
standards or ISO standards.

4.2.10 Toughness Requrements

4.2.10.1 The ickness and desgn metal temperature of all shell plates, shell reinforcing plates, shell nsert plates,
bonom plates welded to the shell, dates used for manhole and nozzle necks, plate-ring shell-nozzle flanges, blind
flanges. and manhole cover plates shall be n accordance with Fgure 4.1a and Figure 4.1b. Notch toughness
evaluation of plate-rng flarEes, blind flanges, and manhole cover plates shall be based on "governing thckness" as
defined in 4.5.4.3. ln addition, plates more than 40 mm (1.5 in.) thick shall be of klled steel made to fine-grain practice
and heat treated by normalzng, normalizng and temperng, or quenchng and temperng, and each plate as heat
treated shall be mpact tested accofdlng to 4.2.11.2. Each TMCP A841 plate-as-rolled shall be impact tested. lmpact
test temperatJre and required energy shall be n accordance with 4.2.11.2 n lieu of the default temperatrre and
energy gen in A841.

4.2.10.2 Subjecl to e Purchaser's approval, thermo-rnechanical-conol-process (IMCP) dates (plates podrced

by a mechancal-thermal rolling process designed to enhance notch toughness) may alternavely be used where
hat treated plates are normally required by 4.2.10.1 because of thickness over 40 mm (1.5 n.). ln this case, each
TMCP plate-as-rolled shall receive Charpy V-notch mpact energy testing n accordance with 4.2.9, 4.2.10, and
4.2.1'1. When TMCP steels are used, consderaton should be given to the service conditons outlined n 5.3.3.
(1 .5 in.) thck may be used at or above the design metal temperaires
ndcaed in Fgure 4.1a and Fgure 4.1b without beng impact tested. To be used at desgn metal temperatures lower
than the temperatures indicated n Fgure 4.la and Figure 4.1b, plates shall demonstfate adequate notch toughness
in accordance with 4.2.11.3 unless 4.2 .11.2 or 4.2.11.4 has been specmed by the Purchaser. For heat-feated matefial

4.2,10.3 Plates less than or equal to 40 mm

4-7

\A/ELoEo T^NKS FoR OT- SToRAGE

10

_10
p

-r5

.9

-20

-2s

-30

-9r

0mm

56

t3

t5

r0

20

fhcknBss, hduding cooson allo,vance

1 The Group ll and Group V lines coicire at i;kn$ses less han t3 mm.
NOE 2 The Group lll and Group lllA lnes concde ai lhiroesss hss than 13 mm.
NOE 3 The materiab in eacfi gloup are listed n Table 4.4a and Table t.lb.
NOTE 4 OobLd.
NOTE 5 Use le Group llA and Group VlA.rves tur ppe and larggs (se,t.5.4.2 and 4.5.t,3).
NOTE 6 . Linear equatons provired n Table 4.3a can be usd lo calculate Desgn Metal TemperatuG
NOTE

and the hk*ness .anoe.

Figure

l,la-

(OtufD for

ea API malerial group

lnlmum P.7mis3lblo Dsgn l.tal Tompeatur for MateriaE Used n Tank Shelb without
lmpact T$ng (Sl)

(normalized, nomalized and tempred, or quenched and tempered), notch toughness shall be demonstrated on each
plate as heat treated when 4.2.11.2 requirements are specified. lsothermal lines of lowest one.day mean temperafure
are shown in Figure 4.2.

4.2.10.4 Plate used to reinforce shell openngs and nsert plates shall be of the same material as the shell plate to
which they are attached or shall be of any appropriate material lsled n Table 4.4a, Table 4.4b, Fgure 4.1a, and
Figure 4.1b. Except for noze and manway necks, the material shall be of equal or greater yield and tensle streng
and shall be compatble with the adjacent shell material (see 4.2.10-1 and 5.7.2.3, ltem d).
4.2.'10.5 The requirements in 4.2.10.4 apply only to shell nozzles and manholes. Materials for roof nozzles and
manholes do not require specal toughness.

4-8

API ANoaRo 650

60

60

50

-/-

.
E

6,)
Z'

,o

- -./

EO

-3

.6

'

30

20

--rl-

n"'P]

'10

,,1

_a
-/-.-

GlY
See NotE

-ro

g,""

v'

-'-:2

o$3)'::- -"*
e

,o

s9I"

- -

vlA

6,owvr{$

-n\\

n8

-t0
-11

-20
-30

Group lllA

-40

.* I"l
0.00

-50
-60

0.375

in.

1.00

1.25

1.50

Thckness, ndudg conosor allowance

I
NOTE 2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
NOTE 5

Th Group ll and Grorp V lnes cdncire at tidoss le3s than 1/, n.

NOTET

Lnear equalions Fovided n Tabl,.3b can bs usd to

NOTE

th Grotp lllarx, Group lllA

lnes coindd st tlid(ngss hss lan r/2 n.

The mabdsb n each 0roup are lsbd n Table 4..la and Tabls.l.4b.

Del.n d.
Use th Gloup llA 8nd Group \4A curves tur pipo and

fames (e,a.5.t2 and 1.5.,1.3).

hckness rangs.

Fgurr

4.lHnmum

clohb

O8gn Metal femperature (OMf)

br eadr APlmaterialgroup and

Pemssble DGgn lotal Temperatro for matorlas Us6d ln Tank Shells thout
lmpact Te3ng (USC)

4.l1

ToughnessProceduE

L2.11.1 Vvhen a material's toughness must b6 detrmind, it shall be done by one of the procedures described in
4.2.11.2,4.2.11.3, and 4.2.11.+, as specmed in 1.2.10.

L2.'t1.2 Each ple as mlled or heat feated shall be mpad tested in accordancs with 4.2.9 at or belo/v the design
metal temperature to show Charpy V-notc longitudnal (or transverse) values thal fumll the mnimum requrements of
Table 4.5a and Table 4.5b (see 4.2.9 for the mnmum values for one specimen and for subsize specimens). As used
here, the tem plate as rolled refers to the unit plate rolled tom a slab or direcy from an ngot n its relaton to the
location and number of specmens, not to the condion of lhe plate.

1- 11

wELoEo TaNts EoR OtL SToRAGE

Table 4.4a-Material GrouPs (Sl)

(See Fgure 4.1a and Note'l below)

Grorp ll

Group I
As Rolled,
Semi-Killed

As Rolled,
Killed or Sem-Killed

GrouP lll
As Rolled, Killed
Fne-Grain Practice

Mlerial

Notes

A573M-400

A573lvl-400

A36M

A516M-380

A516M-380

G40.21-260W

A516M-415

A5',l6M-4.15

G40.21.260W

8,9

Grade 250

8,9

Materal

Notes

Material

Notes

Maleral

A283M C

4131M B

A285M C

A131r\ A

Grade 235

Grade 250

G40.2',1-260W

Group IVA
As Rolled, Killed
Fine.Grain Practce
Material

Notes

Notes

Material

A573M-485

A]31M EH 36

I
I

A633lvl C

A573M-485

10

A516M,450

A516M-450

G40.21-300W

8, 10

4516M-485

A516M-485

G40.21,350W

8, 10

G40.21-300W

A662M B

E275 D

E2't5 C

E355 C

s275 J0
s355 J0

crade 215

G40.21,350W

)2

5355 (J2 or
K2)

4633M D
A537M Class

8,9

A537M Class 2

12

A678M A

E355 D
s27 5

Notes

Notes

A573M-485

G40.21-350W

Group Vl
Normalized or
Quenched and Tempred,
Killed Fine-Gran Practice
Reduced Carbon

Materal

A662M C

Group V
Normalzed, Klled
FneGran Practce

A573M-450

G40.21-300W

Notes

Grade 250

Group lV
As Rolled, Klled
Fine-Gran Practice
Materal

Grade 250

A36M

GrouP lllA
Normalized, Klled
FineGran Practice

A678tvl B

A737M B
A841M, Grade A, Class 1
A841M, Grade B. Class 2

12

11,12,13
11, 12, 13

NOTES

1"

Mrsr

of ttle tied mreriat soecifcation numbers refer to ASTM soecifcations (includhq Grade or Clas); lere are, however, some
s a csA sDecfcam; Grades E2?5 and E355 (rrclLrE Qualrty) are contained n lso 630; Grades

el*m!, c.il tirclun'ol

5ii{n sltrrctng quii

rnan" n ENlm25; and Grade 235, Grade 250. andcrade 275 are related to natiqral slandards

(see 4.2.6).

2.
3.
4.

Mr6t be sem-klhd or killd.

5.
-

Mmnese corlem shall be O.8O % to 1.2 % bv heat analvsis for thcknesses Ceater than 20 mrn, excepl that for each reduclbn o 0.01 %
elo 'l soecme carbon maxirrum, an ircrese of 0.06 % .rEnOanese abqre-|e specied maximum will be perrned up to the maximum
of L35 %. fhickresses < 20 rfm shall have a rnarEanese conteniof 0.80 % to 1.2 % by heat anatyss.

Thickness s 20 mm.

Ddetd.

6. Thckness s 25 mm.
7. Must be klled.
8. Musr be klled and made
9. Must be normalzed.

to fine-gran praclhe.

10.Mrst have chemisry (heat) riodifed to a maxmum carbon cooteff ofO.m and a marimun uinganese contem ol1.60 % (see 4.2.7.4).
11. Prodrced by the ttErro-riechanical cond process CrMCP).
12. See 5.7.i.6 for tests on smulated tes coupons for rEterial used in sess-relieved assrnbles.
1

3. Se ,1.2.1 0 for mpacr

Gst requiremeris (each date-as-rolled tested).

4-12

API

Table

STANDARo

650

4.4b-lt aterial Groups

(USC)

(See Figure 4.1b and Note 1 below.)

Group

As Rolled,
Sem-killed

Group ll
As Rolled,
Klled or Sem-kiled

Fine-Grain Practce

Normalzed, Killed
Fine-Gran Practice

Notes

Material

Material

Notes

Group lll
As Rolled, Klled

Group lllA

Materal

Notes

Materal

4283 C

A131 B

4573-s8

4573-58

4285 C

436

2q

4516-55

4516-55

I
I

G40.21-38W

45r6,60

4516,60

4131 A

)1

436
Grade 235

Grade 250

Grade 250

Group lV
As Rolled, Klled
Fnecran Practice

Fine.Grain Practce

Material

Materal

Notes

A573-6s

Notes

G40.21-38W

G40.21-38W

8,9

Grade 250

Grade 250

8,9

Group v
Nofmalzed, Killed
Fne-Grain Praclce

Group IVA
As Rolled, Klled
Notes

A662 C

Group Vl
Normalized or
Quenched and Tempered,
Klled Fne-Grain Practce
Reduced Carbon

Material

Notes

Material

4573-70

A131 EH 36

4633 C

Notes

4573-70

4573-70

10

4516-65

45r6.65

G40.21,44W

8, '10

4516-70

4516-70

G40.21-50W

8, 10

G40.2'l-44W

8.9

4537 Class

G40.2'r-50W

8,9

4537 Class 2

E215 0

4662 B

4633 D

G40.2'1,44W

E355 D

G40.21-50W

s215 J2

4678 B

E275 C

5355 (J2 or K2)

4737 B

E355 C

s275 J0
s355 J0

Grade 215

12

4678 A

4841, Grade A, Class 1

4841, Grade B, Class 2

12

11,12, 13
11,12, 13

NOTES

1. Most ol le listed

rnaterial specicatixr nunrs refer to ASTM specificalbos (ncludrE Grade or Class); lere ae, honever, soE
exceptbns: G40.21 (includirE Grade) is a CSA specificatlr; Grades E275 and E355 (rdring QualM are cortained in lso 630; Grades
5275 ard 5355 (rcludng quatty) ae cortained n EN1m25; and Grade 235, Grade 250, and Grade 275 are reliated to national slandads
(see 4.2.6).

2.

Must be sem-klled or klled.

3. Thicknss < O.75 in.

,{. Ddeted.
5. Mangares contert sha[

be 0.&r% to 1.2 % by tEat anatysis fc tt**riesses qfeatr lhan 0.75 h., erce |at l ea reducrioo o10.01 %
beb' the specified cbon maxinxrn, an irErease of 0.06 % manganese above |e specied maimum ll be permined W 10 le rnaxirrum
of 1.35 %. Thdoesses < 0.75 n. shall have a manganese coneri ol0.8O % to 1.2 % by heat amlysis.

6.

Ttickness s

7.

Mtst be killed.

8.
9.

Must be klled and made to fine-gfan practice.

in.

Mus be rErmalzed.

10. Musr have chernisry (hear) rodied to a maximum carboo

11. Prodrced by

coent o 0.20% and a maxrrum mmganese cootent ol 1.60 % (see 4.2.7.4).

e emD-rnechanhal conol process (T\CP).

se 5.7.,t.6 fq tesa on srrulated ted coupons for material LEd h sfess{elved assemHes.
1 3. See ,t.2.1 0 fo. rpacl test requiemers (each phte-as{olled tesred).
1

2.

4-',t 3

wELoED TaN(s FoR OtL SToMGE

Table 4.sa-Mnimum lmpact Test Rquirements for Plates (Sl) (See Note)
Average lmpact Value of
Three Specimenso

Plte Materala and Thickness ( in mm

Thckness

Longitudinal

Transverse

mm

20

18

r< 40

4-l

27

40<r<45
45<f<50

48

34

54

41

t<

68

54

48

34

40<r<45

54

4',!

45<<50

61

48

50<<lm

68

54

Groups l, ll. lll, and lllA

/< maximum lhicknesses

in 4.2.2 through 4.2.5

croups lV lVA, V and Vl (except quenched and tempered and TMCP)

50 <
Group Vl (quenched and tempered and TMCP)

6 See Table 4.4a.

b lriterpolation is pe,mmed
NOTE

to

For plate ring f,anges,

Table

<

100

40

e nearestFule.
e mrimum rpact

test requrernents for all tlr*nesses shall be lose for

,<

,tO mm.

4.5b-Minimum lmpact Test Requrements for Plates (USC) (See

Note)

Average lmpact Value of

Three Specimensb

Thickness
Plate Materala and Thickness (0 in lnches

Longtudnal Transverse

ft.tbf

an.

Groups l, ll, lll. and lllA

ft-tbf

15

13

r< 1.5

30

?n

1.5 < r< 1.75

35

25

40

30

50

40

< 1.5

35

25

1.5 < r< 1.75

40

30

45

35

50

40

,< maxmum thicknesses n 4.2.2 through 4.2.5

Groups lV lVA, V and Vl (excepl quenched and tempered and TMCP)

t<2
2<t<4

1.75 <

Group Vl (quenched and tempered and TMCP)

1.75 <

t<2

2<t<4

a
b

See Table 4.4b.

ferpolalbn

NOTE

s permiued to

nearest

ftlbf.

For date ring ffanges, the mnmum pacl test reqdrernents

fd allhcknesses shallbe ihose for ,<

1.5 in.

4-14

d)

API SIANDARo 650

ructural Steels lsted

n AISC, Manual

of $eel Construction.

e) CSA G40.21, Grades 260W(38W), 300W(44W), 350W(50w), 260WT(38WT), 300WT(44WT),

and

350WT(50WT). lmperial unit equivalent grades of CSA Specificaon G40.21, shown in parenthesis, are also
acceptable.

ISO 630, Grade E275, Qualies B, C, and D.

g)

EN 10025, Grade 5275, Qualies JR, J0, and J2.

h)

Recognized national standards. ructural steel that s produced n accordance with

recognized natonal

standard and that meets the requrements of Table 4.2 s acceptable when approved by the Purchaser.
a

4,4.2

All steel for structural shapes shall be rnade by the open-hearth, eleclrc-fumace, or basic oxygen process.
Copper-bearing steel s acceptable when approved by the Purchaser.

4.4.3

Not all of the suctural steel shapes listed n AISC (4.4.1 [dl) and orher national standards (4.4.1[hl) are well
suited for weldng. Material selection for struclural shapes requring welded connections shall include confirmaon of
the material's weldablity from the structural shape Manufacturer, other reputable sources, or by weld testing.
Strucural steel shapes havng poor weldablity shall only be used for bolled connecton designs.

4.4.4

Weldable-quality pipe that conforms to the physical propenjes specifed in any of the standards lsted in 4.5.1
may be used for strucural purposes with the allowable stresses stated in 5.'10.3.

4.5

Piping and Forgings

1.5.1 Unless otherwise specmed n ths strndard, ppe and pipe couplngs and forgngs shall confom to the
specifcations listed n 4.5.1.1 and 4.5.1.2 or to Monal standards eq.ivalent to the specications listed.

4.5,1.1

The follo ,ing specifications are acceptable for tipe and dpe couplngs:

a)

API Spec 51, Grades A, B, and X42;

b)

ASTM A53tvUA53, Grades A and B;

c)

ASTM A106 tA106, Grades A and B;

d)

ASTM A234fvUA234, Grade WPB;

e)

ASTM A333?rV4333, Grades 1 and 6;

ASTM A334fvl/A334, Grades 1 and 6;

g)

ASTM A4201WA420, Grade WPL6;

h)

ASTM A524, Grades I and ll;

ASTM A671 (see 4.5.3).

,1.5.1.2 The follorving specmcabns are acceptable for forgngs:

a)

ASTM A105ttrUA105;

b)

ASTM A181M4181;

c)

ASTM A350M/A350. Grades LF1 and LF2.

WETDED TANKS FoR OIL SIoRAGE

1.s.2 Unless ASTM A671 ppe

4-15

s used (electric-fuson-welded pipe) (see 4.5.3), materal for shell nozzles and shell

n 42'101 When shell

manhole necks shall be seamless pipe, seamless forging, or ptte material as specified
B; ASTM A524; ASTM
Grade
A106,
with
ASTM
pipe
saticompy
;reriats are croup tV tVA, V, or Vi,'seamtess
A3331WA333, Grade 6; or ASTM A334rVA334, Grade 6.

4.5.3

the followng.
When ASTM A67l pipe s used for shell nozzles and shell manhole necks, it shall comply wth

a)

55, and CE 60.

Material selecon Shall be lmited to Grades cA 55, CC 60, Cc 65, CC 70, CD 70, cD 80, CE

b)

The pipe shall be pressure tested in accordance with 8.3 of ASTM 4571'

c)

to
The plate specificaton for the Ppe shall satisfy the requirements of 4.2.7, 4.2.8, and 4 2 9 that are applcable
that plate specmcation.

d)

in accordance
lmpacl tests for qualifying the welding procedure for the pipe longitudinal welds shall be Pefformed
with 9.2.2.

nozzles and
Except as covered n 4.5.3, the toughness requirements of ppe and forgings to be used for shell
manholes shall be established as described in 4.5.4. 1, 4.5.4.?, 4.5.4.3, and 4.5 4 4'

4.5.t

4.5.4.1 Pping marerials made according to ASTM A333ruA333, A334fvvA334, A350M/A350, and A420, Grade
WpL6 may'be"useO at a Oesign mtaitemftrature no lower than the mpact test temPerature required by the ASTfirPi
specifcan for the applicabl material grade without additonal mpact tests (see 4.5.4.4).

4.5.4.2 Oer ppe and forging materals shall be classified under the material groups shoun n Figure 4.1a and
Fgure 4.1b as follows:

a)'

Group [A-Apt Spec 51, crades A, B,and X42; ASTM Al O6lvl/A106, Grades A and B; ASTM A53tvA53, Grades
n an e; nsr, n:r 81fvuA181; ASTM A l O5tuA105; and A234twA234, Grade WPB;

b)

Group VIA-ASTM A524, Grades I and ll.

4.5.4.3 The materials n the group6 listed n 4.5.4.2 may be used at nominal thicknesses, ncludng conoson
allowance, at a desgn maal teirpeiature no lower than thoie shown in Figure 4.1a and Figure 4_.lb without impact
testng (see 4.5.4.4 nd Figure +.'a).
as follows:

a)

fte

for bun-weldedjonts, the nominal thckness of the thckest weldedjoint;

b) for corner or lap welds, the thinner

c)

goveming thcknesses to be used in Fgures 4.1a and Fgure 4 1b shall be

of the two partsjoned;

1/ of their nominal thickness.

for nonwelded parts such as bolted blnd flanges and manhole covers,

1.5.4.4 When mpact tests are required by 4.5.4.1 or 4.5.4.3, they shall be performed.in accordance with the
requrements, ncldng the minimum energ-y requirements, of ASTM A333rUA333, Grade 6, for pipe or ASTM

A3'5O[IVA35O, Grade L-Fl, for forgings at a test tempefature no higher than the desgn metal temperature' Except for
the plate specified n 4.2.9.2, the-ma-terials specified in 4.5.1 and 4.5.2 for shell nozzles, shell manhole necks, and all

forgings uieO on shell openngs shall have a mnmum Charpy V-notch mpact streng of 18 J (13 ftJb0 (full-sze
specmen) at a temperature no hgher than the design rnetal temperatre.

4.6

Flanges

. 4.6.f Slp on, ring-type, weldng neck, long welding neck and lap jont flanges shall confom to the material

requirements of aSUE 816.5 for forged carbon steel flanges. Plate material used for nozzle flanges shall have

4-16

API

STANDARD

650

-L

T
Slip-on Flange

Ring-fype Flange

l_

T
l_

]_

Lap Joint Flangs

T
Welding-Nck FlagG

Long Weldng.Neck Flange

NOTE

Shgll reinforcing date s not includd n thesa lluslrons.

fs = shell thc(ness; f, = noze neck U'c*ness: Ir = f,ange bckness;

NOTE

The governng thckess for each cornporierit shall bg as follor./si

NOTE

fc = bolted cover thicknss.

Gowming Thd(nss
(thnner of)

Corponets
,lo nck at shdl

Slporl flange and

1,,

node nck

RnetlDe flange afld nod n6d(

Weldng.nd( flangg and
Loog wddng-ned( flal|g8
Nonrvldd bolted

Lapttf idnt

covs

Aang

or fs

ho
tn

node nd(

Tr

o Tl

h
f or

ts

1l T"
tn

or Tl

Fgure 4.3-Governing Thickness for lmpact Test Determination of Shell Nozzle and
Manhole Materals (see 4.5.4.3)

wELoED TaNKS FoR OtL SToRAGE

\--

4-11

physical properties bener than or equal to those required by ASME 816.5. Shell-nozzle flange material shall conform
ioi.Z.lO.f and 4.2.10.2. Lapjoint flanges shall not be used without the approvalofthe Purchaser.

For nominal pipe sizes greater than NPS 24, flanges that conform to ASME 816.47, Series B, may be used,

4.6.2

subject to the purcn'aser's aiproval. Particular attentin should be gven to ensuring that mating flanges of
appurtenances are compatible.

4.7

a)

Boltng

Unless otherwse specified on the Data Sheet, Table 2, flange boltng shall conform lo ASTM A193 87 and the
dimensions specmO in ASME 818.2.1. Nuts shall conform to ASTM A194 Grade 2H and the dimensons
specfied in AME 818.2.2. Both shall be heavy hex pattem. All bolts and nuts shall be threaded n accordance
with ASME 81.13M (Sl), or with ASME 81.1(US) as follows:

1) bohs

uP to and ncluding 1 n.

diameter: UNC Class

2A ftt

2) nuts for bolts up to and ncluding 1 n. diameter: UNC Class 28 fit

3) bolts 1.125 in. diameter and larger: 8N Class 2Afit

4) nuts for bolts 1.125

o b)

n. dameter and

larger:

8N Class 28 fit

Unless oense specfed on the Data Sheet, Table 2, anchors shall be one of the following:

1) round bar to ASTM A36, threaded and galvanized;

\-

2) bohs to ASTM F1554, Grade 36, galvanized.

Nuts for anchors shall be galvanized heavy hex. Welding s not permitted on anchors that are galvanzed.

c)

All other bolting shall conform to ASTM A3O7 or A193fvUA193. A325fvl/A325 may be used for structural purposes
only. The Purcaser should specify on the order what shape of boh heads and nuts is desred and whether regular
or heavy dimensions are desred.

4.8

Welding Electrodes

For the weldng of materials with a minmum tensile strength less than 550 MPa (80 ksi), the manual arcwelding electrodes sall conform to the E6O and 870 classificaon seres (suitable for the electric cunent
characteristics, the positon of welding. and other conditons of intended use) n AWS A5.1 and shall conform to

4.8.1

7.2.1.10 as applicable.
For the welding of materials with a mnmum tensle strength of 550 MPa to 585 MPa (80 ks to 85 ks), the
manual arc-weldng electrodes shall conform to the E80XX-CX classficaon series n AWS 45.5.

4,8.2

4.9

Gaskets

4.9.1

General

t.9.1.1 Gasket materials shall be specmed in Table 3 on the Data Sheet. Unless otherwise specified by the
Purchaser, gasket materials shall not contan asbestos.

4-',t8

API

4.9.1.2

STANDARo

650

Sheet gaskets shall be connuous. Metal gaskets made continuous by weldng are acceptable if the weld is

ground flush and finished the sarne as the unwelded portion of the gasket. Rope or tape gaskets shall have
overlapped ends.
4.9.

.3

Each gasket shall be rnade with an integral centering or posionng device.

1.9.1.4 Nojont sealing compound, gasket adhesve, adhesve positionng tape, or lubricant shall be used on the
sealng surfaces of gaskes, or flanges duringjont makeup unless specmcally allowed by the Purchaser. When these
materials are approved by the Purchaser, consderaton should be given to chemcal compatiblity with the gasket and
flange materials.

t.9.1,5 Spare gaskets are not requred unless specifed

the Data Sheet, Lne 23.

4,9.2 Service

When service gaskets are desgnated to be fumished by the Manufaclurer, the gaskets provded shall be as specmed
n the Data Sheet, Table 3.

4.9.3

Test

4.9.3,1 Test gaskets must have comparable dimensions and compressbilitr characterstcs as service gaskets.
Descripons of gaskets for temporary use only as test gaskets shall be submined for Purchaser's approval.

4.9.3.2

For jonts that will not be dsassembled after testing, the test gasket

rut

be the specfed service gasket.

1.9.3.3 Except for stainless steel bolting, flange bols and nuts used for testing are acceptable for use in the
completed tank.

SECTION 5_DESIGN

5.1 Joints
5.1.1 Definitions
The definitions in 5.'t.1.1 through 5.1.1.8 apply to lankjoint desgns. (See 9.1 for definilions that apply to welders and
welding procedures. See Section 3 for additonal defnitom )
5.1.1.1

butt-weld

A weld placed in a groove between two abutting members. Grooves rnay be square, V-shaped (sngle or double), or
U-shaped (sngle or double), or they may be either single or double beveled
5.1.1.2

double-welded butt joint

Ajont between two a-buttng par6 lying in approximately the same plane that is welded from both sdes.
5.1.1.3

double-u,elded laP joint

A joint between two overlapping members n whch the overlapped edges of both members are welded with lillet
welds.
5.1.1.4

fllet weld

\_

A weld of approximately iangular cross-section thatjons Nvo surfaces at approximateiy right angles, as n a lapjoint,
tee Jotnt, of comer Jolnt.

5.1.1.5

full-fillet weld
A fllet weld whose sze s equal to the thckness of the thinnerjoned member.

5.1.1.6

single-welded butt jont wilh backng

A jo]nt between two abutting parts lying in approximately the same plane

thal is welded from one side only with the

use of a strp bar or another suitable backing materal.

5.1.1.7

sngle-u,elded lap joint

A jont between two overlappng members n whch the overlapped edge of one member

welded with a fillet weld.

5.1.1.8

tack weld
A weld made to hold the pans of a weldment n proper alignment until the fnal welds are made.

5.1.2 Weld

Sze

5,1.2.1 The sze of a groove weld shall be based on

the jont penetration (that is, the

dep of charnfering plus the

root penetraton when specified).

\-.

5,f .2.2 The size of an equal-leg fllet weld shall be based on the leg leng of the largest sosceles right riangle that
can be inscrbed win the cross-section of the fllet weld. The size of an unequal-l fllet weld shall be based on the
leg leng[hs of the largest right triangle that can be inscribed within
5-'l

e cross-secton of the fllet weld.

API STaNDARo 650

5.1.3 Restrictons on Jonts

5.1.3.1

Restrctions on the type and sze of welded jonts are gven n 5. t.3.2 through 5.1.3.8.

5.1.3.2

Tack welds shall not be consdered as havng any strength value in

e fnished structure.

5.1.3.3 The mnmum size of fillet welds shall be as folloti,s: On plates 5 mm (3ho n.) thck, the weld shall be a fullfllet weld, and on plates more than 5 mm (3/16 in.) thick, the weld thckness shall not be less than one-thrd the
thickness of the thnner plate at thejont and shall be at least 5 mm (3h6 n.).
5.1.3.4 Single-welded

lap

jon6 are pemissible only on bottom plates and roof plates.

5.1.3.5 Lap-welded jonts, as tack-welded, shall be lapped at least

fve times the nominal thickness of the hnner

plate joined; ho^rever, with double-welded lapjoints, the lap need not exceed 50 mm (2 in.), and with single-welded
lapjdnts, the lap need not exceed 25 mm ('l n.).

5.1,3.6 Weld passes are rescted

as follows:

.5.I.3.6.1

For bottom date welds and roof plate welds for all materials, and for shell-to-bonom welds for Group6 l, ll,
lll, and lllA materials, the following weld sze requrements apply:

a)

For manual weldng processes, fillet weld legs or groove weld depths greater than 6 mm (1h n.) shall be
multpass, unless othen/se specifed on the Data Sheet, Lne 15.

b)

For sem-automac, machine, and automatc weldng processes, with the excepton for electrGgas welding in
7.2.3.4, fillet weld legs or groove weld depths greater than 10 mm (3/s n.) shall be multipass, unless othenvise
specfied on the Data Sheet, Line 15.

5,1.3.6.2 For Groups lV lVA, V, or Vl shell-to-bottom welds for all weldng processes, all welds shall be made usrE
a mnimum of two passes.

5.1.3.7 Attachrnents to tank exterior surfaces shall be as follows.

a)

Except as provided n item b. below all attachments to tank elferior surfaces shall be completety seal welded (no
ntermi[ent weldng) to minmize rust streaking.

b)

lf specifed on the Data Sheel intermittent weldng s permmed for:

1) wind grders as described

n 5.1.5.8;

2) attachments to surfaces that will be covered by insulaton;

3) attachments to sulaces of conosion-resistant materials, includng hjt not lmited to stanless steel (See Annex
S and Annex X) and alumnum (See Annex AL).

5.1.3.8 Except as permmed in 5.1.5.5 and 5.1.5.6, peflnanent

weld jont backing sips are pemmed only with

approval of the Purchaser.

5.1.4 Weldng Symbols

Welding symbols used on &awings shall be the symbos of the American Welding Society.

$e

WELoED TANKS FoR OrL SToRAGE

5.1.5 Typcal Joints

5.1.5.1 General

a)

Typical tankjonts are shown n Fgure 5.1, Fgure 5.2, Fgure 5.3a, Figure 5.3b, and Fgure 5.3c.

b) The top

surfaces of bottom welds (bun-welded annular plates, bun-welded sketch plates, or Fgure s.3bjoin6)
ground
shall be
flush where they will contact the bonoms of the shell, insert plates, or reinforcing plates.

5.1.5.2 Vertcal Shell Joints

a)

Vertical shelljoints shall be buttjonts with complete penetraton and complete fuson attained by double welding
or other means that wll obtain the same quality of deposited weld metal on the inside and outside weld surfaces to
meet the requirements of 7.2.1 and 7 .?.3. The suitablity of the plate preparaton and welding procedure shall be
determned in accordance with 9.2.

b)

Vertical jonts n adjacent shell courses shall not be aligned. but shall be offset from each other
distance of 5 where s the plate thckness of the thicker course at the point of offset.

Single-V butt joint

Single-U butt joint

Double-V butt joint

Square{roove butt joint

Double-U butt jont

NOTE See 5.1.5.2 for specfic requirements for vertical shefl ionts.

Fgure 5.1-Typcal Vertical Shell Jonts

a minimum

API SfANDARD 650

5-4

Optonal
outside angle

Alternative
angle-to-shell joint

Squar+groove

Angl+.tcshell
butt

jont-

butt

Singlqbevel
buttjointcomplete'penetration
NOTE See 5.1.5

joint-

complete penetrton

complete penetration

Double-bevel
butt

jont-

complete penetraton

3 for specific requirements for horizontral shell onts'

Fgure s.2-Typical Horzontal Shell JonB

5.1.5.3 Horzontal Shell Joints

a)

Horizontal shelljoints shall have complete penetration and complete fuson; however, as an ahernative, top angles
may be attach to the shell by a ciouble-welded lap joint. The suitability of e pate preparaon and welding
procedure shall be determined in accordance with 9.2.

b)

Unless otheMise specifed, abutting shell plates at horizontaljoints shall have a common vertical centerline.

5.1.5.4 Lapwelded Bottom Joints

5.1.5.4..t Lap-welded bonom plates shall be reasonably rectangular. Additionally, plate may be either square cut or

depos'rts, and
may have miliedges. Mill edge; to be welded shall be reiatvely smooth and uniform, free of deleterious
lap welded
Purchaser,
the
by
specfed
otherwise
Uniess
be
achieved.
weld
can
fu'l
fillet
that
na a snape suh
puddle
drawdurng
plrto on s't'op"d bottorr" shall be oveflapped n a manner to feduce the tendency for liquid to
down.

shell, and

S.1.S.4.2 Three-plate laps in tank bottoms shall be at least 3OO mm (12 in.) from each other, from the tank
plates come together and
fiomoinS Uetwedn annu'lar plates and the bottom. A three-plate lap s created where three
plates
lapwelded to each other
are
par
of
bottom
a
where
A
locaton
lap
welds.
by
to one another
.lr pit*
plate onto a buttbottom
a
sngle
tapping
""*o
tap,
but
pte
a
three-plate
tonstiurtes
an
annular
n re r"ppeO onto
plates
are not joined
*"fO"O unhilur plate splice does not constige a three-flte hp weld snce the two annular
5.3d.
in
Figure
plate
are
llustrated
;th", bt ; hd *etd. ihese tapjoint connecons ro the btrtt-weld annular

WELDED TAKS FOR OIL STORAGE

Roof-Plate Jont

t#;'t'ffiffi
Roof-to-Shell Jonts
t
+

-'t 75t sR<3f

lnsde of shell

Altemative Roof -to-Shell Jont

(See Note 2)

'r-\----r
annular
-

Bottom or
bottom olate

II
I

l-

lnside

J--
Bottom-tohell Jont

=:ffi
Singe-welded

91131!

t---------------

R-Ta*

weld

Sngle-welded butt jont

tull-fillet lap joint

wth backing strip

Bottom'Plate Joints
NOTE
NOTE

1 See 5.1.5.4 through 5.1.5.9 for specfic requirements for roof and bottom jonts
2 The altematve roof-to-shell iont s subject to the lmitatos of 5.1.5 9' ltem f.
Figure s.3a-TyPcal Roof and Bottom Joints

API

5-6

STANoARD

650

Figure s.3b-Method for Preparing Lap-welded Bottom plates under Tank Shell (See 5.1.5.4)

Shell plate

A=Bfor
up to 25 mm
(1 in.) annular
plate

45'

mnmum

Annular bottom plate

NOTE
NOTE

1
2

NOTE3

A + B mnimum

13 mm (1/2 n.) maximum

6 mm (1/a in.) minimum

A = Fillet weld size lmited to 13 mm (1/2 n.) maxmum.

A + B = Thnner of shell or annular bottom plate thickness.
Groove weld B may exceed fillet szeAonly when annular plate is thicker than 25 mm (1 in.).

Figure s.3c-Detail of Double Fllet-groove Weld for Annular Bottom Plates with a Nomnal Thckness
Greater than 13 mm (r/z in.) (See 5. f .5.7, ltem b)

5.1.5.4.3 When annular plates are used or are required by 5.5.1, they shall be butt-welded and shall have a radal
width that provides at least 600 mm (24 in.) between the inside of the shell and any lap-weldedjoint in the remander
of the bottom. Bottom plates need to be welded on the top side only, with a contnuous full-fllet weld on all seams.
Unless annular bottom plates are used, the bottom plates under the bottom shell ring shall have the outer ends of the
jonts frned and lap-welded to form a smooth bearing suface for the shell plates, as shown in Figure 5.3b. Lap-welded
bottom plates shall be seal-welded to each other on the exposed outer periphery of their lapped edges.

wELoED faNKS FoR Ot! SToRAGE

5-7

Bottom plate

lap

joint-

Bottom plate

Fgure 5.3d-SPacng of fhree-Plate Welds at Annular Plates

5.1.5.5 Butt-Welded Bottom Joints

or V grooves'
Bm-wdded bottom plates shall have ther parallel edges prepared for btrn welding with either Square
penetration
weld'
Butt-welds shall be made using an appropriate welj joi;t onfiguration that yields a complete

in Figure 5 1 The use of

Tvocal oermissible bottom brm-welds wittrout a Uacking strip are the same as those shown
permttedButt-welds using a
plate
is
of
the
'riiitig ruip t teast 3 mm (1/B n.) rhick rack welded-to the underside

itrip are shown in Fgure 53a. tf square grooves are employed, the root openings tY]1 "?,_!. less than 6
plate edges unless the
mm 1r[ ,n.r' o .",u1 spacer s-ha[ be used to mainin re root opeiring between the adjoining
jonts n

Oacking

Manufactuier submits another rnethod of bu-weldng the bottom for the Purchaser's aPproval Three-plate

etankbonomshallbeatleast3oomm(12n.)fromeachotherandfromthetankShell.

API SIANDARD 650

5.1,5.6 Bottom Annular-Plate Joints

Bonom annular-plate radial joints shall be butt-welded n accordance with 5.1.5.5 and shall have complete
penetration and complete fuson. The backing strp, f used, shall be compatble for welding the annular plates
together.

5.1.5.7 Shell-to-Bottom Fllet Welds

a)

For bottom and annular plates wth a nominal thckness 13 mm (1/z in.), and less, the attachment between the
bottom edge of the lowest course shell plate and the bottom plate shall be a continuous fillet weld lad on each
side of the shell plate. The size of each weld shall not be more than 13 mm (1/2 in.) and shall not be less than the
nominal thickness of the thnner of the two plates joined (lhat is, the shell plate or the bottom plate immediately
under the shell) or less than the following values:
Nomnal Thickness of Shell

(mm)
5
20
> 20 fo 32
>32to45
> 5 to

b)

plate

0n.)

0.1875
> 0.1875 to 0.75
> 0.7S to 1.25
> 1,25101.75

Mnmum Sze of Fllet Weld

(mm)
5
6
I
10

(in.)
3/16

1la
s/16
3/s

For annular plates with a nomnal thickness greater than t 3 mm (1/2 n.), the attachment welds shall be sized so
that either e legs of the fillet welds or the groove depth plus the leg of the fillet for a combined weld is of a
equal to the annular-Plate thckness (see Fgure 5.3c), but shall not exceed the shell plate

thickness.

c)

sze

Shell-tGbottom fillet weld around low-type renforcng pads shown in Figure 5.8 Details a and b or around shell
insert plates that extend beyond the outside suface of the adjacent tank shell shall be sized as required by

paragraphsaorbabove.

d)

The bonom or annular plates shall be suffcient to provide a minimum 13 mm (1/2 in.) from the toe of the fllet weld
referenced n 5.1.5.7c to the ouBide edge of the bottom or annular plates.

5.1.5.8 Wind Girder Joints

'

a)

Full-penetration butt-welds shall be used forjonng ring secons.

b)

Continuous welds shall be used for all horizontal top-sidejonb and for all venicaljonts. Horizontal bottom-sde
jonts shall be seal-welded unless specified otherwse by the purchaser.

5.1.5.9 Roof and Top-Angle Jonts

a)

Roof plates shall, as a mnmum, be welded on the top side with a connuous full-lllet weld on all seams. Buttwelds are also permitted.

b)

For ftangble roofs, roof plates shall be attached to the top angle of a tank with a contnuous fillet weld on the top
side only, as spcifed in 5.10.2.6. For non-ftangible roofs, altemate detals are pemned.

c)

The top-angle seclons, tenson rngs, and compresson rirEs shall be joined by futt-welds having complete
penetraon and fusion. Joint effcency factors need not be applied when conformng to the requrements of 5.10.5
and 5.10.6.

d)

At the opon of the Manufacturer, for self-supporting roofs of the cone, dome, or umbrella type, the edges of the
roof plates may be flanged horizontally to rest flat aganst the top angle to mprove welding conditions.

.-.\

WELoED TaNKS FoR OrL SToRAGE

e)

Except as specmed for open-top tanks in 5.9, for tanks wth frangible joints per5.10.2.6, for self-supporting roofs n
5.10.5, and 5.10.6, and for tanks wth the flanged roof-to-shell detail described n ltem f below tank shells shall be
supplied with top angles of not less than the followng szes:
Mnmum Top Angle

Tank Dameter

(mm)

@
D<

11 m,

(D< 35 ft)

11 m< D<18m, (35ft<D<60ft)

D> 18 m, (D> 60fr)

Szea

Minimum Top Angle Szea

(n.)

50x50x5
50x50x6
75x75x10

2 x 2 x3116

2xZx111

3x3x3/g

Approximate equvalent szes may b used to accommodate ocal avalablity of materials.

For fixed roof tanks equipped with full shell heght nsulation orjacketng, the horizontal leg of the toP shell stiffener
shall project outward. Fof nsulaton system compatblity, the Purchaser shall specify if the horizontal leg s to be

larger than specified above.

b)

For tanks with a diameter less than or equalto 9 m (30 ft) and a supported cone roof (see 5.10.4), the top edge of
the shell may be flanged in leu of installing a top angle. The bend radius and the wdth of the flanged edge shall

conform to te detals of Figure 5.3a. Ths constructon may be used for any tank with a self-supporting roof (see
5.10.5 and 5.10.6) if the total cross-sectional area of the junction fulflls the stated area requrements for the
construction of the top angle. No additional member, such as an angle or a bar, shall be added to e flanged roof-

to-shelldetail.

5.2

DesignConsderatons

5.2.1 Loads
Loads are defned as follows.

a)

Dead Load (O): The weight of the iank or tank component, including any conosion allowance unless otherwse
noted.

b)

in. of water) except that Extemal Pressure (PJ

of water) for tanks with crculaon vents meeting Annex H requiremenE. Refer

Design External Pressure (PJ: Shall not be less than 0.25 kPa
shall b consdered as

kPa

(O in.

to Annex V for external pressure greater than 0.25 kPa (1 in. of water). Design requiremenb for vacuum
exceeding this value and desgn requirements to resist flotation and extemal fluid pressure shall be a matter of
agreement between the Purchaser and the Manufacturer (see Annex V). Tanks that rnet the requirenrents of ths

standard may be subjected to a partial vacuum of 0.25 kPa (1 in. of water). without the need to provide any
additional supporting calculations.

c)

Desgn lnternal Pressure (P): Shall not exceed 18 kPa (2.5 lbn.2).

Hydrostatic Test (4): The load due to flling the tank with water to the desgn liquid level.

e)

lnternal Floating Roof Loads:

1) Dmd load of nternal floating roof (rri ncluding the weight of the flotation compartments, seal and all other
floating roof and attached components.

2) lnternal floang roof uniform live load

(Z) (0.6 kPa [12.5 lbfft2D f no automatic drains are provided, (O.24 kPa
[5 lbflfz]) f automatc drains are provided).

3) lnternal floating roof pont load (z) of at least

kN [500 lbfl over 0.1 m2 [1

4) lnternal floating

f)

ft21

Nvo men walkng anlMhere on the roof. One applied load ot 2.2
appled an]Nhere on the roof addresses two men walkng.

roof design extemal pressure (Pr) of (O.24 kPa [5 |bflft2]) minimum.

Minmum Roof Live Load (): 1 .o kPa (20 Ib/fr2) on the horizontal prqiected area of the rmf. The mnimum roof
lve load may alternatively be determned in accordance with ASCE 7, but shall not be less than 0.72 kPa (15 pso.
The minimum roof live load shall be reported to the Purchaser.

o g)

Seismic (E): Seismic loads detemned in accordance with E.l through E.6 (see Data Sheet, Line 8).

API

5-10

STANoARD

650

shall be detemined from ASCE 7, Figure 7-1 or Table 7l unless the ground snow
.- h) Snow (5): The ground snow load
load that equals or exceeds the value based on a 2o/o annual probability of being exceeded (so-year rnean

recurrence nterval) or a national standard (such as the National Bulding Code of Canada) s specified by the
Purchaser.

1) The balanced desgn snow load (S) shall be 0.84 times the ground snow load. Alternately, the balanced design
snow load (S) shall be determined from the ground snow load in accordance wth ASCE 7. The balanced
desgn snow load shall be reported to the Purchaser.

2) The unbalanced design snow load (SJ for cone roofs with a slope of 10" or less shall be equal to the balanced
snow load. The unbalanced design snow load (SJ for all other roofs shall be 1.5 times the balanced design
snow load. Unbalanced design snow load shall be applied over a 135' sector of e roof plan with no snow on
the remaning 225' sector. Ahernately, the unbalanced snow load shall be determined from the ground snow
load in accordance with ASCE 7

3) The balanced and unbalanced design snow loads shall be reported to the Purchaser.

. ) Stored Liquid (fl: The load due to filling the tank to the design liqud level (see 5.6.3.2) with liquid with e desgn
specific gravity specmed by the Purchaser.

j)

Test Pressure (P): As requred by F.4.4 or F.7.6.

k)

Wind

(Ifl:

The desgn wnd speed (y) shall be either:

the 3-sec gust design nd speed determned from ASCE 7-05 multipled by { Fgure 6-1; or

the 3-sec gust design wind speed specmed by the Purchaser, which shall be for a 3-sec Atlst based on a 2 %
annual probablty of beng exceeded lso-year mean recunence ntervall.

the 3-sec gust design wind speed determned from ASCE 7-10 for rsk category specifed by the Purchaser
(Figure 26.5-1A, Fgure 26.5-18, or Figure 26.5- lC) rrultpled by 0.78; or

The 3-sec gust wind speed used shall be reported to the Purchaser.

1) Design wind pressure (&/s and fi/vd using desgn wind speed (14: The design wind pressure on shell (Pws)
shall be 0.86 kPa (14190)2, (18 lbfn?,vlla0ll on venical projected areas of cyndrcal surfaces. The design
wind uplift pressure on roof (fup) shall be 1.44 kPa (I,4190)2, (f3O lbflftzllu1zo/l2) (see item 2) on horizontal
prqected areas of conical or doubly curved sulaces. These design wind pressures are in accordance with
ASCE 7-05 for wind exposure Category C. As alternaves, pressures may be determined in accordance with:

a)

ASCE 7-05 (exposure category and importance factor provided by Purchaser); or

b)

ASCE 7-10 (exposure category and risk category provded by Purchaser) wi either velocity multiplied by
0.78 or the ASCE 7-10 pressure multiplied by 0.6; or

c)

a national standard for

specifc conditions for the tank beng designed.

2) The design uplift pressure on the roof (wind plus internal pressure) need not exceed 1.6 times the design
pressure P determned n F.4.1.

3) Windward and leeward horizontal wind loads on e roof are conservatively equal and opposite and therefore
they are not ncluded in the above pressures.

4) Fastest mile wind speed mes

I
I
I

NOTE

1.2 is approxmately equal to 3-sec gust wind speed (14

ASCE 7-10 wind velocities now have LRFD load faclors and rhk category (importance faclors) buh n. whereas API
650 uses the worknq stess. The 0.78 factor appled to the ASCE 7-10 wind speed provdes a conveEion to working sess
levels.

WEI DFD TaNKs aoR OtL SToRAGE

\/

5-1',l

. l) Extemal Loads:
. 1) The Purchaser shall state the magntJde and drection of extemal loads or restraint, if any, for whch the shell or
shell connections must be desgned. The design for such loadings shall be a matter of agreement between the
Purchaser and e Manufa cturer.

.
o

2) Unless otheMise specified, seismc desgn shall be

in accordance with Annex E.

3) Design for localzed wind induced forces on roof components shall be a matter of agreement between the
Purchaser and the Manufacfurer.

4) Localized loads resulting from items such as ladders, stai6, plaorms, etc., shall

be consdered.

5) The Purchaser shall siate the magnitude and drecon of any external loads other than normal personnel
access for whch the roof manholes and openings shall be designed. The design for sr.rch loadings shall be a
matter of agreement between the Purchaser and the Manufacrer.

5.2.2 LoadCombnations
Loads shall be combned as follows. Design rules in this andard use these load combinaons, ncludng the
absence of any load other than D in the combinations:

\-,

a)

Flud and lntemal Pressure:

b)

Hydrostatic Test: D+ H+ P

c)

Wind and lntemal Pressure:

Wnd and Extemal Pressure:

e)

Gravity Loads:

1) D+ (L,or Sror Sf

+ 0.4

2l D+ P"+O.A(Lror Sror

W+

F, P

D+ W+0.4 P"

P"

5)

Seismic: D+ F + E + 0.156+ Fo P

g)

Gravity Loads for Fxed Roofs with Suspended Floang Roofs:

2l

(Lror S) + P"+ 0-4(p"or Lxor L)

DL + D+ (P"or Lx or

L)

+ 0.4[(Z,or 5) + PJ

The pressure combination factor (Fy' is defined as the ratio of normal operatng pressure to desgn pressure, with a
mnimum value of 0.4.

5.2.3

\-

D+

1l D+ D+

'

D+ F + P

Desgn Factors

'

The Purchaser shall state th9 desgn metal temperature (based on ambient temperatures), the maximum design

5.2.4

temperature, the design specific gravity, the conosion allowance (if any), and the seismic factors.

Protectve Measures

The Purchaser shall consder foundations, corosion allowance, hardness testing, and any other protective measures
deemed necessary. For example, for insulated tanks, rneans to prevent inliltraon of wat nto the nsulation shall be
specifed, especally around penetrations of the nsulaton and at the roof-to-shelljunction.

API

5-12

STANDARO

650

5.2.5

ll

5.2.5.1 The Purchaser shall specify the maximum capacity and tlle overfll protection level

Tank Capacity
(or volume) requrement

(see API 2350).

5.2.5.2 Maxmum capacty is the volume of product n a tank when the tank is flled to its design lquid level as
defined n 5.6.3.2 (see Fgure 5.4).
5.2.5.3 The net workrE capacity is the volume of available product under normal operating condions. The net

workng capacity is equafto the maximum capacity (see 5.2.6.2) less the minimum operating volurne remanng n the
tank, less the overfill protecton level (or volume) requirement (see Figure 5.4).

5.3

SpecialConsideratons

5.3.1 Foundation
5.3.1.1 The selection of the tank site and the design and construction of the foundaon shall be given careful
consideration, as ouined in Annex B, to ensure adequate tank support. The adequacy of the foundation is the
responsibil of the Purchaser. Foundation loading data shall be provided by the Manufaclurer on the Data sheet,
Lne 13.
S.3..t

.2

(see
Sldng fricton resstance shall be verifed for tanks subject to lateral wnd loads or sesmc loads

5 .11

.4

and E.7.6).

5.3.2 CorosionAllowances
lquid stored, he vapor. above the liqud,
allou,ances to
1
and the atmospheric environmnt, ahall specify n the Data Sheet, Table and Table 2, any coroson
manholes,
and
roof,
for
nozzles
the
for
be provded for all componens, including eac shell course, for the bottom,
and for structural members.

5.3.2.1 The purchaser, after gMng consderaon to the total eflect cf the

Too of shell heoht

Overfll slot

-T--

Desgn liqud level

Overflll protection level requrement:

m3

(bbl)

or

mm (in.)

Normal fill level

--

Net working capacity:

Maximum capa

m3 (bbr)

-m3(
I

Mnimum fll level

m3

-]-

lbbt or

mm (n-)

Figure 5.4-Storage Tank

Top of bottom plate at shell

WLDED TaNKs FoR

O[

SToMGE

5-13

5.3.2.2 Excludng nozzle necks, corroson allowances for nozzles, flush-type cleanouts, manholes, and selfsupporting roofs shall be added to the design thckness, f calculated, or to the mnimum specfied thickness.

5.3.2,3 For nozzle necks, any specifed nozzle neck coroson allowance shall, by agreement between the
Purchaser and the Manufacturer, be added to ether the nominal neck thickness shown n Table 5.6a and Table 5.6b
(or Table 5.7a and Table 5.7b), or to the minmum calculated thckness required for pressure head and mechanical
strength. ln no case shall the neck thckness provded be less than the nominal thckness shown n the table.

5.3.2.4 Corroson allowance for anchor bolts shall be added to e nominal diameter.
5.3.2.5 Conosion allowance for anchor straps and brackets shall be added to the required sEap and bracket
thickness.

5.3.2.6 For intemal sEuctJral rnembers, the conosion allowance shall be applied to le total thickness unless
otheMse specifed.

5.3.3 ServceConditons
The Purchaser shall specify any applicable special metallurgical requirements pertainng to the selection of materials
and the fabrication processes as requred by any antcipated service conditons. When the service conditions might
nclude the presence of hydrogen sulfide or other conditions that could promote hydrogen-nduced cracking, notably
near the bonom of the shell at the shell-to-bonom connectons, care should be taken to ensure that the materials of
e tank and details of constructon are adequate to resist hydrogen-nduced crackng. The Purchaser should
consider limits on the sulfur content ofthe base and weld rnetals as well as approprate quality control procedures in
plate and ank fabricaton. The hardness of the welds, includng the heat-affected zones, in contact with these
conditions should be considered. The weld meial and adjacent heat-affected zone often contain a zone of hardness
well n excess of Rockwell C 22 and can be expected to be more susceptible to cracking than unwelded metal s. Any
hardness critera should be a matter of agreement between the Purchaser and the Manufacturer and should be
based on an evaluation of the expected hydrogen sumde concentration in the product, the possiblty of moisure

e inside metal suface, and the strenq and hardness characteristcs of the base metal and weld
metal. See the Data Sheet, Lne 5.
beng present on

5.3.4 Weld Hardness

a)

Weld metal and Heat Affected Zone (HAZ) hardnesses shall comply wi the H2S Supplemental Specfcation
listed on the Data Sheet, Lne 5, when specmed by the Purchaser.

b)

When specfed by ihe Purchaser, the hardness of the weld metal for shell materials in Group lV, lVA, V or Vl shall
be evaluated by one or both of the followng methods.
'l

The welding-procedure qualificaton tests for all weldng shall include hardness tess of the weld metal and heataffected zone of the test plate. The methods of testng and the acceptance standards shall be agreed upon by
the Purchaser and the Mandacturer.

2) All welds deposted by machine or an automac process shall be hardness tested on the prodrct-side surface.
Unless otherwse specified, one test shall be conducted for each venical weld, and one test shall be conducted

for each 30 m (10o ft) of circumferential weld. The methods of tesng and the acceptance standards shall be
agreed upon by the Purchaser and the Manufacturer.

5.3.5 Thickness
When 6 mm (1/a in.) thick materal is specifed, 0.236 in. thck material may be used in the US Customary rule set with
Purchaser approval. Simlarly when 5 mm (36 n.) thick rnaterial s specifed, 4.8 mm. thick material my be used in
the Sl rule set with Purchaser approval. The desgn calculatons shall be based on thickness used.

API SIANDARD 650

5.14

5.4

Bottom Plates

All botom plates shall have a conoded thickness of not less than 6 mm (0.236 n.) [49.8 kg/m2 (9.6 lbfift2) (see
4.2.t.2)1. Unless otfErwise agreed to by the Purchaser, allrectangular and sketch plates (bottom plates on which the
shell rests that have one end rectangular) shall have a nomnal width of not less an 1800 mm (72 n.).

S.4.1

S.t.2 Bottom plates of sufficent sze shall be ordered so that, when trimmed, at least a 50 mm (2 n.) width will
Foject ou6de the shell or meet requrements given

5.4.3

n 5.1.5.7 d whichever is greater.

Bottom plates shall be welded in accordance with 5.1.5.4 or 5.1.5.5.

5.4.4 Unless otherwse specifed on the Data Sheet, Line 12, tank bottoms requiring sloping shall have a minimum
slope of 1 :120 upwards toward center of the tank.
S.4,5 tf specified on the Data Sheet, Line 12, a foundation drip ring shall be provided to prevent ingress of

water between the tank bottom and foundation. Unless the Purchaser specfies otherwise, the rng shall meet
the followng requirements (see Figure 5.5)..

1) Material shall be carbon steel, 3 mm

(1/8 in.) mnimum thckness.

2) A[ radialjoins beNveen sectons of the drp rings, as well as between the drip ring and the annular plate or
bottom, shall be contnuously seal-welded.

3) The drip ring shall extend at least 75 mm (3 n.) beyond the outer periphery of the foundaton ringwall and then
turn down (up to 90") at its outer diameter.

4) The top and bottom of the drip ring, and the top of the tank bottom edge projection beyond the shell, and
portion of the tank shell shall be coated if sPecfed by the Purchaser.

Fgure s.s-Drip Ring (Suggested Detail)

WEToED faNKs FoR OrL SToRAGE

5.5

5,15

Annular Bottom Plates

When the bottom shell course s desgned usng e allowable stress for materals n Group lV, lVA, V, or Vl,
bun-welded annular bottom plates shall be used (see 5.1.5.6). When the bottom shell corrse s of a material n Group
lV, lVA, V or Vl and tlle maxmum produd sress (see 5.6.2.1) for the frst shell course is less than or equal to 160
MPa (23,200 lbf/in.2) or the maxmum hydrostatic test stress (see 5.6.2.2) for e frst shell course is less than or
equal to 171 MPa (24,900 lbflin.2), lapwelded bonom plates (see 5.1.5.4) may be used n leu of hm-wdded annular
bottom plates.

5.5.1

5.5.2

Annular bonom plates shall have a radial width that prodes at least 600 mm (24 in.) between the inside of the
shell and any lap-welded jont n the remander of the bottom. Annular bonom plate projecton ou6de the shell shall
meet the requirements of 5.4.2. A greater radial wdth of annular plate s requred when calculated as follo^,s:

ln Sl units:

?t5

tb

(HC\ou

where

i/

is the maximum design lqud level (see 5.6.3.2), n m;

the thckness of the annular plate (see 5.5.3), n mm;

the desgn specifc gravity of the liquid to be stored.

ln USC units:
390

(HG)ou

where

the thckness of the annular plate (see 5.5.3), n nches;

the maxmum desgn lqud level (see 5.6.3.2), in feet;

is the design specmc aravity of the lgud to be stored.

5.5.3

The thickness of the annular bouom plates shall not be less than the greater thckness determned usng Table
5.1a and Table 5.lb for producl desgn (plus any specmed cofiosion allowance) or for hydrostatc test desgn. Table
5.1a and Table 5.1b are applicable for effective product height of lx C<?3 (75 ft). Beyond this height an elastc
anal)is must be made to determine the annular plate thickness.

5.5.4 The ring of annular plates shall have a circular outsde circumference, hf may have a regular polygonal
shape nsde the tank shell, with the number of sides equal to the number of annular Pates. These peces shall be
welded in accordance wth 5.1.5.6 and 5.1.5.7, ltem b.

5.5.5 ln leu of annular plates, the entire bottom may be butt-welded provided that the requrements for annular plate
thckness, welding, materals, and inspecton are met for the annular dstance specifed n S.S.2.

5-16

API

--,

STANDARD

650

5.1a-Annular Bottom-Plate Thicknesses (rd (Sl)

Table

Stressb in First Shell Course (MPa)

Plate Thcknessa of Frst

shell Course
s 190

< 2'lo

< 19

< ,< 25

l0

lt

t<32

12

l4

32< t<40

11

l4

),7

40< t< 45

'13

l6

I9

]9

25 <

<220

(mm)

plate ckness refers to the

cfioded shell plate thickness for prodEt

< 250

desgn and nominal lhcktEss for hydrostatic tes(

dern.

Ie stress to be used h the raxmum stress

the frsl shell coise (greater of pfodtcl or hydrolac tel sfess). The
frorn'a'flen rruhiplied by the appli:aue

$ress may be determined usng the required hickness divkled by le thickess

albwabb sess:
Produd Sess = (rd

c/4/ cofioded

(sJ

Hydrosratic Test ress = (f, / nominal r ) (S)

Tt|e ticknesses sDecned in le l,able, as ell as E widl soecified n 5.5.2, are based oo the foufidatilo p.oding
he annta date. Unles foundatixr is p.operly coipacted, patJhrly at lhe
insde of a iixrcrete ringwall, sedemer will Foduce additional sresses in le anrular plate.

NOTE

unifom sJooort under |he hll widdl of

Table 5.1b-Annular Bottom-Plate Thicknesses

0nJ

< 27,000

< 30,000

< 0.75

0.236

0.236

0.75<f<1.@

0.236

9lzz

1.00 < r< '1.25

0.236

,rl:p

1.25 < f< 1.50

J/15

7ha

11lzz

1lz

plate

f<

il(ness

1.75

refers to

(USC)

stressb n Frsl Shetl course 0bin.2)

Plate Thcknessa of Frst

Shell Course

1.50 <

(r,

e cooded shell date ttloess for prod[t

<

32,000

<

36,q)o

9llz

11llz

3/s
15lzz |
9/rs

lltt

s/8

g/re

llhe
3lq

desgn and nominal thckness fo. hydrolatic tes

de:go.

n ttle trsl st|ell corrse (greater of producl or trydroatic tes sress). The
sress rnay be dercrmined using tte required thickness diviled by e ckess frorn'a'e rrultided by e apdi:able

fhe sress to be used is t le maximum sress

allowaue stress:
Frodtd Sress = (fd

CAl co.roded I ) (Sd

Hydroslatic Tesl Suess = k / rnminal

) (SJ

d1e table, as urell as le wid specied in 5.5.2, a.e based on lhe foondalbn proding
ot trirular ptaie. Unless roundalixr is pr_oprly copacled. paticulay at e
otncia rngrxall, sedemern will Foduce dditimal sreses n the annlar plate'

NoTE

;lio;"

TtE rhhknesses soecied in

;-d;-r-r,,ti'iiUr'--

5-17

WEIDEo TAN(S FoR Ort SToRAGE

5.6

Shell Desgn

5.6.1 General
5.6.1.1 The requred shell thckness shall be the greater of the desgn shell thckness, including any coosion
allowance, or tfe hydrostatic test shell thckness, but the shell thckness shall not be less than the following:
Nominal Plate Thickness

Nominal Tank Diameter

(ft)

(mm)

<50

50 to < 120

(m)

<

15

15to<36
36 to 60

120 to

>2@

>60

Unless otherwise specifed by

NOTE
shell-cotrse plates.

2
3
NOTE 4

2m

specified

e Pchaser, the mminaltank damef

(in.)

llt

J/16

10

3lB

stall be e centedine dametef of lfle bonom

e based on erecl,on requrernents.

NOTE

The hknesss

NOTE

Vhen spcmed by |e Purchaser, plate wil a nomnal

For daierefs less |an 15 m (5O ft)

shall not be less |an 6 mm (rk n.).

hkkness of 6 mm ay be subs'nned for r/1-n. plale.

b greater an 3.2 m

(10.5 ft), te rlomnal tlickness of the lou,es shell

couse

5.6.1.2 Unless otherwse agreed to by the Purchaser, the shell plates shall have a mnimum nomnal wdth of 1800
mm (72 in.). Plates that are to be hrtt-welded shall be properly squared.

5.6.1.3 The calculated stress for each shell course shall not be greater than the stress pemined for the particular

material used for the course. When 1e allowable stress for an upper shell corse s lower than the allowable stress of
the next lower shell course, then either a or b shall be sasfed.

a)

The lower shell course thickness shall be no less than the thickness required of the upPr shell course for producl
and hydrostatc test loads by 5.6.3 or 5.6.4.

b)

The thckness of all shell courses shall be that detemned from an elastic analysis per 5.6.5 usng final plate
thicknesses.

The insde of an upper shell course shall not project beyond the nside surface of the shell course below (except
within tolerances provided n 7.2.3.2).
stablity aganst bucklng faom the design wnd speed in accordance with
5.9.7. lf requred for sability, intermedate girders, ncreased shell-plate thcknesses, or both shall be used.

5.6.1./t The tank shell shall be checked for

5.6.1.5 lsolated radial loads on the tank shell, such as those caused by heavy loads on plaorms and elevated
walkways between tanks, shall be disributed by rolled structural sections, plate ribs, or bult-up members.

5.6.2 Allowable Stress

Sd, shall be as shown n Table 5.2a and Table 5.2b. The
conoded plate thcknesses shall be used n the calculaton. The design stress basis, Sd, shall be either two-thirds the

5.6.2.1 The maxmum allowable product design stress,

yield strengh or two-fifths the tensle strength, whchever is less.

.\-

Sr, shall be as shown in Table 5.2a and Table 5.2b. The

plate
nominal
thicknesses shall be used in the calculaton. The hydrostac test basis shall be either threejounhs the
yield srengrth or three-sevenths the tensle sength, whchever is less.

5.6.2.2 The maxmum allowable hydrostac test stress,

5,18

API SfANoARo 650

Table 5.2a-Permssble Plate Materials and Allowable Stresses (Sl)

Plate
Specfcaon

Plate Mnmum
I Yield Streng
mm
MPa

Nomnal

fhckness

Grade

Mnimum
Tensle Sren$h

Prodrrct

MPa

Oesgn Stress Sd
MPa

Hydrostatic
Test Stress
MPa

ASTM Specifcations
4283M

20s

380

137

154

4285M

205

380

'137

'154

4131M

A,B

4m

151

171

2so

400

160

'17'l

A36M

4131M

EH 36

360

490

196

210

4573M

400

220

400

147

165

A573M

450

240

450

160

'180

A573M

485

4854

193

208

4516M

380

205

380

137

154

4516M

4'l 5

220

415

141

tb5

4516M

450

240

450

160

180

A516M

485

485

173

195

4662t\,t

215

450

180

193

4662M

295

4854

194

208

r< 65

345

485

194

208

65<t<1@

310

450b

180

193

f< 65

415

55@

220

236

65<f<1@

380

515b

206

221

< 65

345

4854

194

208

315

450b

180

193

345

4854

194

208

A537M

,]

4537il

A633M

C,D

65 <

A678M

f<

100

4678M

415

5504

220

236

4737M

345

4B5a

194

208

A841M

Class

345

4854

194

208

4841M

Class 2

415

5504

220

236

5-19

WETDEo TAN(S FoR OIL STORAGE

fable 5.2a-Permssible Plate Materals and Allowable Sesses (Sl) (Connued)

Plate
Specficaton

Nomnal Plale
Grade

Thickness
mm

Hydrostatic,

Mnimum

Minimum

Product

Yeld Strength
MPa

Tensle Strenglh
MPa

Desgn Sess Sd

fest Stess 5;

MPa

MPa

CSA Specifcatons
G40.21M

260W

260

410

164

176

G40.21M

260 WT

260

410

164

176

G40.2rM

300w

3m

450

180

193

G40.21M

300wf

300

450

180

193

G40.21M

350W

350

450

180

193

1< 65

350

48@

'192

206

G40.21M

35OWT

65<1<1@

320

4804

192

206

235

235

365

137

154

250

250

400

157

111

275

275

430

167

't

215

410

164

176

265

410

164

176

355

4904

196

2',lo

16<f<40

345

4904

196

210

40< f< 50

335

4904

196

210

< 16

275

410

164

176

t<

265

410

164

176

< 16

355

470

188

201

16<f<40

345

47o

188

201

40< f< 50

335

110

188

201

National Standards

84

ISO Speclcatons

tso

E275C, D
630

f< 16
16<<40
f

E355C, D

s'16

EN Specifcatons

FN 10025

s 275J0,
J2

s 355J0,
J2, K2

16 <

1112

By agreernent bereen the Archaser aod the Manufacturer, e tensle sreng of ASTM A537M, class 2, A678M, Grade B, and A8,l1M,
Chss 2 iaterials may be increased to 585 MPa minimum and 590 MPa maxrrlrm. The lensle seng of le oler lsted materials may be

incfeased to 515 MPa mnirrum and 620 MPa maximum. wlren ths is doe, e allormble sesses shall be delemned as ated in 5.6.2.1

a5.6.2.2.
By ageement betu/een ttre Prrchaser and fie itandacn er, e tensile strenglh ol ASTM A537M. Class 2 mate.ials may be irseased to
550 MPa mnmum and 690 MPa rExmum. The tensh srength of lhe other lisfed materials may be ncreased to ,t85 MPa mnmum and
620 MPa maxmrm. whe tfis s doe, the allo$,able sesses slall be determined as sled n 5.6.2.1 and 5.6.2.2.

5-20

API

STANDARD

650

Table 5.2b-Permissible Plate Materials and Allowable Stresses (USC)

Plate

Spcificaton

omnal Plate
Grade

Thckness

Minmum
Yield stren$h

in.

Pst

psl

Mnmum
Tensile Strengfh

Prodrct
Desgn Stress Sd

Hvdfostac

tet Stress

Pst

pt

ASTM Specifcaons
4283

30,000

55,000

20,000

22,5

4285

30,000

55,000

20,000

22,5

413',]

A,B

34,000

58,m0

22,1@

24,900

36,000

58,000

23,2

24,

436

A'131

EH 36

51,000

71,0004

28,400

30,400

4573

5B

32,000

58,000

21,300

24,000

4573

65

35,000

65,0m

23,3m

26,300

4573

70

42,000

70,m@

28,000

30,000

4516

55

30,000

55,000

20.0o0

22,5@

A5r6

60

32,000

60,m0

21,3m

24,W

4516

65

35,000

6s,000

23,300

26,3m

A516

70

38,m0

70,000

25,3m

28,500

A662

40,000

65,000

26,000

21,9

4662

43.000

70,0@

28,OOO

30.m0

,]

50,000

A537

4537

70,m@

28,mO

30,m0

45,@O

65,mob

26,000

27,W

60,000

80.m@

32,@O

34,3@

55,mO

75,mob

30,0@

32,1

t < 2112

50,000

70.m@

28,m0

30,mo

2112<t<4

46.mO

65,mob

26,000

27,W

50.000

70.00@

28,000

30,000

t < 2112

21lz <

t < 21lz
2
2112

4633

ts

C,D

4678

<

t<4

4678

60,000

80,000

32,000

34,3m

37

50,000

70.m0

28,000

30,000

A7

A841

Class

s0,000

70.m0

28,000

30.000

AB41

Class 2

60.000

80,m0

32,000

34,3m

WELDo TANKS FOR

O[

5-21

SORAGE

Table 5.2b-Permissble Plate Materals and Allowable Stresses (USc) (Contnued)

Plate
Specfcation

Grade

Mnimum
Tensile Strcnglh

f{ominal Plal
Thckness ,

Minmum
Yield Strengnh

n.

Psr

pr

Product
Sd
ps

Design Stress

Hvdrostatc
Tet Stress.t
Psr

CSA Specficatons
G40.21

38W

38,000

60,000

24,OOO

zs,zm

G40.21

38WT

38,m0

60,000

24,W I

2s,7oo

44,000

65,000

26,000

27,900

G40.21

27,s00

G40.21

44WT

44.000

65.000

26,000

G40.21

50w

50,000

65,000

26,000

50,0m

70,m@

G40.2'l

5OWT

46,000

70,00@

235

34,000

52,600

20,000

22,5

250

36,000

58,300

22,7@

25,mO

275

40,000

62,600

24,ffi

26,800

39,900

59,500

38,4m

59,500

51,5m

71,00@

t<1112

50,m0

71,0004

t<2

48,600

71,moa

39,9@

s9,500

38,4m

59,500

51,5m

68,10e

50,000
48.600

G21lz
2112

t<4

<

28,m I
28,0m

27,W

*.00o
30,000

Natonal Siandards

ISO Specications

rso 630

5/g

<
E215C. D

5lB

ts

<

s/g

f<
E355C. D

5lo <
1112

1112

<

23,800
23,8m
2A,4@
28,4
28,4m

25,500
25,500

30,4@

30,4m
30,4m

EN Specificatons

EN 10025

f<

s 275J0,

)2

5lB

<

5/g

t<

1112

tssle
s 355J0, J2,
K2

5ls <
1112

t<
<

11lz

t<2

23,800
23,8m

25,500

2s,500

68,10@

21,2
27,2

29,2@

68,10@

27,2@ i

zg.zm

29,2

By agreernent betveeen the Purchaser and e Mandactrer, |e temle sreogfi of ASTM A537M, class 2, A678M, Grade B, and A8'11M.
maxmum. The tesile sEeogth c the otter lsted materials rnay
Ciasi Z materiats may be rEreased to 85,OOO p6 minmum and 1 m,OOO
be increased to 75, p6 minium and 9O,OOO ps maximum. When this s done, the allowable sresses shall be deiemined as stiated n
5.6.2.1 and 5.6.2.2.

By agreerent be eeo le purchaser ard e Manrracturer, th tensle seng of ASTM A537M, Class 2 rnaierials may be ncreased to
aO,O psi ninimum and 1m.OO0 ps maimum. The terEfe sregth of ltte oler lled materials may be rrcteased to 70,000 p rninimum
and 9O,OOO p6i mairrum. when ls is done, the allowable sesses shall be detemired as stated in 5.6.2.1 and 5.6.2.2.

API

STaNDARD

650

5,6,2.3 Annex A pemits an alternave shell desiln wih a fxed allowable sess of 145 MPa (21,m0 bin.2) and a
iont etrcjency faclor of 0.85 or 0.70. This desgn may onty be used for tanks with shell thicknesses less than or equal to
13 mm (1/2 in.).

5.6.2.4

Structural design stresses shall confom to lhe allowable working stresses gven in S.l O.3.

5.6.3 Calculation of Thickness

by the l-Foot Method

5.6.3.1 The 1-foot method calculates the thcknesses requred at desgn points 0.3 m ('l ft) above the bottom of each
shell course. Annex A permits only this design method. Ths method shall not be used for tanks larger than 61 m
(2m ft) in diameter.

o 5.6.3.2

The requred mnrum thickness of shell plates shall be the greater of the values comMed by the following

formulas:

ln Sl uniE:

4.9H-0.3\G
____-+
^.
I.=
+ a-A
'5;

.
,,=

___T_

4.9D(1- 0.3)

where

ro,

fi
D
H

the desgn shell thckness, in mm;

h the hydrostatic test shell thckness,

s

n mm;

the norninal tank dameter, n m (see 5.6.'1.'1, Note 1);

is the desEn liqud level, in m;

= heEht from the bottom of the course under consderatbn to the top of e shell including the top angle, if
any; lo ttle bottom of any overflotfl that lmits the tank flling height; or to any other level specified by the
Purchaser, resicted by an ntemal floating roof, or controlled to alloi/ for sesmic wave action;

.
.

the design specific Aravity of the lquid to be stored, as specifed by the Purchaser;

CA is the conosion allotrrarre, n

rm,

as specifed by the Purchaser (see 5.3.2);

is the allowable stress for the desgn condition, in MPa (see 5.6.2.1);

.t

the allowable sess for the hydrostatc test condition, in MPa (see 5.6.2.2).

ln USC units:

,,=2JA{)9*ct
2.6D(H-ll

API SrANoaRo 650

Table

5.la-Annular Bottom.Plate Thicknssses

< 190

< 210

< 220

< 250

'19</<25

l0

ll

25<t<32

t2

l4

32<t<40

1l

t,r

t7

40<t<45

13

I6

l9

,<

'
b

(Sl)

Stossb n Frst Shell Course (MPa)

Plate Thlckne3s. of First

Shsll CouEe
(mm)

(1)

19

Plab thbkness fshfs b r conoded shel plale rck,lss 6r prcdud dqign ad nomnal thil(nss 6r hydrcdatib bst
desgn,

Th E33 b b6 usd s iho msximum stss ln th fi.t st|el corE (gBatr of prcduct or Mrosiac tesl stBs). Th
stBs may be ete,mlnd ushg the rqurd thd(,less divirsd by hlcknss fom 'a' en multidod by |g apdlcatl
alo{rabl9 UE6s:
Produd Stess = r - Cry cooded
tlydrcbtic Ted SBss = (r, / no.nnal

, ) (sd)
) (S,)

NOTE

Th 0lkj(6Ess s9cid h the tabb. as w9l as le widh sDo'ed h 5.5.2. ar basd on the foi.rndaliro o.ovirno
unibrm support undor the ful wtfh ol le annuhr Dhb. Unless tho hndatbn s oroorlv cor5aded. Dafidleiiv et O
nskls ofa concrsE.irlga, sstthrner wlpreduce fuilbod ssss n he annulai p}b.'

Tablo 5.1b-Annular Bottom-Plate Thicknesses () (USC)

Plate Thicknoss. of Ft
< 27,000

< 30,000

< 32,000

< 36,000

, < 0.75

0.236

0.236

9ltz

11lzz

0.75<r<1.00

0.236

9ltz

3/E

7lrs

1.00<r<1.25

0.236

11lzz

15lsz

9/r s

1.25<r<1.50

J/t6

7ha

9/r s

11lre

11b2

112

5lB

1.50

Strg3sb n Frst Sholl Courss (lbf/n.2)

Sholl CouEe
(nJ

<, <'t.75

Plab tliJ(6 rBErs b th6 conoded she date t d(nss br prodrd &sgn and Emnal thijstss
desin.

bi

hydrostatic

bst

The stBss b b ugd th maximum stBss n t9 frst shl corrs (grabr of prodtcr or hydrostalic te3t sBgs). Th
stBss may b dskmind ushg th rquired ihdqless divird by lo tlilsless fpm .a' tl'l muhtpi'd by ls apdcabh
alory.bl stBss:
Produd Stsse = r - C.{y coroded , ) (Sd)
Hydfo6t lic Test Stes . (r, / nonrnal , ) (S,

NO-TE Th6 hiroesss spocifed n te tat h, as we as the wir socifd h 5.5.2. arg basd o.| |6 bu ttidr orovim
unDrm supporl undsr th tuI wirlh of tho anular phb. Unless |e bundatEo b Drgo co.nDad. oertidleitv et
nsrr ol a concrsb .agwaI, sernt wl p@duce additi,nal ssss h th gnnulai pte. -

WELDED TaNKS FoR

Ott

s-23

SToRAGE

where

fd

the design shell thickness, in nches;

fi

the hydrostatc test shell thickness, n nches;

is the nominal tank diameter, in ft (see 5.6.1.1, Note 1);

the desgn liquid level. in ft:

is the height from the bottom of the course under consideralon to the top of the shell including e top
angle, if any; to the bonom of any overflow that limts the tank filling height; or to any other level specified by
the Purchaser, restricted by an internalfloating roof, or controlled to allow for seismic wave acton,

CA is the conosion allowance, in inches, as specfed by the Purchaser (see 5.3.2);

the desgn specifc Aravity of the lquid to be stored, as specified by the Purchaser;

S is the allowable sess for the desgn condition, in lbf/in.2 (see 5.6.2.1);
S

the allowable stress for the hydrostatic test condtion, n lbfiin.z (see 5.6.2.2).

5.6.4 calculation of Thickness by the varable-Desgn-Pont Method

This procedure normally provides a reduclon n shell-course thcknesses and to[al material weigh, btf more important s
its poremial to permit construction of larger dmeter tanks within the maximum plate lhickness limil,alion. For background

NOTE

informaton, see L.P Zck and R.V Mccrath,'Design of Large Diameter Cylindrical Shells

"4

5.6,4.1 Design by the variable-design-point method gives shell thcknesses at desgn points that result n the
calculated stresses being relatively close to the aclual crcumferential shell stresses. This method may only be used
when the Purchaser has not specfed that the 1-foot method be used and when the following is true:

ln Sl units:

H-.

tooo
6

where

Z
D
f
I
\_.

equals (500 D00 5, in mm;

s

the tank dameter, in m;

is the bottom-course

coroded shell thckness,

n mm;

is the maxmum design lqud level (see 5.6.3.2), n m.

20 L.P. Zick and R.V Mccrath, "Desgn of Large Diameter Cylindrical S,hells,' Pr@eedings-Division
Petroleum lnstitute, New York, 1968, Volume 48, pp. 1114-1140.

of Refining, American

API SraNoaRD 650

ln USC unts:

L .t
H -where

I
,

equals (6 Dr)o 5, n inches;

-FI

is the maxmum design liquid level (see 5.6.3.2), in ft.

is the tank darneter, in ft;

is the bottom-course corroded shell thckness, in inches;

5.6.4.2 The minimum plate thicknesses for both the design condon ard the hydrostatic test condition shall be
determned as outlned. Complete, independent calculatons shall be made for all of the courses for the design
condion and for the hydrostatic test condtion. The required shellthckness for mch course shall be the greater of the
desgn shell thickness plus any corroson allowance or the hydrostac test shell thckness, but the total shell thckness
shall not be less than the shell thickness requred by 5.6.1.1, 5.6.1.3, and 5.6.1.4. When a greater thckness s used
for a shell course, the greater thickness may be used for subsequent calculations of the thicknesses of the shell
courses above the course that has the greater thickness, provded e greater thickness s shown as e required
design thickness on the Manufacurer's drawng (see W3).

5.6.4.3 fo calculate the bottom-course thicknesses, prelmnary values tpdand

conditions shall frst be calculated from the formulas in 5.6.3.2.
5.6.4.4 The bonom-course thcknesses 1and

1for

ln Sl units:

r,,=(roo-YffiP#9tr^
ln USC unts:

NOTE

(roo-'fFH(4X\.r^

For the design condition, fld need not be greater than tpr

ln Sl units:

,,,=(r.oo

rP#(H

ln USC units:

,,, =

NOTE

for the design and hydrostatic test

the design and hydrostatic test conditons shall be calculated

using lhe followng fomulas:

,,,=

fpr

(roo-e3f E)("f,

Fof the hydrostatic test conditon, 1need nol be gfeatef lhan tpr.

4-9

VVELDEo TANKS FoR OtL S'roRAGE

Table 4.3a-Lnear Equatjons for Figure 4.1a

API

Thickness

Group #

Range

6<X<13

13<x<25

II

6<X<13

II

t3

<x<

IIA

l0

sx<

II,A

l3

<x< l9

ILA

19

<x<

III
III

(Sl)

Table 4.38-Lnear Equaons for Figure4.lb (USC)

API
Group

Equation

Thckness

025<X<05

Y= l.4t7X-25.411

0.5

<x<

I/= 0.634X-

31.81

lt

0.25

<X<

40

y:1.243X-39.72

II

0.5

<x<

t3

Y=2.661X-55.667

IIA

0.375

Y=2X-47

IIA

0.5

Y=0.905X-26.19

IIA

0.75

6<X<tl

Y=-40

III

0.25<,Y<0.5

13<x<40

Y= 1.222X- 55.89

III

0.5

IIIA

0.25

IIIA
IV
IVA

VI, VIA

40

<.Y< 40

6<XS40
6

= 0.7 14X - 16.286

<X<

40

=-40

Y:0.7059X- t8.235
Y

0.7353X

= 0.6t7&Y

6<X<40

6<X<40

Y= 0.4ll2x

23

3l

.412

lv
IVA

.11

40.4'11

VI,

\'IA

Equaton

Range

1.0

<x<
<X<

t0

Y=30.4X-25.6

1.5

Y=60.4X-40.6

0.5

0.?5

<, <

v:60x-

0.5

<X<

<x<

Y=40X

1.5

1.5

= l20X- 65

I= 80X-

45

Y=46.661X-20

r=-

40

= 60X

-10

1.5

Y=-40

0.25<X3t.5

Y=34.4X-

1.6

0.25

<.Y<

1.5

Y=36X-12

0.25

<,r<

1.5

Y=30.4X-25.6

0.25

<X<

1.5

Y=20X-41

Y= Desgn Metal Temperature ('C)

Y= Oesign Metal Temperature ('F)

X= Thloess rdudng co,rosion (mm)

,r= ThkJ<ness nduding conoson (in.)

4.2.'11.3 For plate in the as-rolled condition, the thid(est plate fom each heat shall be mpad tested. For TMCP

material, each plat.as-rolled shall be mpaci tested. lmpad testing shall be n accordance with 4.2.9 and shall fulfill
the impasl requirements of 4.2.11.2 at the desgn metaltemperature.

'

4.2.11,4 The ManuEcturer shall submit to the Purcaser test data for plates of the material demonstratng that
based on Past produclion from the same mill, th matedd has provded the requred toughness at the design metal
temperafure.

4.3

Sheets

Sheets brfixed and floang roofs shall conform to ASTM A'lO11M, Grade 33. They shall be made by the open-hearth

or basic oxygen process. Copper-bearing steel shall be used if specfied on the purase order. Sheets may be
ordered on either a weght or a thickness basis, t the option of the tank Manufac{urer.

4.4 Stuctural
4.4.1

Shapes

Slructural steel shall conform to one of the following:

a) ASTM A36M/A36.

b)

ASTM 4131M/A1 31.

c)

ASTM A992M/A992.

4-g

WEToED TANKS FoR OIL SORAGE

Table 4.3a-Linear Equations for Figure 4.1a

Table 4 3b-Lnear Equatons for Fgure 4.1b (USC)

Thickness

Equaton

API
Group #

6<X<13

Y= 0.7|1X- 16.286

13<X<25

Y=

IT

6< X< t3

f= 0.634X- 31.81

II

0.25 <

II

13

<X=

Y=1.243X-39.72

I1

0.5 <

Y= 2.667X- 55.7

I]A

API
Group #

Thickness

Range

10

trA

l0<x<13

IIA

13<x<t9

ILA

t9<x<10

UI

6<X<13

13<x<13

l.4l1X

y:2x

25.117

17

Y= 0.905X-26.19

Range

X<0.5

0.25 <
0.5

<x<

1.0

X< 0.5

x<

0.75

lOX

f= 60X- l0
Y= 30.4X-25.6
Y= 60.4X

x<

f= 80X- 45

IIA

0.5 <

ILA

0.75 <

0.75

X<

0.15

Y= 16.667X-

f= -

X<

0.5

Y= 1.222X- 55.89

Itr

0.5 <

x<

1.5

Y=@X-70

f= -

X<.t0

Y = -.10

IIIA

0.25 <

X< t.5

IV

6<

X<40

Y= 0.7059X- 18.235

IV

0.25 <

X<

1.5

y:34.4X

IVA

0.25 <

X<

1.5

\':36X

0.25 <

X< t.5

0.25 <

X<

\'IA

VI.

I= 0.7353X

23..112

6<<40

Y=0.6116X-31.71

6<X<,10

Y=0.4112X- 10.111

Desiln Metal remperature ('c)

X= Thckness includng coroon

(mm)

!'t, vtA

1.5

2O

,10

6<

6<X<40

40.6

Y= r20X- 65

0.25 <

10

Y=

0.375 < X< 0.5

UI

Y=-

Equaton

IIIA

IVA

f=

(Sl)

,10

t.6
t2

Y=30.4X-25.6
Y=20X- 1l

Y= Design Metal Temperature ('F)

X= Thickess including conosion (in.)

4.2.'.11.3 Fot plate n the as-rolled condition, the thickest plate from each heat shall be mpact tested. Fof TMCP
material, each date-as-rolled shall be mpact tested. lmpact testing shall be n accordance with 4.2.9 and shall futfll
the mpact requirements of 4.2.11.2 at the desgn metal temperature.

4.2,11,4 The Manufacturer shall submt to the Purchaser test data for plates of the material demonstrating that
based on past production from the sarne mll, the materal has provided the required toughness at the desgn metal
temperature.

4.3

Sheets

Sheets for fxed and floating roofs shall conform to ASTM A10l1M, Grade 33. They shall be made by

e open-hearth

or basc oxygen process. Copper-bearing steel shall be used if specified on the purchase order. Sheets may be
ordered on ether a weght or a ickness bass, at the opton of the tank Manufacturer.

4.4

Structural Shapes

4.4.1

Structural steel shall conform to one of e followng:

a)

ASTM A36M/A36.

b)

ASTM 4131r/A131.

c)

ASTM 4992M/4992.

-30'-25"

10"

'-20'

/?

15'

-10.

-5'

!
z

Compiled lrom U.S. Weather Bureau and

Moteorological Div. Dept. ofTransport of
Dominion of Canada Records up to '1952.

Fgure 4.2-lsothermal Lines of Lowest One-Day Mean Temperatures f D f C = CF

32)l

WELDED TANKS FoR

\-'

O[

SToRAGE

To calculate the second-course thcknesses for both the design condition and the hydrostatic test conditon,
the value of the followng ratio shall be calculated for the bottom course:

5.6.4.5

h1

(rl, )oi
where

h
r
l

the height of the bonom shell course, in mm (in.);

the nomnal tank radus, in mm (in.);

(design)'
the calculated conoded thckness of the bottom shell course, in mm (n.), used to calculate f2
(hydrostatic
f2
to
calculate
be
used
course
shall
shell
of
the
bottom
The calculated hydrostac thickness
teso.
s

'1.375:
lf the value of the rao is less than or equal to

tz=tt
lf the value of the rao is greater than or equal to 2.625:
tz

\-'

tza

lf the value of the rato s greater than 1.375 but less than 2.625:

tz= rza+Qt

t,,P,

-#*]

where

rz

the minimum design thckness of the second shell course, in mm (in');

2a is the cofroded thickness of

e second shell course' in mm (in.)' as calculated for an uPper shell course as

described in 5.6.4.6, 5.6.4.7, and 5.6.4.8. ln calculang second shell course thckness (f2) for desgn case
and hydrostatic test case, applicable values of t2 and fishall be used'

is based on the same allowable stress beng used for the.design of the bottom and
For tanks where the value of the ratio s greater than or equal to 2.625, the allowable stress for e

The preceding formula for

.""ond

12

course may be lower than the allowable stress for the bonom course when the rnethods described in 5.6.4.6
second "*rS..
through 5.6.4.8 are used.

5.6.4.6

To calculate the upper-course thicknesses for both the design condition and the tydrostatc test condition, a

prelmnary value r, for the upper-course conoded thckness shall be calculated using the formulas n 5.6.3.2, and
inen the stance ; of the va;ible design poinr fiom the bottom of the course shall be calculated using the lowest
value obtaned from the following:

API

STANDARD

650

ln Sl units:

xr =

0.61

x2

(rtos*rroro

1000 CH

xt =

1.22

(x)o

where

is the conoded thickness of the uppr course at lhe ginh jont, n mm;

equals UP.s (r-

quals tL/

is the desgn lquid level (see 5.6.3.2), n m.

l)l/(l + (l

.5);

tu:

the conoded thickness of the lower course at the grth jonL n mm;

ln US Customary unts:

x = 0.61 (rt)0.5
x2

+ 3.84

CII

= 12CH

4 = r'22 ()o s
where

c
K
.

is the conoded thickness of the upper course at the grthjont in inches;

equals lo,5

quds ql

(/(- 1)l(l

+ 14.5);

ti

is the desgn liquid level (see 5.6.3.2), inft.

the coroded thckness of the lower course at the ginhjont, n inches;

5,6.4.7 The mnimum thickness rr for the upper shell courses shall be calculated for both the design condition (r)
and the hydrostatc test conditon (d using the minmum value of x obtained from 5.6.4.6:
ln Sl units:
a

s{a-fJc
5d

rs{a-fooJ

+CA

WELDED

TaN(s FoR OtL

5-27

SToRAGE

ln USC units:

z.a\a-t)c
+CA

s",

,rfu-i)
5.6.4.8 The steps descrbed n 5.6.4.6 and 5.6.4.7 shall be repeated using

the calculated value of t, as fu until there

suffcient).
is little difference between the calculated values of fxin successon (repeatng the steps twce is normally
and,
consideration
under
Repeating the step6 provides a more exact locaon of the design pont for the course
consequeny, a more accurate shell thickness.
an
5.6.4.9 fhefe are two examples provided in Annex K. ExamPle #l are step-by-step calculatons illustfatng
(64 ft)
19.2
m
(280
of
a
height
ft)
and
m
of
85
diameter
tank
with
a
pltition ot tn" rariabte-Oesign-point method to a

#2
shell-ptate thicknsses for the first three courses for the hydrostatc tesi condion only. ExamPle
of
280
ft
and
a
diameter
wi
for
a
tank
unts
in
US
Custornary
method
design
demonstrates the vriable-design-point
test
n ignt of 40 ft with varying ionosion allo:wances and varyng materials for both the design and hydrostatc
conditions.

ieterrn"

5.6.5 Calculation of Thickness by Elastc Analysis

For tanks where

I/l

based on an
is greater than l 000/6 (2 n USC units), the selecton of shell thcknesses shall be
given in
stresses
the
allowable
be
below
to
sEesses
calculated circumferental shell

etstic anatysis that sh;ws the

plastic moment caused by
Table 5.2a nd Tabte 5.2b. The boundary condions for the anal)6is shall assume a fully
growth.
radial
and
zero
yielding of the plate bneath the shell

5.7

Shell OPenings

5.7.1

General

5.7.1.1 The following requrernents for shell oPenings are intended to restrct the use of appurtenances to those
providing for attachment to the shell by weldng. See Fgure 5.6.

5.7.1.2 The shell opening designs described

in this standard are required. except for altemative desgns allowed in

5.7.1.8.

5.7.1.3 Flush-type cleanout fittings and flush-type shell connections shall conform to the designs specified in 5 7.7
and 5.7.8.

5.7.1.4 When a sze intermediate to the sizes listed

n Tables 5.3a through 5.12b s specified by the Purchaser, the

constructon details and reinforcements shall conform to the ne)d larger openng lsted in the tables.
opening or tank connecon shall not be largef than the maximum size given in the aPpropriate table.

fhe

size of the

5.7.1.5 Openings near the bottom of a tank shell wll tend to rotate with vertcal bendng of e shell under
hydrostatic'loadig. Shell openings in this area that have atached pping or other external loads shall be reinforced
nionty to. rf'" truic condition br- abo for any loads imposed on the shell connectons by the restrant of e anached

piping o the shell rotaton. The external loadi shall be mnimized, or the shell connections shall be relocated outside
in'" rt ton ur"u. Annex P provides a method for evaluating openings that conform to Table 5.6a and Table 5.6b.

API STANoARo 650

5-28

Shellverticl

Bottom plates or anular plates

RTR

LfR =
S-N

Regular-Tlpe.Reinforced opening (nozzleor manhole) with diarnond or crcular shape rerforcing plate or insen plte
enend to the bottom (see Figlre 5.7a and Figwe 5.8).

at

does nol

Low-Type Reinforced.opening (nozzle or ranhole) usng tombstone type reinforcing plate or insert plale that extends to the bottom
lsee Fgure 5.8, Detarl (a) and Detai (b)1.
Shell openings.with nether a rerfo.cng plate nor wilh a thckened nsen plate (i.e. ntegrally renforced shell openngs; or openng
not requirng renforcng).

Refer
ence

Variables

Mnmum Dimenson Betureen Weld Toes or Weld Centerlne (Notes 1 and 3)

ParagraPh

Shell

Condtion Numbr

< 12.5 mm
(t

< 112in.\

As

5.7.3.2

welded
or
PWHT

A (2)

B (2)

As

75 mm (3 n.)

5.7.3.3

75 mm (3 n.)
for S-N
Table 5.6a
and
Table 5.6b

in.)

SWor

5.7.3.3

.5.7.3.4
.5.7.3.4
5.7.3.2
5.7.3.3
5.7.3.3

.
.
I
NOTE 2
NOTE

NOTE
NOTE

3
4

250 mm
(10 n.)
75 mm (3 n.)
for S-N
Table 5.6a
and
Table 5.6b

5.7.3.3

PWHT

SWor
t50 mm (6 in.

5.7.3.3

8t or 1lz

SWor
8W or
250 mm (10 in.l 25O mm (10

5.7.3.1.b

t > 12.5 m
(t 1lz in.\

(4)

21121

5.7.3.3
5.7.3.4

Welded

F (4)

or 2112t

5.7.3.3

5.7.3.1.a

E (21
75 mm (3 n.)

.5.7.3.4
t > 12.5
(t > 112 in.\

D (3)

150 mm (6 n.) 75 mm (3 n.)

or 2112t

or

(2)

150 mm (6 n.)

75 mm (3 n.)
or 21lzt

8to

1lz

r
8

75 mm (3 n.)

ot

2112t

75 mm (3 n.)
o 2112t
75 mm (3 n.)
for S-N

5.7.3.3
5.7.3.1
5.7.3.4

Table 5.6a
and
Table 5.6b

Etor

112

r
B

ll two requremeds are $ven, the rinmu spacng s the greater vaue, elcept for dimeno 'E See Note 4.
{ = shell ickness. 8rl= 8 es le largel leld ze fq rerforcnq plate o. nsen plate periphery wed (llet or but-weld) hom fte
toe ol le periphery weld to le centerlie of the shell bu-weld.
D= spacng d9arrce egablished by minimum elevatbn for low-pe renforced openings fro Table 5.6a and Table 5.6b, column 9.
Ardlaser option lo allow sllell opnings to be located n horizorlal or venical shell bu-welds. See Fque 5.9.
"
r = shell lhbiness, = radius ol dpenn-q. Mnmum spacnq fo. dimension F is the lessr ot 8l or r/2

Fgure 5.6{nmum Weld Requirements for Openngs in Shells According to 5.7.3

WETDED Tar{Ks FoR

Ott

5.29

SToRAGE

Table 5.3a-Thickness of Shell Manhole Cover Plate and Boltng Flange (Sl)

Column

Column 2

Column 3

Max.

Column 4

Column 5

Column 6

Mnmum Thickness of cover Plateb (rJ, mm

Des9n

Equvalent
Pressurea
kPa

Liquid
Level
m

Column 7

Column 8

Column

Column 10

Minimum Thckness of Bolting Flange After

Finishingb (rr, mm

mm
Manhole

600 mm
Manhole

750 mm
Manhole

900 mm

5OO

mm

600 mm

750 mm

90O mm

Manhole

Manhole

Manhole

Manhole

Manhole

50O

5.2

51

10

11

13

10

6.7

66

10

11

13

'14

10

11

13

8.0

18

10

11

14

16

'11

9.9

97

11

13

16

1B

10

13

14

11 .1

109

13

'14

'16

19

10

11

13

16

13.4

13',I

13

14

18

21

10

11

14

1B

'I58

14

16

19

22

11

13

16

182

'16

18

21

24

13

'14

1B

21

224

1B

19

24

25

13

14

1B

24

16.1
'18.6

a
b
c

Equivalem presse s based on water loadng.

For addtion of cooson allowance, see 5 7.5.2
Cover Plate and Flange thickess given can be used on Manholes dmensoned to lD or

NOTE

See Fgure

5.7a.

oD'

Table 5.3b-Thckness of Shell Manhole Cover Plate and Bolting Flange (USC)
Column

Column 2

Max.

Desgn
Lqud
Level

ft

Column

Column 4

Column 6

Mnmum Thickness of Cover Plateb (rJ, in.

Equivalent
Pressurea
lbflin.2

20 n.

24 in.

30 n.

Manhole

Manhole

Manhole

a
b
c

Column 5

36 in.
Manhole

Column 7

Column 8

Column

Column 10

Minimum Thickness of Bolng Flange After

Finishingb (rr, in.
20 in.
Manhole

24 irl.

30 n.

36 in.

Manhole

Manhole

Manhole

J/16

3lB

J/16

3/a

7lrc

s/,

ll..o

112

3/a

llts I

1tz

3/s

the

1lz

9/ro

11.3

3/s

11rc

-/16

slB

32.6

14.1

tha

112

J/8

11/ro

5/r e

3/e

112

9/r o

36.5

15.8

1lz

9/r

5/s

3lc

3/e

71rc

112

s/s

43.9

19

1lz

the

1r/r o

13/r o

3/e

llt

9/re

11h o

22.9

9/r 6

5/a

3lc

1la

llts

1lz

5/8

3lq

12

9/r s

11/r o

13/ro

112

9/r o

11h 6

1s/r e

17.',I

7.4

21.9

9.5

26.1

6'1.0

26.4

5/B

11/rs

15.1

32.5

11h e

3lq

l3h
1

5/r e

1sh 6
1

'|

Equivalent pressure is based on water loading.

For addon of corosion alloltance, see 5.7.5.2.

Cover Plate and Flange $ckness Oven can be used on Manholes dmemioned to lD or OD.

NOTE

See Figwe 5.7a.

5-30

API

STANDARD

650

Table 5.4a-Dmensions for Shell Manhole Neck Thickness (Sl)

Dmensons in mllmeters

Minmum Neck Thickness (r) b

Thickness of Shell

(l)

For Manhole Diameter For Manhole Diameter

500 mm
600 mm

750 mm

Fol Manhole Dameter

900 mm

For Manhole Diameter

10

'r0

11

10

12.5

10

't4

10

18

I
I

'r9

10

21

10

22

10

10

24

11

1'l

11

1l

25

11

11

11

1'l

27

11

't1

11

11

28

13

13

13

13

30

14

14

14

14

32

16

14

14

14

33

16

16

It)

16

35

11

16

16

16

36

11

17

11

17

3B

20

20

20

20

40

21

21

21

21

41

21

21

21

21

43

22

22

22

22

45

22

22

22

22

10
10

lf a shell plate thcker than required is used for the product and hydrostatic loadng (see 5.6), the excess shell-plate thckness, withn a
venica dslance both above and below the centerline of the hole n the tank shell plate equal to the verticl dmenson of the hole n the tank
shell plate, ray be consdered as reinforcement, and the hckness lof the manhole reinforcing plate may be decreased accordngly. ln slch
cases, the reinforcemert ad the attachmeni vvelding shall conform to the design limits for reinforcement of she openngs specifed in 5.7.2.
The minmum neck thckness shall be the requred conoded thickness of the shell plate or the minimum flange ickness of le bolting flange
(see Table 5.3a), whichever is nner. lf the neck thckess is greater than the required miimum, the manhole renforcing plate ckness
ay be deceased accordngy. ln srch cases e renforcemem and the attachment weldng shall conlor to the desgn lmits ot ihe
reinfqceme of le shellopenng in 5.7.2.

5-31

WELoED TaNKs FoR OtL SToRAGE

Table 5.4b-Dmensions for Shell Manhole Neck Thickness (USC)

Dimensions n inches

Mnmum Neck Thclness

Thckness of Shell (t)

(d

For Manhole Dameter

20 n'

For Manhole Diameter

For Manhole Dameter

21in.

30 n.

For Manhole Diameter

36 in.

31rc

J/15

3/r6

3/r e

J/15

s/r s

5he

3/a

3/ro

5/rs

1lt

3/8

llt

1lc

5h6

3/s

llz

1lc

s/r o

3lg

she

3la

J/16

3/e

J/16

3/B

546

3lg

J/16

3/B

tho
JIA

l1/ro

llq

3lc
13h o

5/r o

1le

3is

sh6

5ha

3le

1s/r6

1lrc

1lte

tha

) l'ts

11rc

) l'ts

7ha

1l.6

1lrc

7ha

1l'ts

tha

1lz

1lz

1lZ

112

sh6

ths

the

9/r e

9/r

946

9/r

11h6
11lB
3/r e

15h 6

5/

s/8

slB

sla

13/a

11h o

s/g

5/B

5/B

11lrc

11/rs

11h e

11h o

11lrc

3lq

1lt

3lc

3lc

13/B

1112
1

9/r e

ts/s
111h6
1311

13h o

l3/r

13/rs

13h o

7lg
1la

13hs

5/B

3/r o

3/r o

13l.s

1ls

1la

lla

llB

1lg

llB

the product and hydroatic loadng (see 5.6), the excess shell'plate thckness, withn a vmjcal
tank shell
below the centerlne of tire frole in re Unf setl plate equal to e venical dmenson of e hole n the
plate, may be consdered as reirforcernet and le ckness lof the manhole rerforcing plaie may be decreased accordigly. ln such
in 5.7.2
tases, th reinforcement and the attachmeni weldng shall conform to the desgn mits for renforceent ol shell openngs specified
tt

s'tr"lt

utu tt i"to man required

s used for

"
both above and
distance

the bolfng flange

The rnmum neck thckness shall be le reqred cofioded dliJ(ness ol le shell plate or fie minmum flange ihckness of
(see Table 5.3b), whichever s thinner. tf e neck thckness is greater than the required mnmum, the manhole renforcing dale thckness
may be deceased accordngly. tn $rch cases
reirforcernent of e shell opning n 5.7.2.

reinforcerneot and

anachmert welding st|all confom to

fle

desgn limils of the

API

STaNDARD

650

5.7.1.6 Sheared or oxygen-cut surfaces on manhole necks, nozzle necks, reinforcing plates, and shell-plate
openings shall be made unform and smooth, wth the corners rounded except where the surfaces are fully covered
by attachment welds.

5.7.1.7 Shell openngs may be renforced by the use of an insen plate per Figure 5.7b. The nsert plate may have
the same thckness as an adjacent shell plate or rnay be thcker to provde renforcing. A rectangular insert plate shall
have rounded comers (except for edges termnatng at the tank bottom or atjoints between shell courses) with a
radus which is greater than or equal to the larger of 150 mm (6 n.) or 6where r s the thckness of the shell course
contanng the insert plate. The insen plate may contan multiple shell openings. The thickness and dimensons of
nsm plate shall provide the reinforcing required per 5.7.2. The weld spacing shall meet requirements of 5.7.3. The
periphery of insert plates shall have a 1:4 tapered transition to the thckness of e adjacent shell plates when the
insert plate thickness exceeds the adjacent shell thickness by more than 3 mm (1/e in,).
5.7.1.8 The shape and dmensions of the shell openng reinforcement, illustrated n Fgure 5.7a, Figure s.7b,and
Fgure 5.8 and dimensioned in the related iables may be altered as long as the renforcement meets the area,
welding, and weld spacing requirements outlined in 5.7.2 and 5.7.3. For reinforcing plates greater than 1/2 in. thick,
wth approval of the Purchaser, reinforcement and welding (excluding weld spacing) of shell openngs that comply
with API 620. Secton 5 are acceptable. These statements of permissble allernatives of shell opening renforcement
and welding do not apply to flush-type cleanout fttngs, flush-type shell connections or simlar configuratons.
Table s.sa-Dmensons for Bolt Crcle Dameter .Dand Cover Plate Diameter

,c

for Shell Manholes (St)

Dimensions in mllimeters

Column

Manhole Dameter

NOTE

Column 2

O,

Bolt Circle Dameter D

Column 3
Cover Plate Diameter

500

667

730

600

768

832

750

921

984

900

1073

1137

,c

See Figure 5.7a.

5.7.1.9 The flange facing shall be sutable for the gasket and bolting employed. Gaskets shall be selected to meet
the service envronrnent so that the required seating load s compatible with the flange rang and facing, the sfength
of the flange, and ts boltng (see 4.9).

5.7.2

Renforcement and Welding

5.7.2.1 Openngs in tank shells larger than requred to accomrnodate a NPS 2 flanged or threaded nozzle shall be
reinforced. The minimum cross-sectonal area of the required reinforcement shall not be less than the product of the
vertcal diarneter of the hole cut n the shell and the nomnal plate lckness, b lvhen calculaons are mad for the
maxmum required thickness consderng all design and hydrostatic test load conditions, the requred thckness may
be used in leu of the nominal plate thckness. The cross-sectional area of the renforcement shall be measured
vertically, concident with the diameter of the opening.
5.7.2.2 The only shell openings that may utlze welds having less than full penetration through the shell are those
that do not require renforcement and those that ulize a thckened nsert plate as shown in Fgure 5.7b and Figure

wE[oED fANKs FoR O[- SToMGE

pd
Table 5.sb-Dmensons for Bolt Circle Dameter D and Cover Plate Diameter
for Shell Manholes (USC)
Dimensons n nches

Column

Column 3

Bolt Circle Diameter D

Cover Plate Dameter D.

20

2611a

2831a

24

30lia

3231a

30

361/a

383/a

36

4211a

4431a

Manhole Diameter

NOTE

Column

O,

See Figure 5.7a.

"Full Penetration on
5.8. However, any openings listed in Table 3 of the Data Sheet that are marked "yes" under
if
used'
reinforcement.
and
the
Openings" shall utilize welds that fully penetrate the shell

5.7.2.3 Except

for flush-pe openings and connecons, all eflectve renforcements shall be made within a dstance

plate.
above and belbw the cent;line of thdshell openng equal to the vertcal dimension of the hole n the tank shell
the
followng:
of
combination
provded
one
or
any
by
any
be
Renforcement may

a)

The anachment flange of the fltting.

b) The reinforcing plate. Reinforcng plates for manholes, nozzles, and other attachments shall be of the

same
are
attached,
part
to
which
they
the
tank
Number)
as
nominal comp;sitlon 1i.e. same eUE P-number and Group
unless approved otherwise by e Purchaser.

c)

The porton of the neck of the fitting that may be consdered as reinforcement according to 5.7.2.4.

of the
ExceSS shell-plate thckness. Renforcement may be provided by any shell-plate thickness in excess
of the
the
centerlne
below
above
and
distance
vertcal
within
a
load
condition
governing
the
req;red
by
thckness
hole in the sell equ;l to ahe vertic;l dimension of the hole n the tank shell plate as long as the extra shell-plate
thckness is the atual plate thickness used less the required thckness, calculated at e applcable openng'
considerng all load conditions and the conoson allot,ance.

e) fhe

materal in the nozzle neck. The strength of the material n the nozzle neck used for reinforcement should

preferably be the same as the strenglh of the tank shell, but lower strength material is permissible as
reinforcetent as long as the neck mateal has minimum specifed yield and tensile strengths.not less than 70 %
and B0 o/o, respeoivly, of the shell-plate mnimum specified yeld and tensile strengths. When the materal
o minimum values, the area n the neck available for
strength is gter tnn or equal to ihe 70 7o and aO
renfo-rcemet shall be reduced by the rato of the allowable stress in the neck, usng the goveming stress factors,

to the allowable stress n the aitached shell plate. No credt may be taken for the additonal strength of any
reinforcng materal at has a higher allowable stress than that of tlne shell plate. Neck material that has a yield or
o minmum values may be used, provided that no neck area is
tensile s;ength less than the iO yo or 80
consdered as efiective renforcement.

5.7.2.4 The following portions of the neck of a ftting may be consdered pan of the area of reinforcement, except
where prohbited by 5.7.2.3, ltem e:

a)

The porton extending outward from the outsde sulace of the tank shell plate to a distance equal to four times the
nec[-wall thckness or, if the neck-wall thickness s reduced within this distance, to the pont oftranson.

5-" V,***

rtr\A rE A

tftr

API STAoARD 650

->

500 mm (20 i.) and 600 mm (24 n.) sheli manholes: twentyght 20 mrndameter (3/4 in.) bolts in 23 m (7/s in.) holes
750 mm (30 in.) and 900 mm (36 in.) shell manholes: forty-two 20 mm-dameter (3L i.) bols in 23 mm (1a n.) holes
(Bolt holes shall straddle the lange vertical cterlne.)
Gasket (see Note 1):
manhdei
600 mm (24 n.) anlrole:
500 mm (20 n.)

615 nm (253h in.)OD ' 508 mm (20 n.)

(: n.) O0 ' 610 mm (24 n.)
7a6

l0

l0'

'3

nm

(![ n.)r.(lmss
in.)t!**n ss

3 nm (rh

750 mm (30 .) manhol: 899 mm (35/' in.) OD ' 762 mm (30 in.) lD ' 3 rn (!/i in.) t*lmess
900 mm (36 in.)manholq 1051mm(41,[ n.)O0'914 mm (36 n.)l0'3 n (rh in.)thi*rlsss

(See Figure 5.7b)

One 6 mm ('/a in.) teltale
hole in reinforcing plate,
on horizontal

Reinforcing pad
shll be shaped
to suit tank

curvature
Altematve
circular shape
(see Note 8)

'.

1-

23o mm

Dh

L\

10

mmameter
(3/. n.) rod

6 mm (r/a

(see
Note 8)
125 mm (5-)
32 mm (11 in.)
corners
(150 mm 16 in.l minimum radius)

I
I

I
Arc dimenson = l/Y/2

500 mm (20 in.) and 600 mm (24 n.) manhole: 750 mm (30 n.)
750 mm (30 in.) manhole: 900 mm (36 in.)
900 mm (36 in.) manhole: 1050 mm (42 in.)
(lncrease as n'cess,ary for weld clearance)

Uniform, smooth surface

Rounded

Rounded

t
6mm

l,

Lru

t,

(see
Note 4)

See Note

(se Note 3)

, (see Note

Detail a

3. See fatfe 5.3a and Table 5.3b.

4. See Table 5.4a and Table 5.4b.
5. The se of le uld st|all equal |e lhckness

3)

Detal b

NOTES
1. Gaskel material shall be specified by e Purchaser. See 5.7.5.4.
2. The gaskeied tace shallbe machine-lnshed to provde a rninmum
g6sker-bearirE wfti of 1 I rfm e/4 n.).

of the

thhner rer$er

joned.

7. The mnmum centerline elevaons allolved by Table 5.6a, Table

5.6b, and Fgure 5.6 may be used when approved by the Ptt'DR, Do. I- and }l see Tabb s.tu ard Tab{e
5.6b, Columns 2, 4, 5, and 6. For Dimenson Dpsee Table 5.7a and
Table 5.7b, Column 3.

8. F drnensiros for Or,

9. At the optilo of |e Manlracturer, lhe ranhde lD may be set to

O, dirnenon listed i TaUe 5.6a and Table 5.6b, Column 2.

Renforcemem area and weld spacng must meet 5,1.2 and 5.7.3

the

6. The shell nozes shown n Fgure 5.8 rnay be substuted for

manl|oles.

(See
Note 7)

Manhole

(!/ n.)

See Note 2

Fgure

t7b

requrerients respdively.

Table 5.7a-Shell Manhole

API STaNDARo 650

5-34

500 mm (20 in.) nd 600 mm (24 in.) shell manholes: twenty-ighl20 mmiiamoter(3/. in.) bolts in 23 mm (% in.) holes
750 mm (30 n.) and 900 mm (36 in.) sholl mnholes: forty-two 20 mm-diametr (3/a n.) bolts in 23 mm (ls n.) holes
(Bolt hols shallstraddle th nang6 vortical c6nt6dn6.)
Gasket (s6 Not6 I ):
marhd:

500 mm (20 n.)

6m m (24 in.)

645 lfm

(2lh

in.)

O'

5(B

rrn (:O

.)

lD'

rfm (r/ in.) *jgEs

rEhd: 7{6rn (29t in.)O'6t0nn(24n.)lD'3m(fi in.)t\ilaE

7$ rrh (30 n.) Erlhd: 8S rn (3l/r in-) O' 762 rrfn ($ n.) lD' 3 rfm (ih in.) ti*laE6
q) n {36 in. ) mahd: f051 r (41/. in.) C) ' 914 rn (36 n.) lD' 3 .fm Ci. in.) *ls

(5o6 Figure
6 mm (i/r in.) tolltale
hole in reinlorcjng plate,
on horizo.,al

Renforcing pad
shall b6 shapd
to suil tnk

Altemavo I
circularshape
(se Not 8)

'. 230 'rn

/ F{9
'n.

.i=l
2D-

10 mmameter

t--l_EI

(3,h

EI
El

6 mm (r/.

_l_

(soe

Nob 8)

in.) rcd

125 mm
32 mm (1r in.)

(5')
Figure

&7b

(150 mm [6 in.] mjnimum redius)

Arc dimension = W2

500 mm (20 in.) and 600 m (24 in.) manhol6:

750 mrn (30 in.) manhole: 900 mm
900 mm (36 in.) maholo: 1050 mm
(lncreas6 as necssary forweld clearnce)

Uniform, smooth sullacg

*'ll

Rounded

(See
Note 7)

Rounded

Manhole OO

Manhol

l{

(see
Note 4)

l,

(so
Note 4)

S6e
Nol6 5
See Nole 2

l,-1

L- l, (see Nole 3)

Se Note 2

Dotal a

Detal b

NOTES
'1. Gasket material shall be specitbd by th Purchaser. See 5.7.5.4.
2. fhe gasketed trce shaf be madln+fnshed to provire a mnmum
gasket$earig winh of ,9 mm e/4 n.).
3. See Table 5.3a and Table 5.3b.
4. See Table 5.4a and Table 5,4b.
5. The ske of lhe weH shal equal the thbtriess of the !nner meber
oned.

6. The sheg nozzles shown n Figure 5.8 may be substituted for

manholes.

(see Not 3)

7, The mnmum @ntedne elevatons allowed by Table 5.6a, Table

5.6b, and Fgure 5.6 may be used when apprcved by the Pur-

qhaser

8. For dmensons for Oa

DR, D", L, and V

fabe 5.6a and Tabe
5.6b, Columns 2,,1, 5, and 6. For Dimenson Dp see Table 5.7a and
Table 5.7b. Column 3.

9. At the opon of the Manufacturer, th6 manhole /D may be set to

the OD dimenslon listed n Table 5,6a and Table 5.6b. Colurnn 2.
Renlorcement ara and weld spacng must meet 5.7.2 and 5.7.3
requirements respeclively.

Fgure 5.7a-Shell Manhols

Nozzle

(
qNeck bovol should

be
--r

about 'l o degrees

Round
(Se fables
Sa.5-6b, 5-7a. and S7b)

t.s.n

\t

t*

-------------- -----<)
6fd|/,s5-7a ard

5-7 A

Round comr if weld

<f z

_-,----1
Tot V
I40 mm (11 n.) maxmuml

-ons

,n-,)

Ea

:
F:

l-8

-l*.:
Ilg;3i
F

;,

8a F

ifi ,*l-., 8
$f,,.*l {;gi
;+_*W,JEEr

*.:

4t4gE*
"'rl)Lllz-----j
/U
'
lU
,

.$8

fV-s

Nl\' -"ff'"H::""1'"il"';ffibPff:""*0"'ot
;;7-----o

[4omm(1!/'?in)maxim"l

Lq

ftJlanhole or Nozzle

rsTbrsss{.slr7*ands7b) rt

tvoesreos._z
atoui 10
degreos -----;z
I
"T,:X::T::aoou\
.r..+l--.r

"'-,'1[,;h
,

Nozzle

Neck bevel should b

irtrt,;
V___7mf, I
^///)-"

\_

l\tlor(ltitrna\irnut

/,.//1h(t+t)ri""+r"
I
]i
ol Atremarive tl
N\\_rNI

W__4, )

e-$

o
E

(<\s----r
eom J

f]

Radioaph

(::^"-8i^13^,

Item d and e)

lnsorl-type Reforcomonl for Manholes and Nozzle3

4. Other pemissible insert debls are shol h Fgure 5.8 otAPl Slandar 620.
The reftnement area shal conlbm lo 5.7.2.
5. Drnensions and weld sizes that are not show are the same as lhose

Notes:

1. See Table 5.7a and Tabb 5.7b, Column 3, for the she crrlout, whch shall
nol be less han the outsde diameter of the neck plus 1 3 mm (l/2) n.
2. Seo 5.7.3 br minimum spacng of welds at openng conecons.
3. The weld sze shall bo eiler A (from Tabl 5.7a and Table 5.7b, basd on 4
or r, (mnimum nec]< thckness from Table 5.4a, Table 5.4b, Table 5.6a, Table
5.6b, Table 5.7a and Table 5.7b), whichever s greater.

gven in Fgurs 5.7a and TaUe 5.4a though Table 5.8b.

6. Detals ol weldng bevels may vary from those shown

Purchaser.

Fgure s.7b-Details of Shell Manholes and Nozzles

agroed lo by the

Nozzle q
N6ck bevel should be

about 10 dogrees

thzv
,

1.5 mm

(1/16

in.

,^Lr-2,1
----__rr
(S6Tables 5-7a snd

6-7bl A

9ei
E

qEB,
99,r

.9d
Pul

1.5 mm

_g

(1/re in.

Round comer f weld

<f z

Tables 5-7a and 5-7b)

(Se Tbl6s 5-7a and

Round comer if weld

<f
n.) maximuml

TorlV
[40 mm (1]i, in ) maximuml

[40 mm (11/, in.) maximum]

f
N

ozzle

.\q

^
3
a'E
bE

(ss Tabls

f-

...,J 45" rs* r"0,"" +2" ""0

our.-

5-7a d 5-7b)

mm(1oh.)

lr*t
(min)

nmi'uin.)

(See Noto 3)

r0

^T7
mm (3/s in.) maxmuml

,E

mm ('/,6i.)

f+t
(min)

""''""'""lll]:l2
l:4

Alternative =q

bev6l
EE
t-----r^

6',

'o

E
o.

V*t;; lh ;
V\-- -ll+
o

bevel

92.

Radograph

lsee 8.1.2.2,
Item d)

1t':1LN-i
Z
-

nroogr"pt

-,/N

(seo 8.1.2.2,
Item d and e)

lnso-type Reinforcement for Manholes and Nozzles

Notes:
1. See Table 5.7a and fable 5.7b, Column 3, for the shell cutout, which shall
not be less than the outside diameter of the neck plus l3 mm (1/2) in
2. See 5.7.3 for minimum spacng of welds at oPenng connectons.
3. The weld ze shall be either A (ftom fable 5.7a and Table 5.7b, based on 1)
or t,(minimum neck lhickness from Table 5.4a, Table 5.4b, Table 5.6a, Table
5,6b, Table 5.7a and Table 5.7b), whichever is greater.

4. Other permissble nsen detals are shown in Figure

5 8 of API Standard

620

The reinforcement area shall conform to 5.7.2.

5. Dimensions and weld sizes that are not shown are the same as those
given in Figure 5.7a and Table 5.4a lhrough Table 5.8b.

6. Detals of welding bevels may vary from those shown if agreed to by the
Purchaser.

Fgure 5.7b-Details of Shell Manholes and Nozzles

API

s-36

STANDARD

650

Arc distance

One 6 mm (1/" i.) telltale hole

in reinforcing plate,
on hozontal centerline
Bed reinforcing plate to
radius of tank shell
Aliematve shape
for low-type nozzles
See DetalAor B for
bottorn edge
<--....----__---......---..'
Renforcing Plale

--l-'l

Diamond

-'-\

(See Figure 5-7b)

Single Flange

Double Flage

Special Flange

Regular-type Flanged Nozzles, NPS 3 or Larger

(Bolt holes shallstraddle flange centerlines)

"o:9-Q

-::r- Note 1)

Chip

l/2 [6 mm

(1

in.) minimum]

(See Note 5)
600

DetalA
Detail B
Low-type Flanged Nozzles, NPS 3 or Larger
(Bolt holes shall straddle flange centerlines)

NOTES
1. See 5.1.5.7 for nformafon on the sze ofwelds.
2. See 5.8.9 for informaon on the couplngs used n shell nozzles.
3. Nozzjes NPS 3 or large. requre rerforceme

'

4. Detals of weldrE bevels may vary hom thos shown if agreed to

by lhe Purchaser.
5. Shop weld not attached to bottom plate,
6. See 5.7.6.2 for nfomaton on supdying nozes flush or with an

nternal projection.

Figure 5.8-Shell Nozzles (see Tables 5.6a, 5.6b, 5.7a, 5.7b, 5.8a, and 5.8b)

5-37

WEtDEo TANKS FoR OL SToRAGE

-r

-itF-

F-

10 mm (3/s in.)

->lr l-.- (r/s

; 10 mm n.)

(see Note 2)
(see Note 2)
45"
Shell
1.5 mm

(1i16 n.)

Type D

Type C

Type B

Type A

Couplngs and Flanged Fittigs, NPS 3,' Through NPS 2 (see Note 3)
NOfES (continued)

7.

See Table 5.7a and fable 5. 7b. Column 6.

8.1,i,shallbel9mm(3/4in.)orthethicknessofeitherpartFinedbytheflletweld'v'/hicheverisless
consrucrion detals apply to unrenforced readed, norFreaded, and flanged rbzzles

g. iii

Figure 5.8-Shell Nozzles (contnueQ

Table 5.6a-Dimensons for Shell Nozzles (Sl)
Column

NPS
(Sze of

Nozzle)

Column 2

outside
Diameler of
Ppe
OD

Column

Nominal
Thickness
of Flanged
Nozzle Ppe
Walla

t"

Column 4
Dameter of
Hole n

Reinforcing
Plate
Dp

Column

Column 6

Leng of

width of
of
Renforcng Renforcing
Plate
PlateD or
Diameter W
Sde

L=

Do

Dmensions in millimelers

Column

Minimum
Distnce

from Shellto-Flange
Face

column

Column 9c

Minimum Distance iom

Bottom of Tank to Center
of Nozzle
Regular
Typed

Low Type

Flanged Finngs
60

1524.O

54

1371 6

52

1320.8

3068

3703

400

1641

1534

1375

2163

3341

400

1488

1342

1324

2661

3214

400

1431

1331

1387

1280

'152

50

1270.0

1274

2560

3093

400

4B

1219.2

1222

2455

2910

400

1334

1230

46

1168.4

1112

2355

2845

400

1284

1',!80

44

111

7.6

1121

2255

27 25

375

1234

1125

42

1066.8

375

'lt84

1075

375

1131

1025

350

'r081

975

2235

350

1031

925

2',115

325

979

875

1995

325

929

420

1865

300

879

170

40

1016.0

1070
1019

2155
2050

36

914.4

9'18

1950
1850

34

863.6

867

1145

32

812.8

816

'1645
'1545

3B

30

965.2

762.O

968

765

2605

2445
2355

API

5-38

STANDARD

650

Table 5.6a-Dimensions for Shell Nozzles (Sl) (Continued)

Dimensions in millimelers

Column

NPS
(Sze of

Column 2

Column 3

Column 4

outside
Dameter of

f{ominal
Thickness
of Flanged

Dameter of
Hole n

Ppe

Nozzle Ppe

OD

Walla

Nozzle)

Reinforcng
Plate

Dp

t,

Column

Column 6

Column 7

Renforcing

Width of
Reinforcing

Mnmum
Distance
from Shell-

PlateD or

Plate

to-Flange

Dameter

Face

Length of
Sde

of

L= D,

Column 8

Column 9c

Mnmum Dstance from

Bonom of Tank to Center
of ftlozzle

Regular
Tyrped

Low Type

28

111.2

114

1440

1745

300

826

120

26

660.4

664

1340

1625

300

116

670

24

609.6

613

1255

1525

300

134

630

12.1

22

558.8

12.1

562

1155

'1405

215

684

580

20

508.0

12.1

51'l

1055

1285

275

634

525

457 .2

't2.1

460

950

60

475

18

11

2so

581

16

406.4

12.7

410

850

'l035

250

531

425

14

355.6

12.1

359

750

915

250

481

375

12

323.8

't2.7

321

6Bs

840

225

449

345

'10

273.O

12.1

216

58s

720

225

399

290

219.1

222

485

590

2N

349

240

-12.7

168.3

10.97

171

400

495

200

306

200

114.3

8.56

111

305

385

115

259

150

88.9

1.62

92

265

345

175

239

135

Zf

60.3

5.54

63

150

175

1112f

48.3

5.OB

'r

50

150

33.4

6.35

'r

50

150

lr

314f

26.1

5.54

150

150

Threaded and Socket-Welded Couplings

3S

108.0

Couplng

111 .1

245

145

Zr

16.2

Coupling

79.4

175

tl

1112f

63.5

Coupling

66.7

150

44.5

Couplng

41 .6

150

35.0

Couplinq

38.1

150

3l1l

a
b
c
d

285

360

For exfa-soong pipe, see ASTM A53M or A106M for o$er all thcknesses; however, ppng materal must confom to 4.5.
The width of the shell plate shall be $fficent to contan the renforcing plate and to provide clearance hom

fte ginhjont of le shell course.

Lo! , type rehforced mzles stEl rpt be located lo$Er lan le mnnrm distance
stlofil in Cotrm I cor4res with spacirE rules of 5.7.3 and F(re 5.6.

mirmn

slpv

n Cdumn 9. The

disrance fiom e

bdom

Regular type rerforced nozzles shall not be localed lo/er than the minmum dislance llry shown n Coumn 8 when shell thickness s equal to

or less than 12.5 mm. Greaie. dstances may be requred for shells thcker than 12.5 mm to meet the mnmum weld spacng of 5.7.3 and

e
f
s
h

FExe 5.6.
See fable 5.7a, column 2.

Fhged nozzles and co(plngs in pipe szes NPS 2 or smallef do rpt requ-e refforcng plates. Di wi be le dameter of le hole n e shell
date, and Wdd ,4 will be as specified n fable 5.7a, Cdumn 6. Renforcng plates rnay be used if the conslEtion details compay with
rdrforced nozde detals.
A coupling in an NPS 3 requres renforcernent.

See 5.7.3 and Fgure 5.6.

NOTE

See Frre 5.8.

WrDED

fAN(s FoR OrL

5-39

SToRAGE

Table 5.6b-Dmensons for Shell Nozzles (USC)

Dimensions n inches

Column

NPS
(Sze of

Nozzle)

Column

Column

of Ppe

Nominal
Thckness
of Flanged
Nozzle Pipe

OD

walla

outsde
Diameter

tn

Column 4
Dameter of
Hole n

Reinforcn9

Column

Length of
Sde of

Renforcng
Plateb or

Plate
Dn

Diameter

L-

Column 6

Column

Mnmum
Width of
Renforcing
Plate

Do

Distance
from ShelltGFlange
Face

Column 9c
Column I
Minmum Dstance from
Bottom of Tank to Center
of Nozzle
Regular
Low Type
Typed

Flanged Fittngs
60

60

60r/8

1203l

145311

16

645i8

603is

54

54

54 r/8

1083i1

131112

16

58s/B

543/B

52

52

52118

1043/a

126112

16

565/8

523 tB

50

50

5or/8

1003/1

12131a

16

545/a

503/B

4B

4B

4Br /8

96r/1

111

16

52s18

483i8

46
44

46

461/B

92311

112

16

505/s

463/8

44
42
40

44118

883/4

1O7111

15

4Bs/B

44318

42118

8431a ,

1o21lz

15

46s/s

423t8

4or/8

8o3i 1

9731a

'15

44518

40318

763h

92314

14

42s18

383/8

42
40

3B

3B

38r/8

36

36

361/8

14

4os/8

363/B

34

72314
683/a

88

34r/8

83r/a

'13

385/8

343/8

32

32118

64314

18112

13

365/8

32318

30

30

30r/8

603/4

73112

12

34518

303/8

28

2A

281la

563/4

683/a

12

32518

28318

26
24

26119

5231

64

12

3os/g

26318

24118

49112

60

12

22118

45112

55r /a

11

27

22314

2O1lB

41112

5o112

1',I

45311

10

23

18r11

403la

2'l

'163i1

34
32

26
24
22

22

20

20

18

It)
14

12
10
B

18

16
14
-t?314

103/1
8s/B

6
4

41lz

0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
o.432
0.337

'l8r /8

37112 t,

24314

20314

161/B

33112

14118

29112

36

10
10

19

1431q

12tla

21

33

1731a

13112

'lo?/8

23
19

2811a

15311

11t lz

2311c

1331a

9tl2

19112

12118

71lB

12

15tla

10r /4

1O1lz

13112

9112

51lc

83 t4

63/,4

45lg

3112

0.300

3s/a

2t

23lB

0.2rB

2112

1531a

API

5-40

650

STANDARo

Table 5.6b-Dimensons for Shell Nozzles (USC) (Continued)

Dimensions n inches

Column

Column 2

outsde

NPS
(Sze of

Diameter
of Pipe
OD

Nozzle)

ltl2l

tr

Nominal
Thckness
of Flanged
Nozzle Ppe

0.200

.315

0.250
0.218

1.05

Column 4
Dameter of
Hole in

Reinforcng
Plate
Dp

Walla
ln

1.90
1

3l4l

Column 3

3.000
2.500

ll lzl

1.750
1.375

3l4l

b
c

e
f

Reinforcing

wdth of
Reinforcing

PlateD or

Plate

Dameter

Sde of

L-

4 3lB

Column 7
Minimum
Dislance
from Shell.
to-Flange

Column 8

Column 9c

Mnimum Distance fror

Bottom of Tank to Center
of Nozzle
Regular
Lo{v Type

Face

Typed

Do

Hy

95/8

55/B

Coupling

3r/8

14114

Coupling
Coupling

25tB

Couplng

1112

l1

1114

-lt18

For e)dra-song prpe, see ASTM 453 or A'106 tor oer wall thcknesses; holtever, ppng materal mlt confom to 4.5.
The width of tfie sell plate shall b s{qcent to conl,an |e renforcng phte and

tloe reirforced mzzbs shall rn be located

Lov

stpm

Column 6

Length of

Threaded and Socket-Welded Couplngs

3S
4.250
Couplinq
Zf

Column 5

i Colurn I

lo\irer than le

p.ovide dearance trom

nhimm disafr stDwn

in Colunn 9. The

gr jc}int of

rinium

e shell ccl.se.

disance from le bottol

corndies wi spacing nes of 5.7.3 and F$re 5.6.

Regular type renfo.ced nozzles shall not be located lourer than the mnmum dstance Htv shown in Column 8 when shell thckness is equal to
less rhan 1/2 n. Greatsr distances riay be.equred for shells thicker |an 1/2 in. to meet the nmum rr'reld spacing ol 5.7.3 and Fge 5.6.
See Table 5.7b, Column 2Flanged nozzles and couplings n ppe zes NPS 2 or smaller do mt requre reinforcing plates. Diwill be fte dameter of the hole n the shell
plate and Weld i4 will be as specmed in Table 5.7b, Colurm 6. Renforcing plates may be used if the corEtudion detals conply wifl

reirforced nozzle details.

I A couplng in an NPS 3 reqres renforcernert.

h See 5.7.3 and Fge 5.6NOTE

See

Figre

5.8.

Table 5.7a-Dimensions for Shell Nozzles: Pipe, Plate, and Welding Schedules (Sl)
Dmensons in millmeters

Column

Thickness ofShell
and Reinforcing

Plat

Column 2

Column 3

Minmum Ppe
Wall Thickness of
Flanged Nozzlesb

Maxmum
Diameter of Hole
n Shell Plate
(Dp) Equals
Outside Diameter

tandT

Column 4

Column

Column 6

Size of Fllet Weld ,4

Siz of Fillet

weld

Nozzles Larger

fhan

NPS 2

NPs 3L to 2
Nozzles

of Ppe Plus
5

12.1

16

12.1

16

12.7

16

'r0

12.1

It)

10

11

12.1

16

11

13

12.7

16

13

14

12.1

20

14

I
I

5-41

WELDED TANKs FoR OrL SToRAGE

Table 5.7a-Dimensions for Shell Nozzles: Ppe, Plate, and Weldng Schedules (Sl) (Continued)
Dimensions in millimeters

column

Column 5

Column 6

Column 2

Column 3

and Reinforcing

Minimum Pipe
wall Thickness of

Diameter of Hole
in Shell Plate

Platea

Flanged Nozzlesb

landT

(DJ Equals
outsde Diameter
of Pipe Plus

16

12.7

20

It)

11

12.1

20

18

I
I

20

12.1

20

20

21

12.7

20

21

10

22

12.7

20

22

10

I
I

24

12.1

20

24

10

25

12.1

20

25

11

27

14

20

21

'11

2B

14

20

28

11

30

16

20

30

'r3

32

16

20

32

13

33

18

20

33

13

20

35

14

Column

Sze of Fillet weld A

Maximum
Thckness ofShell

35

,IB

Sze of Fllet

weld

Nozzles Larger
Than NPS 2

NPs 3L to 2
Nozzles

I
I

36

20

20

36

14

3B

20

20

38

14

40

2-l

20

40

14

41

21

20

40

'16

43

22

20

40

tb

45

22

20

40

16

shellplate thicker than requred is used for the product and hydrostatc loading (see 5.6), the excess shell-plate thckness, withn venical
disance both above and below the centeline of the hole i e tank shell plate equal to the vencal dmension of e hole n e tank shell
plate, may be considered as renforcement, and the ickness l"of the nozzle renforcing plate may be decreased accordingly. ln such cases,
tf a

the renforcement and the attachment weldng shallconfor to the desgn lirnits for reiforcement of shell openngs specified in 5 7.2Ths column applies to flanged nozzles NPS 26 and larger. See 4 5 for piping materials.

NOTE

b) fhe

c)

See Figure 5.8.

portion lyng within the shell-plate thckness.

The ponon extendng nward from the inside surface of the tank shell plate to the distance specifed in ltem a.

5.7.2.5 The aggregate strength of the weld anaching a ffiing to the shell plate, an ntervenng renforcing plate, or
bolh shall at least equal the proportion of the forces passing through the entre renforcement that s calculated to
pass through the ftting.

API

5-42

STANDARD

650

Table 5.7b-Dmensions for Shell Nozzles: Ppe, Plate, and welding Schedules (USC)
Dmensions n inches

Column

Column 2

Thickness ofShell Mnmum Ppe

and Renforcing Wall fhickness of
Platea Flanged Nozzlesb

landT

l"

Column

Column ,l

Column 5

Column 6

Sze of Fllet Weld ,4

Maximum
Diameter of Hole
in Shell Plate
(Dr Equals
Outside Diameter

Sze of Fillet

Weld B

Nozzles Larger
Than NPS 2

NPS

3t to

Nozzles

of Ppe Plus

llz

s/8

1lz

s/a

s/r o

112

5/8

5/re

3/8

llz

s/s

3lB

1lrc

1lz

s/a

11rc

1lc

1lz

112

5/g

112

5/r e

th6

llz

3lq

tho

5/r o

s/g

112

3lc

s/s

5ho

5/r o

11/ro

112

3lq

11/rs

5h6

5ha

3lc

112

3lc

3lc

rl16

5/r e

13/ro

llz

3lq

13/ro

3la

5ho

lla

112

3lc

llB

3/s

'I5/16

112

3lt

1s/rs

3/s

5ha

112

3tt

tha

5/r e

9^o

3lc

11h 6

7lr(

5l.6

11lB

9/r s

3lc

'ttl8

l ltd

s/r o

13/16

5/8

3lq

13h 6

112

5he

1114

s/a

3lc

1111

1lz

s/r o

ll/rs

3lc

1sh 6

112

s/r o

13/8

11/ro

3lc

13/g

tha

5/r e

17116

3lc

3lc

'17116

946

5/r o

11lz

3lc

3lq

'1112

th6

5h6

19^ 6

13h 6

3lc

'1112

9/r e

5/r o

15/8

13/ro

3lq

1112

5/s

5h6

1ll/r s

718

3lc

11lz

s/B

J/ 16

'1311

1la

3tt

'1112

5/e

"/16

3/r o

t1/16

15/16

3/.,s

114
111

1lq

llc

1lc

lf a shell plate lhicker than required is used for the product and hydrosl,alic loadng (see 5.6), the excess shell-plate thickness, withn a
vencal dstarce both above and bebw the centerline of the hole in the tank shell plate equal to the vencal drrEnsion of the hole in e tank
shell date, rnay be coosdered as reinforcernent and le thckness ?of le noze reinforcng date rnay be decresed accordrEly. ln such
cases, e renlorcemeflt and the aachrnent ueldng shall confm to r desgn limits for renforcernent of shell openrEs specified n 5.7.2.
Ths column applies to flanged nozes NPS 26 and larger. See ,1.5

NOTE

See Fgure 5.8.

fa

piping materials.

5-43

WELDED TANKS FoR Orr SToRAGE

Table 5.8a-Dmensions for Shell Nozzle Flanges (Sl)

Dmensons in millimeters

column

Column

Column

column

colum

Column

column

Column

Column

column

10

Diameter of Bore
NPS
(Sze

of

Nozzle)

Mnmum

Thckness
of Flanoed

o-

Ortsde
Dameter

of Flarge
A

Diarneter

Darleter

of Rased
Face

of Bolt
Crcle

Number

Diameter

ol

of

Holes

Holes

Diameter

Bolts

Slip-On
Type:
Ortside
Dameter

of Ppe
Plus

weldirE
Neck
Typeu
81

Column

fl

column
12

Minimu Dameter
of Hub at Poit of
weld
Slip-On
Typeo

welding
Neck
Typec
EI

B
79.4

1854

1676

1759

52

4B

45

6.4

54

16.2

1683

151'l

1594

44

4B

45

6.4

1461

'r

6.4

c
c

52

13

1626

537

44

48

45

50

10

1569

1410

1480

44

48

45

6.4

48

10

'1510

1360

1426

44

42

40

6.4

b
b

46

68

1460

1295

1365

40

42

40

6.4

44

61

1405

1245

1315

40

42

40

6.4

42

61

1345

1195
'1125

1257

36

42

40

6.4

6.4

40

1290

65

1200

36

42

40

3B

60

1240

1075

1150

32

42

40

6.4

36

60

1170

1020

1036

32

42

40

6.4

34

59

1110

960

1029

32

42

40

6.4

6.4

c
c

32

1060

57

910

978

28

30

54

985

855

914

28

2A

52

925

795

864

2a

26

870

50

145

806

24

42
33
33

40
30

6.4

30

6.4

6.4

30

20

33

30

4.8

20

33

30

4.8

635

20

30

21

4.8

535

511

16

30

21

4,8

470

540

16

21

24

4,8

24

48

815

690

22

46

750

640

20

43

585

18

40

635

16

36

595

750

14

35

535

415

416

12

27

24

4.8

12

32

485

380

432

12

25

22

3.2

10

30

405

325

362

12

25

22

3.2

b
b

2A

345

210

298

23

20

3.2

25

280

216

24-l

23

20

2.4

24

230

157

190

19

16

19

't6

a
b
c
d

60

190

24

121

152

1.6

1.6

20

150

92

121

19

16

1.6

11lz

11

125

13

98

16

12

1.6

Br = inde diarneter of ppe.

E = outsde diameter

pipe + 2t,.

Er = outsde dameter of pipe.

Coroson allowance, if specmed, need rpt be added to flange and cover thcknesses
Class 125, and ASME 816.47 flanges.

NOTE

comng with ASME 816.5 Class 150, ASME

816.1

See Foure 5.8. The facno dimensbos lq sliD.on and weldino-neck fianoes in NPS 11/, hrou 20 and NPS 24 are dentcal lo those
flaroes in N?S 30:36, 42, 4a,
52,5,t, and 60 are in
soecied n ASE 816.5 tor Chs< 150 steel flanoei. The facino diensbns
ahreernern wi ASME 816.1 tor Class 125 cast io flanqes. The ilriensions for larqe flnqes may confom to Series B d ASME 816.47.

fi,

API SfANoARo 650

5-44

Table 5.8b-Dimensions for Shell Nozzle Flanges (USC)

Dmensions in inches
Column

Colum

column

Column

Column

Column

column

Column

Column

Column

Column

column

10

1l

'12

Darieter of Bore
NPS

Mnimum

Outsde

Daameter
o, Thickness
of Flanged of Flange
Nozzle)

(S2e

Dameter

of Rasd

of Bolt

Face

Crcle

Nrmber Diameter

of

Holes

of

Holes

Diarneter

of

BoIts

Slip-On
Type:
OLnside

Daieter

of Ppe
Plus

weldng
Neck
rypeu
BI

Mnimum
Oiameter of Hub
at Point of weld

Slitron Weldirlg
leck
Type"

Typec
E1

B
a

60

3r /8

13

66

69r/a

52

17lA

13lc

o.25

54

661/1

59112

62314

44

1118

1314

o.25

1314

o.25

1314

o.25

2,le

52

50

2314

48

23t1

64
6'13/a
59112

57112
55112
53112

601lZ
5811a

56

44

44
44

11lA

-tltB
'I5/B

11lz
'1112

o.25

o.25

46

2111'ts

51112

51

533/1

40

1s/s

44

2stg

551/1

49

513/4

40

'I5/8

1112

o.25

11lz

0.25

1112

o.25

42

2slB

53

47

49112

36

'ts/8

40

2112

503i4

4411a

4711a

36

15/8

3B

23tB

483t

421

la

451

la

32

'15/g

1112

0.25

36

23lB

46

4O1

la

423t1

32

1s/B

1112

0.25

15/8

'1112

o.2s

o.25

b
b

25h6

34

21lt

32

43311
41311

37311

353

4o1lz
38112

32

28

1s/8

1112

30

21lB

383/4

333A

36

2A

13lB

1114

o.25

2A

21116

3611?

3lr/a

34

28

13/8

1114

o.25

b
b

26

3411a

2911a

3131a

24

13is

11la

0.25

24

11lB

32

27111

29112

20

'13/8

'll la

0.r9

29112

25114

27114

20

13/8

11la

0.19

23

25

20

1114

11lB

o.19

16

'1114

'11/8

o.19

0.19

0.13

'I r

22

J/16

20

'llr/rs

'18

'I9/r

27112

25

21

2231

16

11116

23112

18112

2111a

16

1r

/8

14

1Jl8

21

161/1

I83/4

12

1r

/8

12

11la

19
'16

15

-t7

12

1
'1

le

llB

7lB

3lt

0.19

0.13

0.10

10

13/16

12311

1411a

12

11/s

'13112

105/8

11311

1'l

81lz

9112

1la

3lt

0.10

15/r o

3lc

s/8

0.06

3lc

5lt

0.06

15h o

63/rs
5

71lz

71lZ

3lc

3s/B

43

t1

3tc

s/8

0.07

11lz

rr/ts

2t lB

3tlB

slB

112

0.07

4 = rEile diarieter ol ppe.

f= outsire diameter of ppe + 2t

= outsde diamete. of ppe.

Coolion allowance, if specmed, need rEt be added to flange and cover thcknesses complying wi ASME 816.5 Class 150, ASME 816.1
Class 125, and ASME 816.47 flarEes.

NoTE

See Fiolre 5.8. The facino dimensons tor sio-on and ureldinq.neck ffaqes in NPS 11/2 tkouqh 20 and NPS 24 are dentical to ose
52,5'1, and 60 are in
nsr sl6.s tor clas 150 eel flanoed The tacino densoos l flanqes in NPs 30, 36 12'
'orment wr eSMg 916.1 Ior Class 125 cas iroflanqes. TtE dimen$ons for large flnges may cororm lo Se.ies B of ASME 816.,t7

iiiiimc in

5-45

WELoED TANKS FOR OIL STORAGE

Table 5.ga-Dmensions for Flush-Type Cleanout Fmings (Sl)

Dimensions in mllimeters

Column
1

Column

column

Column

Column

Arc widlh
of Shell
Heightof Wdth of
Openng Opening Reinforcng

Plate

Upper

Corier

Column

Column

Ed9
Ostance

widtha

Bottom

(Except

Flange

at
Bottom)

Wdrh

Upper

Corner

Radius of
Shell
of
Renforcing
opening
Plate
Radus

1:l

Column
6

cotumn I cohmn Column

9i10

11

Flange

of Botts
e

f,

",*,
+acrng"
_tffi["'.

Diameter

of

Bohs

Bolts

f3

12

203

406

1170

100

360

32

102

89

83

22

20

610

610

1830

300

740

38

102

95

89

36

20

914

1219

27(n

610

1040

38

1t4

121

108

46

24

1219c

12't9

3200

610

'1310

3B

114

121

114

52

24

'1.5 mm clearance between tt requred neck'io-ang weld

necessary to provk e a

@s
and the head of the bolt.

b
c

Refers to spacing at the

lot,t

er corners of the cleano(lt'fining flange

only for Group l, ll, lll, or lllA shellmaterials (see 5 7 7 2)'

NOTE

See Figure 5.12.

Table s.gb-Dimensions for Flush-Type Cleanout Fttings (USC)

Column

column

Column

column

column

Column

Column

column

Column

Upper

Corier
Radius of

Edge

wdha

Bottom

Special

Width of

Arc Wdth
of Shell

Di$ance

(Except
at
Bonom)

Flange
Wdth

Bolt

Heght

of
Opening

Opning Renforcing
b

Plate

Comer
Radus

Upper

Shell
of
Reinforcng
Opening
Plate

4
14

16

46

24

24

72

12

36

48

106

24

4Bc

48

125

24

Dimensions n nches

Column

column

10

11

Flange

of Bolts
e

Spacngb

f2

Number Diameter

of

of

Bolts

Bolts

f3

1114

31lz

3114

22

314

1112

3314

31lz

36

3lq

41

1112

4112

4314

41la

46

51112

11lZ

41lz

4112

52

@aSneceSsarytoprodea1/16in.clearancebetweenerequredneck.to.flangeweld
and the head of the bolt.

b
c

Refers to spacing at the lower comers of the cleanoul-ftting ange.

Only tor Group l, ll, lll, or lllA shellmaterials (see 5.7.7.2).

NOTE

See Fige 5.12.

,]

5-46

API

STANDARo

650

Table 5.1oa{nmum Thckness of Cover Plate, Bolting Flange, and Bottom Reinforcing Plat for FlushType Cleanout Fttingsr (SD
Dmensions in millmeters
Column

Cohnn

Column

Colun

column

Column

Column

Colu.nn

200 x 400

Deson

uquo

Equivalent
Prssure
kP

60

600 x 600

fhckrEss
of Bonom
Renlorcinq
PlateD

lb

10

13

Thickness
of Boltng
Flange and
Cover

Cdumn
10

900 x 1 200

ThdEss

Thckness
Flange and

Plate

of Bottom
Reinforcing
Plate.

tb

10

13

1200 x 1200

fhckness

Thckness
of Bottorn
Reinforcng

Plaro

ThickrEss
of Bolting
Flangeand
CoverPlate

tb

tb

16

21

16

22

13

'19

25

21

28

of Bolnq
Cover

of Bottom
Reinlorcig

Plate

Plate

10.4

101

10

13

13

12.5

123

10

'13

.13

14

22

2B

22

30

16.1

159

10

13

14

16

24

32

25

33

18.3

179

11

13

16

18

25

33

2A

35

'

191

11

't3

16

'18

27

35

28

36

215

'11

'13

18

19

28

36

30

40

9.5

2'1.9

a
b
c
d

Flange and

Cover
Plate

Level, m

6.'r

Thckness
of Bolting

x (Heightx Wdth)

Sze of Openng

Maxmn

column

Equivalent pressqe s based oo water loading.

Maxmum of 25 mm.

Maxirrum of 28

rm.

Maxmum of 45 mm.

See 5.7.7.7 when conoson allowarrce

NOTE

s specifed.

See Figl.e 5.12.

Maxmum of4omm.

Table 5'lobJrilinimum Thckness of cover Plate, Bolting Flange, and Bottom Reinforcing plate for FlushType Cleanout Fnngsr ruSC)
Dimensions in nches
Column

Column

Column

Column

Column

Col(mn

Column

Co[rnn

Column

Sze of Opening

8x16
Maxmum
Dsion

Liqud

Equvalent
Pfessure
kPa

Level, m

Flanqe

ar

Cover Plate

24x24

Thckness
of Botlorn
Renforcino

piateb

to

x (Height x Wdth)
36x48

48x48

Thickness
of Bolting
Flangeand

Thickness
ol Bottodr
Reinforcing

fhckness

Thckness

of Bolng
Flangeand

o, Bottorn
Reinforcing

Cover Plate

Platec

Flange and

Thckness
of Bottor
Reinforcng

Cover Plate

Plateo

CoverPlate

Platee

lh

lb
.t12

Thickness
of Bolting

lb

tb

5/8

13h o

llB

?o

4.1

3lB

llz

3/8

34

14.1

3/a

112

112

112

3lc

,l

7.8

3/a

1lz

112

9/r e

lte

'1118

llB

23

3/s

112

9/r o

5/B

15/re

1114

60

26

tha

112

5/8

1'llr 6

1sll6

1r/s

'13/8

64

27.8

tha

112

5/a

11/r s

11/16

13lB

't118

11116

31.2

7lrc

1lz

lrho

3lc

11lB

171't6

'13/16

'1112

4'l
53

7?

a
b
c
d

Thickness
ot Boting

Column

Maximum of 1 in.

Maximum of 1r/s n.

NOTE

Equivalent

tres$re

Maximum of 11/2 n.

is based oo water loading.

Marum of

13/4

l3/r

in.

See s.z.u.z r,hen corroson allowance

See Fige 5.12.

s specifed.

1118
1

3/r 6

'15/16

wFl DEo TaKs FoR OtL SfoRAGE

5-41

Table 5.1f a-Thcknesses and Heghts of Shell Reinforcing Plates for Flush-Type Cleanout Fttings (Sl)
Dimensions in mllimeters

of
Shell
Course
tt

Thckness

Lowest

a
b
c

Sze of Opening x (Height x Width)

mm

mm

<22

Dirierlsons tdand

Height of Shell Renforcng Plate for

Maximum
Design Liquid
Levelc
20O

x 400

350

rnay be varied withn

the lirits dened

600 x 600

900 x 1200

915

1312

12OO

x lzOOb

1830

n 5.7 7.

1200 x 12OO flush-type cleanout fittngs are not permted lor tanks

wi greater than 38 mm

k tvest shell coure thckness.

See 5.6.3.2.

Table s.11b-Thcknesses and Heghts of Shell Renforcng Plates for Flush-Type Cleanout Fittings (USC)
Dmensons n nches

of
Shell
Course
t,t
n.

Thckness

Lowest

Af

a
b
c

Dimensions adand

Heght of Shell Reinforcng Plate for

rx (Heght x Wdth)
mm

Maxmum
Desgn Liquid
Levelc

Sizebf Openng

H
ft

8x16

24 x.24

36x48

48 x 48b

<12

14

36

54

12

rnay be varied

wihin the lrits defined

n 5 7.7.

4g x 48 flush-type clanout fiflings are not permted for tar*s vrth greater lhan 1r/2 n. lot'rest shell course bkness.

See 5.6.3.2.

5.7.2.6 The aggregate strength of the welds attaching any intervening reinforcing plate to the shell plate shall at
least equat the [io$nion ot tn foces passing through the enre renforcement that s calculated to pass through the
renforcng plate.

5.7.2.7 fhe attachment weld to the shell along the outer periphery of a reinforcing plate or proprietary connection

that tap welds to the shell shall be considered ffective only for the Parts lying outside the afea bounded by vertical
lines awn tangent to the shell openng; however, the outer peripheral weld shall be appled completely aroundlhe
reinforcement. ee 5.7.2.8 for allowabl stresses. All of the inner peripheral weld shall be considered effectve. The

strength of the eflective attachment weld shall be considered as the weld's shear resistance at the stress value gven
for filia welds in 5.7.2.8, The size of the outer peripheral weld shall be equal to the ickness of the shell plate or
renfofcng plate. whichever s thinner, btt shall not be greater than 40 mm (11/2 in.). When low-type nozzles are used
with a reifrcing plate that extends to the tank bottom (see Figure 5.8), the size of the portion of e peripheral weld
that anaches the rinforcing plate to the bonom plate shall conform to 5.1.5.7. The inner peripheralweld shall be large
enough to sustain the remainder of the loading.

5.7.2.8 The reinforcement and weldng shall be configured to provide the required strength
5.7

for the forces covered in

.?.5 and 5.7 .2.6.

The allowable stresses for the attachfnent elements are:

a)

For outer renforcing plate-to-shell and nner renforcng plate-to-nozzle neck fllet welds:

b)

For tenson across groove welds:

c)

For shear in the nozzle neck: Sx0.80x0.875

5x0.875x0.70

x 0.60.

API STANoARo 650

where

Sd

is the maximum allowable desgn stress (the lesser value of the base materals

joineo permitted by 5.6.2.1

for carbon steel, or by Tables S.za and S.zb for stanless steel.
Stress n fllet welds shall be comidered as shear on e throat of the weld. The throat of the fllet shall be assumed to
be 0.707 tmes the length of the shorter leg. Tension stress n the groove weld shall be considered to act over the
effective wed depth.

5.7.2.9 When two or more openngs are located so that the outer edges (toes) of their normal reinforcng-plate fllet
welds are closer than eight tmes the sze of the larger of the fllet welds, with a mnimum of 150 mm (6 n.), they shall
be treated and renforced as follows:

a)

All such openngs shall be ncluded in a single reinforcing plate that shall be proportioned for the largest openng in
the group.

b)

lf the nornal renforcing plates for the smaller openings in the group, considered separately, fall within the area
limits of the solid portion of the normal plate for the largest openng, the smaller openngs may be included in the
normal plate for the largest opening without an increase n the size of the plate, provded that if any opening
intersects the vertcal centerline of another openng, the total width of the final renforcing plate along the vertical
centerline of either opening is not less than e sum of the widths of the normal plates for the openngs nvolved.

c)

lf the normal reinforcing plates for the smaller openngs in the group, consdered separately, do not fall withn the
area lmits of the solid portion of the nomal plate for the largest opening, the group reinforcing-plate sze and
shape shall nclude the outer limts of the normal reinforcng plates for all the openings in e group. A change in
size iom the outer lmits of the normal plate for the largest opening to the outer limits of that for the smaller
opening farthest from the largest openng shall be accomplished by uniform straght taper unless the normal plate
for any intermedate oPning would extend beyond these lmits, in which case uniform straight tapers shalljoin the
outer lmits of the several normal plates. The provisons of ltem b with respecl to openings on the same or
adjacent vertical centerlnes also apply in this case.

5.7.2.10 Renforcing plates for shell openngs,

or each segment of the plates if

ey are not made

n one piece, shall

be provided with a 6 mm (1k in.) diarneter telltale hole. Such holes shall be located on the horizontal centerline and
shall be open to the atmosphere.

5,7.3

Spacng of Welds around Connections

See Figure 5.6 for spacing requirernents listed in 5.7.3.1, 5.7 .3.2, 5.1.3.3, and 5.7.3.4.

NOTE
Additional weld spacng requrements exist in ths sandard. Other paragraphs and tables dealing with nozzles and
manholes may increase the minimum spacng.
NOTE

Whenever stess relef or thermal stress relief is used n this standard, it shall mean post-weld heat treatment.

5.7.3.1 For non-stress-relieved welds on shell plates over 13 mm (1/z in.) thick, the minmum spacing between
penetration connecons and adjacent shell-platejoints shall be govemed by the following.

a)

The outer edge or toe of fllet around a penetrafon, around the periphery of a thckened insert plate, or around the
perphery of a reinforcing plate shall be spaced at least the greater of eght tmes the weld sze or 250 mm ('10 n.)
(dmenson A or B n Fgure 5.6) from the centerline of any bun-welded shelljoints.

b) The welds around the

periphery of a thickened insert plate, around a renForcing insen plate. or around a

renforcing plate shall be spaced at least the greater of eght mes the larger weld size or 150 mm (6 n.)
(dimenson E n Figure 5.6) from each other.

WEtoED TANKs FoR OrL SToRAGE

5.7.3.2 Where stress-relieving of the periphery weld has been peformed prior to weldng of the adjacent shelljoint
or where a non-stress-releved weld s on a shell plate less han or equal to 13 mm (1/z in.) thick, the spacng may be

reduced to 150 mm (6 n.) (dmension A in Figure 5.6) from venicaljoints or to the greater of 75 mm (3 in.) or 2112
times the shell thickness (dimension B in Figure 5.6) ftom horzontal joints. The spacng between the welds around
the periphery of a thickened insert plate or arund a reinforcng plate shall be the greater of 75 mm (3 in.) or 21lz times
the shell thickness (dimenson E in Fgure 5.6).

5.7.3.3 The rules in 5.7.3.1 and 5.7.3.2 shall also apply to the bonom.to-shelljoint (dmension C n Figure

5.6)

unless, as an alternatve, the insert plate or renforcing plate extends to the bottom-to-shelljont and inte6ects it at
approxrnately 90 degrees (dmenson D in Figure 5.6). A minimum disiance of 75 mm (3 an.) shall be maintained
Obiween tne ioe of a eld around a nonreinforced penetraton (see 5.7.2.1) and the toe ofthe shell-to-bottom weld.

5.2.3.4 Nozzles and manholes should not be placed in shell weld seams and renforcing pads for nozzles and

manholes should not overlap plate seams (i.e. Figure 5.9, Details a, c, and e should be avoided). lf there is no other
feasble option and the Purihaser accepts the desgn, circular shell openngs and reinforcing plates (if used) may be
located in a horizontal or vertical but-welded shelljint provided that the minmum spacng dimensions are met and a
radiographc examnation of the welded shelljoint s conducted. The welded shelljont shall be fully radiographed for
a ten-gtn equat to three times the diameter of the opening, but the weld seam being removed need not be
radiographed. Radiographic examination shall be in accordance with 8.1.3 through 8.1 .8.

5.7.4 Thermal Stress Relief

S.7.4,,t All flush-type cleanout fnngs and flush-type shell connections shall be thermally stress-releved as an
assembly prior to iitallation n the tat shell or aftei installation nto the tank shell f the enre tank is stress-relieved.
The stres relief shall be canied out within a temperature range of 600 'C to 650 "C (1100 'F to 1200 'F) (see 5.7.4.3
for quenched and tempered materials) for t hour per 25 mm ( l in.) of shell thickness. fhe assembly shall include the
bottom reinforcing plate (or annular plate) and the flange-to-neck weld.

5.7.4.2 When the shell material s Group l, ll, lll, or lllA, all openng connectons NPS 12 or larger in nomnal

dameter n a shell plate or thickened insert plate more than 25 mm (1 in.) thick shall be prefabricated into the shell
plate or thckened insert plate, and the prefabricated assembly shall be thermally stress-releved within a temPerature
iange of 600.c to 650;c (1100'F to 12oo "F) fof t hour per 25 mm (1 in.) of thckness prior to nstalafon. The
streis-relieving requremenB need not include the flange-to-neck welds or other nozzle-neck and manhole-neck
attachments, provided the following conditions are fumlled.

a)

The welds are outside the reinforcement (see 5.7.2.4).

b) The rhroat dimenson of a fllet weld in a slp-on flange does not exceed 16 mm

(5/8 in.), or the butt joint of a

weldng-neck flange does not exceed 19 mm (3/4 in.). lf the material is prehe^ated to a minimum temperature of
90 "C ('2OO "F) dung welding, the weld limits of 16 mm (5/e in.) and 19 mm (3/ in.) may be increased lo 32 mm
and 40 mm (11/4 in. and lr/2 in.), respectvely.

S.?.4.3 When the shell material is Group lV, lVA, V, or Vl. all opening connecons requring reinforcement in a shell

plate or ckened nsert plate more than 13 mm (1iz in.) thck shall be prefabricated into the shell plate or thickened
insen plate, and the prefbricated assembly shall be thermally stress releved withn a temPerature range of 600 "C to
650'C (1100'F to 12OO "F) fort hourper25mm(1 n.) of ckness prior to installation.

When connections are installed in quenched and tempered material, the maximum thermal stress-relieving
temperature shall not exceed the temperng temperature for the materals in the prefabricated stress-relievng

assembly. The stress-releving requiremen do not apply to the weld to the bottom annular plate, but they do apply to
flush-typ cleanot openings when the bottom reinforcng plate is an annular-plate section. The stress-relevng
requirmenS need not include the flange-to-neck welds or other nozzle-neck and manhole-neck attachrnents,
provded the conditons of 5.7.4.2 are fulflled.

API SrANoaRo 650

5,50

Minimum spacing shall be I times the

shell thckness or 1/, the radius of the
openng, whichever is less

of butt-welded

shelljont

o)
!

.9

o
Lrl

Toe of weld

Detal b

Penetration Without Reinforcng Plata

spacing shall be 8 times the

Minmum spacing shall be 8 times the

shell thickness or1/, the radus ofthe
openng, whchever is less

shellthickness

Q.

or

I
>ot.l

t.l
cDl
0l

of butt-welded
shelljont

Toe of weld

E*
:l

.9
E
(!

9t
(,, ql

o
o

st

Toe of weld

t,1

I
Renforcing
Detal d

Detail e

Penetraton Wth Renforcng Plate

Figure 5.9-Minimum Spacing of Welds and Extent of Related Radiographic Examinaton

5-51

WELoEo TaNKs FoR OrL SToRAGE

5.7.4.4

Examnaon after stress relief shall be in accordance wth 7.2.3.6 or 7.2.3.7.

5.7.4.5 When it s mpractical to stfess relieve at a mnimum temperature of 600 "C (110O'F), it s permissble,

subject to the Purchaser's agreement, to carry or.t the stress-releving operation at lower tempeJatures for longer
perods of tme in accordance with the tabulation below. The lower temperature/longer me PWHT may not provde
material toughness and residual sesses equivalent to that using the higher temperaure/shorter time PWHT;
therefore. a ieview by a knowledgeable metallurgst and possble verificaton by mll testng of heat-tfeated coupons
and/or testing of weided plates ihall be consdred. See Line 23 of the Data Sheet for any Purchaser-specified
requrements applicable to this heat-treatment opton.
Mnmum Stress-Relevng TemPerature

("c)

fF)

600

1100

570

'r

050

540

10m

950

10

1,2

20

1,2

510
48O (mn.)

1
NOE 2
NOTE

Holding Time
(hours per 25 mm [1 n.]
of thickness)

9OO

For rtemediate temperatures.

(min.)

See Note

he tirne of heatng shall be determned by sraght line interpolation.

Stress releving at these temperatures s not permtted for A537 class 2 material

5.7.4.6 When used in stress-relieved assemblies, the material of quenched and tempered steels A537, Cl2, and
A678, Grade B, and of TMCP steel A841 shall be represented by test specmens that have been subjected to the
same heat treatment as that used for the stress relieved assembly.

5.7.5 Shell Manholes

(or Table
Shell manholes shall conform to Fgure 5.7a and Figure 5.7b and Table 5.3a through Table 5.5b
of
plates.or
each
segment
permitted by 5.7.1.8. Manhole reinforcing
5.6a through Table 5.8b), but other shapes
(for
detecon
hole
(1/
telltale
in.) diameter
the plates if rhey are not made in one pi:ce shati be provided with a 6 mm
to the
otidaXage ttrrogn the interior welds). Each hole shall be located on the horizontal centerline and shall be open
atmosphere.

5.7.s.1

ie

shall be of buh-up welded constructon. The drnensions are listed in Tables 5.3a throrgh 5.5b. Th
based on the minimm neck thicknesses lisied n Tables 5.4a and 5.4b. When conoson allowance is

5.7.5.2 Manholes

dirnensions are
plate. and
specified to be applied to shell manholes, conosion allowance s to be added to the minimum neck. cover
Table
5.4b.
and
Table
5.4a,
Table
5.3b,
Table
5.3a,
of
bolting flange thicknesses

5.7.5.3 The maximum diameter D, of a shell crrtout shall be as lsted in Column 3 of Table 5.7a and Table 5.7b.
Dmensions for required reinforcing blates are listed in Table 5.6a and Table 5.6b.

5.7.5.4 The gasket materials shall meet servce requrements based on the product stored, maxmum design

temperature, a-nd fre resstance. Gasket dimensons, when used in conjunction with thin-plate flanges described in
Figre 5.7a, have proven efiecve when used with soft gaskeE, such as non-asbestos fiber with suitable bnder.
gasket
W"hen using hard gskets, such as solid metal, corrugated metal, metal-jacketed, and spiral-wound metal, the
dimension manhr-ole flange, and manhole cover shll be designed per API Standard 620, Section 3.20 and Secton
3.21. See 4.9 for additional requrements.

5.7.5.5 ln lieu of usng Figure 5.7a or desgn per API 620, forged flanges and forged blind flanges
per 4.6.

rnay be tumshed

API STANoARo 650

5.7.6

Shell Nozzles and Flanges

5.7.6.1.a Unless otherwse specified, shell nozzle flanges, excluding manholes, in sizes NPS

11/2 through
NPS 20 and NPS 24 shall meet the requrements of ASME 816.5. For sizes larger than NPS 24 but not greater
than NPS 60, flanges shall meet the requirements of ASME 816.47, Seres A or Series B. Series A and Series

B flanges are not compatible n all sizes and must be carefully selected to match the mating flange. lf
diameters, materals of consfuction, and flange styles of ASME 816.47 are unavailable, fabricated flanges with
drillng template (bolt circle dameter, number of holes, and hole dameter) matchng Seres A or Series B shall
be used. These fabrcated flanges shall be designed in accordance with the ASME Boler and Pressure Vessel
Code Secton Vlll, Divison 1, Secton UG-34 and Annex 2. The allowable stresses for desgn shall be a matter
of agreement between the Purchaser and the Manufacturer. Bolt holes shall straddle the venical centerlne of
the flange.

5.7.6.1.b Shell nozzles (and flanges, if specfed by e Purchaser as an alternate to a. above) shall conform to
Figure 5.7b, Figure 5.8, and Fgure 5.10 and Tables 5.6a through 5.8b, bu other shapes are permitted by 5.7.1.8. An
altemative connection design s permissible for the nozzle end that is not welded to the shell, if it provides equivalent

streng, toughness, leak tghtness, and utilty and ifthe Purchaser agrees to its use

1.5 mm
, + 6 mm (1/ in.)

+ 6 mm

(tl

writng.

in.)

____+

_>l

Ring Typ Welding Flang

Slp.on Weldng Flarge

1.5

mm

Wldng-neck FIange

NOTE The

tn designated

for weld thckness

Lap Jont Fange

s

the nomial pipe wall thckness (see Tles 5-6a, s$b, 5-7a, and 5-7b).

Figure 5.10-Shell Nozzle Flanges (see Table 5.8a and Table 5.8b)

5.7.6.2 Unless shell nozzles are specfed to be flush on the insde of the tank shell by the Purchaser, shell nozzles
without ntemal piping in a tank without a floang roof may be supplied flush or with an nternal prqjecon at e option
of the Manufacturer. ln floating roof tanks, shell nozzles withoit intemal piping within operatng range ofe floating
roof shall be supplied flush on the inside of the tank shell unless agreed otherwise between the Manutacturer and the
Purchaser.

WELoED TANKS FOR OIL STORAGE

in ths standard are for nozzles installed th er axes perpendcular

an
angle other than 90 degrees to the shell plate in a horzontal plane,
plate.
nozzle
may
be
installed
at
A
to the shell
(lyor
plate
Do
in Figure 5.8 and Table 5.6a and Table 5.6b) is ncreased by the
of
the
reinfrcing
provided th width
in
cut
the shell plate (Dp in Figure 5.8 and Table 5.7a and Table 5.7b)
chord
of
the
opening
horizontal
mourt that the
ncreases as the openng is changed from crcular to elliptical for the angular installation. ln addtion, nozzles not
larger than NPS 3-for the inserton of thermometer wells, for samPlng connectons, or for other purposes not
invtuing the anachment of extended ppng-may be nstalled at an angle of 15 degrees or less off perpendcular n a
vertical plane without modfcation of the nozzle renforcng plate.

5.7.6.3 The detals and dimensions specified

5.2.6.4 The mnmum nomnal thickness of nozzle necks to be used shall be equal to the required thickness as
identified by the term l, in Table 5.6a and Table 5.6b, Column 3.

5.7.7 Flush-TypeCleanout Fittings

lnings shall confom to the requirernents of 5.7.7.2 throlgh 5.7.7.12 and to the detals and
Figure
5.12
nd Fgure 5.13 and Tables 5.9a through 5.11b. When a size intermediate tothe szes
in
dimensions shown
given n Tables 5.9a thiough S.ttb is ipecified by the Purchaser, the consmldion delals and reinforcernents shall
;onform to the next larger ofening listed n the tables. The size of the opening or tank connection shall not be larger than
the maximum size given n the approFiate table.

5.7.7.1 Flush-type cleano

5.2.7.2 The opening shall be rectangular, but the upper corners of the opening shall have a radius. (r]) as shown in
Table S.ga and'Tablt5.9b. When the:hell material is Group l, ll, lll, or lllA, the widlh or height of the clear opening
shall not exceed l2OOmm (48n.); when the shell materal is Group lV, lVA, V orVl, the heght shall notexceed 900
mm (36 n.).

5.7.7.3 The reinforced opening shall be completely preassembled into a shell plate, and the completed unit,

(regardless of
including the shell plate at the canout fining, shall b thermally stress-releved as described n 5.7.4
the thckness or strength of the material).

5.7.7.4 The required cross-sectional area of e renforcement over the top of the openng shall be calculated for
Desgn Condition as well as Hydrostatic Test Condition as follows:

4,,>iht
K.

where
Acs is

2);
the requred cross-sectional area of the reinforcement over the top of the opening, n mm2 (in

K1

is the area coemcient from Figure 5.11;

the vertical height of clear opening, n mm (n.);

is the calculated thickness ofthe lowest shell colrse, n mm (n.), required by the formulas of 5.6.3, 5.6.4, or
A.4.1 (with joint efiicency E = 1.0), ncludng conosion allowance, where applcable.

in the flush-type cleanout ftting assembly shall be at least as thck

in
lowest shell course. The nominal thickness of the shell renforcing
plate
the
nominal
thickness
as the adjacent shell
plate and the neck plte shall be, as a mnimum, the thickness of the shell plate in the cleanout-opening assembly.

5.7.7.5 The nominal thickness of the shell plate

The reinforcement in the plane of the shell shall be provided within a heght above the bottom of the openng shall
not exceed 1 .5i except that, n the case of srnall openngs, - /, shall not be less than 150 mm (6 n.). Where this
exception results n an that is greater than 1 .5r, only the portion of the reinforcement that is within the height of 1.5

API

STANDARD

650

shall be consdered effectve. The reinforcernent required may be provided by any one or any combination of the
following.

a)

The shell reinforcng plate.

b) Any thckness of the shell plate n the flush-type cleanout ftting assembly that s greater than the requred
thickness of lowest shell course, as determined by 5.6.3, 5.6.4, or A.4.1 (withjont eficiency E = 1 .0).

c)

The ponon of the neck plate having a length equal to the nomnal thickness of the reinforcing plate.

Renforcng area provided shall be adequate for Desgn Conditons as well as Hydrostatic test Conditions.
1.25

Vertical axis in Sl units:

f (H+ 8.8)D + 71.51

1oeh I

i23t

L4.ro (H-

'l05

3il

Vertcal axs n US Customary units:

f lu + zs')o

+tto1[

L 385,,

rz,esor 10.

I lz6D

(H

1))

r'o

"

*.*'o"n,

13

1'4

Figure 5.11-Area Coefficiem for Detemining Minimum Renforcement of Flush-type Cleanout FiEngs

5.7.7.6 The

mnmum widh of the tank-bottom renforcng plate at the centerline of the opening shall be 250 mm (t0
n.) plus the combned nomnal thckness of the shell plate n the cleanout-opening assembly and the shell renforcing

plate.
The nominal thckness of the bonom renforcing plate shall be not less lhan that determned by the following equaon:
ln Sl un[s:

t,=

ffi,ftJ-nc*ce

where

fD

the mnimum thickness of the bottom renforcing date, n mm;

the vertcal he{lht of clear opening, in mm;

the horizontal widh of clear openng, n mm;

WELoED TaNKS FoR

5-55

Ot! SIoRAGE

Nearest horizontal weld

375 mm
Shell plate at clanout frttig =

l5 in.) mn

ld

-I

(See Note 5)
Reinforcing plate =

See Dtil b

see

a
125 mm

ld

(See Note

One telltale 6 mm
(1/. n.)hole in
renforcing
plate at about

mid-height

Shell pate
of lowest
shell

I
I

Flange bollhole

imm
,

_(:T

in.)

Note 1)

,-

-6mm(r

Equalspaces

J A<r

w2 arc dmensios -....................._l

Notch as requred to provide flush joint under shell ring (see Section D-D)

-dfd

tts-w ts,. ---

-7,,l--;-5iii,i;'-

r-.-r

U,L Fur-nret

L-+H-/+-

Section A-A

l0 mm (3/s in')thick
Grind radius on corner
when weld is less lhan

"+.rMffie ;/ry\,ii1l*.,*,,,

td

to-v\
\

tOl.* -

5mm

(3/ro

Secton B.B

in.)

Cover plate

Detala
75 mm (3 in.) radus
90 degrees

125 mm (5 in )

30 degrees

---l

--__t
mm (1l/a in.) mn

(See
Note 1)

Section D-D

t+ fd+ 250 mm (10 i

(see Note

Section

fs m f/.

andgnnd/
/(See

t"

Note 5)

Neck bevel shall be

approxmately 1 0 degrees

Cc

Fgure 5.12-Flush-Type Cleanout Fttngs (see Tables 5.9a, 5'9b, 5.10a, 5.10b, 5.1'la, and 5.11b)

API

5-56

<-

Cover plate
Botlom reinforcing plle

l,Y

STANDARD

650

+ 900 mm (36 .) min

lnsde of shell at
centerline of openng

(ses Tables $9a

and +9b for Wvalues)
Weld after

fng

nstalled

(See
Oetail a)

mm (1/ n.) mn (see Note 1)

lnside of shell

600 mm (24 in.) min

snettptate

600 mm (24 in.) mn

Method A-Tank Restng On Earth Grade (see Note 2)

<-

Cover plale
lnside of shell at
centerline of opeing

lry+ 900 mm (36 in.) min

(see Tables Sga
and 5-9b for Wvalues)

+
300 mm

100-300 mm (4-12 in.)

(See
Detai

lnsire of shell
600 mm (24 in.) mn
rm (24 n.) mn

C-","f"

o,

r""*ry /

Method B-lak Resting On Earth Grade (see Note 3)

Cover plate

Nolch to suit bottom reinforcing plate

Bottom

lnside of shell
at centerline
of opeing

300 mm
12 n I min

j
c and d) ..---l-

(See

lnside of shel
at centerine

ofopening

300 mm (12 n.) mn

Detala

Detail d

Detailc

lnsde ol shell

t/+

300 mm ('12 in.) min, except as lmited

by foundaton cuNature in Detald
(see Tables tga and tgb ior Wvalues)

Method C-Tank Restng On Concrete Ringwall (soe Note 3)

Notch to sut botlom rnforcing plte
lnside of shell at
centerlie of openng
300 mm (12 in.) min

plate

Altemalive
nolcfi detail
(See
Detail

300 mm

(12 n.)mn

100-300 mm (4-12 n.)

lndg of shell
Retainng wall
Constructo jont, to permil
tak and retainiO wll to
sele indepedeny
om rigwall

Rngwall notch
Rngwall

Detail e

Mthod O-Tak Rsting On Earth Grade lsido

ConcretG RngYall (see Note 3)

Figure 5.13-Flush-type Cleanout Fming Supports (see 5.7.7)

WELoED TaNKs FoR OtL SToRAGE

i/

is the maxmum design liquid level (see 5.6.3.2), in m;

5,57

the specific gravity, not less than 1.0.

ln USC units:

,,=

ffi*fttr"*ro

where

fD

is the minimum thickness of the bottom reinforcing plate, n inches;

is the vertical height of clear openng, in nches;

is the horizontal wdth of clear opening, in nches;

is the maxmum desgn liqud level (see 5.6.3.2), n feet;

is the specific gravity, not less than 1.0.

5.7.7.2 The dimensons of e cover plate,

bohing flarEe, bolting, and boom-reinforcng plate shall conform to Table

5.9a, Table 5.9b, Table 5.10a and Tabie 5.10b. When conosion allowance s specified, it s to be added to the cover
plate, bolting flange thicknesses, and bottom-reinforcing Plate.
n the flush-type cleanout fitting assembly shall confom to the requirements in Section 4. The
cleanout assembly, the shell reinforcng plate, the neck plate, and the bottom reinforcing
plate
the
containing
shell
pbte lnatt meet thiimpact test requremets of 4.2.9 and Fgure 4.1 for the respecve thickness involved at e
besign metal temperatuie for e tank. The notch toughness of the bolting flange and the coverllate shall be based
on te governing thckness as defned n 4.5.5.3 using Table 4.3a, Table 4.3b, and Fgure 4.1. Additonally, the yield
strengt and thjtensile sength of the shell plate at the flush-type cleanout ffting, the shell reinforcing plate, and the
greater than, tne yietO strength and the tensile strength of the adjacent lowest shell
necf'ptate shall be equal to,
course plate material.

5.7.2.g All rnaterials

5.2.7.9 The dmensions and details of the cleanout-opening assemblies covered by ths section are based on
intemal hydrostatic loading wth no external-pipng loadng.
frnng s installed on a tank that s resting on an earth grade without concrete or
a flush-type
-tankcleanout
shell, provision shall be made to suppon the fning and retan the grade by ether of the
masonry walls under the
following methods:

5.2.7.10 When

a)

lnstall a vertical steel bulkhead plate under the tank, along the contour of the tank shell, symmetrical with the
opening, as shown n Figure 5.13, Method A.

b)

lnstall a concrete or mlsonry retaining wall under the tank with the wall's outer face conforming to the contour of
the tank shell as shown in Figure 5.13, Method B.

5.7.7.11 When a flush-type cleano fing s nstalled on a tank that s resting on a rngwall, a notch with the
dmensons shown in Figure 5.13, Method C, shall be provded to accommodate the cleano ffting.
a flush-type cleanout fning s nstalled on a tank that is resng on an earth grade nside a foundation
retaining wall, a notch shll be provided in the retaining wall to accommodate the fitting, and a supplementary insde
retanin wall shall be provided to support the fittng and retain e grade. The dimensons shall be as shown in Figure
5.13, Method D.

5.7.7.12 When

API

5.7.8

STANDARo

650

Flush-Type Shell Connectons

5.7.8.1 Tanks may have flush-type connections at the lower edge of the shell. Each connection may be made flush
wth the flat bottom under the following condtons (see Figure 5.14).

a)

The shell uplft from the nternal design and test pressures (see Annex F) and wnd and earthquake loads (see
Annex E) shall be counteracted so that no upft wll occur at the cylindrcal-sheluflat-bottomjunction.

b)

The vertical or meridional membrane stress n the cylindrical shell at the top of the opening for the flush-type
connecton shall not exceed one-tenth of the circumferental design stress in the lowest shell course contaning the
openng.

c)

The maximum width, of the flush-type connection opening n the cylndrical shell shall not exceed 90O mm (36
in.).

d)

The maxmum height,

e) The

1,,

of the openng in the cylindrcal shellshall not exceed 300 mm (12 in.).

thckness, fa of the bottom-ansition plate in

assembly shall be 13 mm (Uz in.) minmum or, when

specmed, the same as the thickness of the tank annular plate.

5.7.8.2 The details of the connecton shall conform to those shown in Figure 5.14, and the dimensons of the
connecton shallconform to Table 5.12a and Table 5.12b and to the requirements of 5.7.8.3 through 5.7.8.11.

Table 5.12a-Dimensions for Flush-Type Shell Connectons (Sl)

Dmensions in mllimeters

of Opening

Lower Comer
Radius of Shell
Renforcing Plate

200

9s0

OD of 8 NPSa

350

300

300

1300

OD of 12 NPSa

450

300

500

1600

'150

450

550

'r650

150

450

150

450

150

450

Class l50
Nomnal Height
of Flange Sze

Height of
Openn9

Opening
b

200

't2
16
18

300

Arc wdth of shell

Renforcing Plate

20

300

625

-t725

24

300

900

2225

For circtta openings, this value

NOTE

widrh of

wii

be 1/2

ol the ID based on

e noze

Upper Comer
Radus

f2

neck specifed.

See Figure 5.14.

5.7.8.3 The reinforced connecton shall be completely preassembled into a shell plate. The completed assembly,
including the shell plate containing the connecton, shall be thermally stress-relieved at a temperature of 600 'C to
650'C (1100'F to 1200 "F) for t hour per 25 mm (1 in.) of shell-plate thickness, d (see 5.7.4.1 and 5.7.4.2).
5.7.8.4 The reinforcement for

a)

The cross-sectonal area of

a flush{ype shell connecton shall meet the followng requirements:

reinforcernent over the top of the connecton shall not be less than 1(rl2 (see

5.7.7.41.

b) Ttle nomnal

thckness of the shell plate, rd for tlle flush-connection assembly shall be at least as thick as the
aqjacent shell plate nomnal thickness, in the lowest shell course.

c)

The nomnal thickness of the shell reinforcing plate shall be, as a minmum, the nomnal ickness of the shell
plate n the flush-conneclon assembly.

5-59

WELDED fANxs FoR OrL SToR GE

Table 5.12b--Dmensons for Flush-TyPe Shell Connections (USC)

Dimensions in inches

Upper Comer

Lor .er Comer

Opening

Wdth of
Openng

Renforcing Plate

Radius
of Opening
1

Radius of shell
Reinforcing Plate
f2

4a

14

Height of

Class 150
Nominal Height
of Flange Size

Arc Width of shell

8s/8

85/B

38

12

123t4

12311

52

4a

'18

'16

12

20

64

18

18

12

22

66

1B

20

12

25

69

18

89

1B

12

24

@D
NOTE

36

based on the nozzle neck specied.

See Figure 5.14.

The reinforcement in rhe plane of e shell shall be provided win a height above the bottom of the opening.
shall not exceed 1.51 except that, n the case of small openngs, - shall not be less than 150 mm (6 n.). Where
ths exception results in an that s greater than 1 .5r, only the portion of the reinforcement that is within the height
of 1 .5, shall be considered effective.

e)

The required renforcement may be provded by any one or any combnation of the followng:

1) the shell renforcng plate;

2) any thckness of the shell plate in the flush-type shell conneclion assembly at is greater_than the required
thikness of lowest shell course, as determined by 5.6.3, 5.6.4, or A.4.1 (with joint eflcency E = 1.0); and
3) the porton of the neck plate having a length equal to the ickness of the renforcng plate.
Renforcing area provded shall be adequate for Desgn Conditions as well as Hydrostatic Test Conditions.

f)

The width of e tank-bottom reinforcing plate at the centerline of the opening shall be 250 mm (10 in.) plus the
combined nominal thickness of e shell plate in the flush-connection assembly and the shell reinforcng plate.
The thckness of the bottom reinforcing plate shall be calculated by the following equaon (see 5.7.7.6):

ln Sl units:

t,=

ffitl^J-nc.cn

where

is

is the vertcal height of clear opening, in mm;

11

is the maxmum desgn lquid level (see 5.6.3.2), n m;

is the specific aravity, not less than 1.0.

mnmum thckness of the bottom renforcng plate, in mm;

is the horzontal width of clear opening, in mm;

5,60

API

STANoARD

650

c
Shel plate n
flush connec'tion =

Shell plate

of

Centerline of connecon

Reinforcing plate =

t'

150 mm (6 in.)mn

/
L

,3

/
One 6 mm (1/a") telltale
hole in reinforcing plate
at about mid,height

f, = 16 mm

(5/s in.) min

<_
l<+f..-------------.
'150 mm' 300 mm
(6

in.) min

tl1 -

:f

a,

Fullpeetration

r,15

"r"^

fd

See Section C-C

(Figure
contnu6d)

lowest shell

couBe

-<-.1

in.)min

(12

1..-------' ,/

in.)min

bl2------>-

yylz arc otmengons

Bottom renforcng plate

Notch as required to provide

flush joint

(t

Qii;----- I

All jonts approximately

Plale

90 degrees

/.//"Botlon

Full-fillet weld

Bottom lrensition
plate for rhinimum
arc dimension of
Il + 1500 mm (60 n.)

\,-----------75 mm=_\

a.-:^)
tJ.....- o J
Bottom reinforcig

Secton

phte

B-B

125 mrr (5 in )

2tr+ 25n mm ('10 in.)

_t

7----.--..._
,/

Bu-wld
Nozzle transition io
cirdrarflange

(56 Note 2)

Butt-weld

Centeline
of conneclon

Figure 5.14-Flush-type Shell Connecton

Section A-A

VlELoEo TANrc FoR OIL oRAGE

,(

5-61

Rornd comer
when td> 40 mm (1r/, n.)

_ r,z___a

,iV

() mm [1rl, n.l max)

Full-penetraon weld

t,

-",*['ri

Botlom

Boltom

reinforcng
plate d

(See Note 2)

fansition
plate t,

Round corner

= 16 mm

(5/s n.) mn

Nozzle transition

Ceniele of
_ nozl fange nd
shell openng

2td + 250 mm (10

Bottom plate
.= 13 mm (r/, n.) mn

Aftemtive
butt-weld detal

Botlorh
transiton
plate t

Notol)4

(j-

tl.ngo

p,

tabes $8a and +8b

Typcal Detal for Conneclions wth b = h

125 mm

ts{5

bt2

in.ri

Round.

Back chip
ad weld

wnen tr=
rfm (11/, in.)

Eottom
renforcng
plate t

a
l,l0

'Ifn

mi\

(1/. .) mn

32 mm
('1lla n.) mn

Full-penetalon
weld

tov

(Soe Note 2)
= 16

< 30"

mm(%h.)mn
Round corner

Noze transtion

Centerline
of nole
nange

(see 5.7.8.4, ltem g)

2d

+ 250 mm (10 n.)

Bottom plate

Nozle neck
(see 5.7.8.4,
Item g)

'r,

Flanges perfables

$8a and S8b

Typcl Detail for Coneclions with > ,,

Sectlon

C4

Note 1: Flange weld szes shall be the smaller of the avalable hub materialfor rr.
Note 2: Thickness of thnner plate joned 13 mm (1/2 in.) maxmum.

Fgure 5.1t-Flush-type Shsll Gonnection (Contnuod)

5-61

WELDED TANKS FoR OtL SToRAGE

t"s

Full-penetration weld

l"

Bottom

Bottom
transtion

renforcng

(See Note 2)

plate

plate

a,

Round @rner

t, = 16 mm

(s/s n.) min

Centerline of
nozzle lange and
shell openng

Nozzle transition

2d

+ 250 mm (10

\
Bottom plate

t"=

13 mm (r/, in.) mn

Altemative
butt-weld detail

Bottom
transion
plate t,

(ee Note 1) 4
Flanges per Tables S10a and 5-'l0b
Typcal Detal for Connections with b = h
125 mm

F(s

b12

in.f>l

Roundmm (1'/, in.)

Back chip
and weld

Bottom

F0 rm (11/, h.)

reinforcing
plate tb

(See Note 2)

< 30"

= 16 mm (5/ in.)min

Round corr

Nozzle transition
(see 5.7.8.4, ltem g)

of noze

flange

Bottom plte

2td + 250 mm (10 n.)

Nozzle neck
(see 5.7.8.4,
Item g)

(1/. n.) min

32 mrn
(1rl in.) mn

Full-penetration
weld

Centelne

/'6mm

1
tn

Flanges per Tables 5-8a and 5-8b

Typicl Detail for Connecos wth b > h

Soction

Cc

Note 1: Flange weld szes shall be the smaller of the avalable hub materal for
Note 2: Thckness of thinner plate joned 13 mm (1/2 n.) maxmum.

Fgure 5.14-Flush-type Shell Connection (Continued)

API

5,62

STANoARD

650

ln USC unE:

aza-

r= rfu-fiJuc.ce
where

Il
G

the minmum thickness of the bottom reinforcng plate, in inches;

is the venical height of clear opening, in nches;

is the horzontalwdth of clear opening, n inches;
is the rnaxrrum desgn lqud level (see 5.6.3.2), in feet;
is the specific gravity, not less than 1.0.

Ttrc minimum value of rshall be:

16 mm (5/8 in.) for HG< 14.4 m (48 ft)
17 mm (11/ro in.) for 14.4 m (48 ft) <

flG< 16.8 m

(56 ft)

19 mm (3/a in.) for 16.8 m (56 ft) < t1G < 19.2 m (64 ft)

g)

The conoded thickness of the noze neck and transition piece, , shall be not less than 16 mm (5/8 in.). Extemal
loads appled to the connecton may requre rto be greater than 16 mm (5/e in.).

5.7.8.5 All materials

the flush-type shell connection assembly shall conform to the requirements in Section 4. The
n the connection assembly, the shell reinforcing plate, the nozzle neck anached to the shell,
the transiton pece, and the bottom renforcng plate shall conform to 4.2.9 and Fgure 4.1 for the respeciive thickness
nvolved at the design metal temprature for the tank. The notch toughness of the bohing flange and the nozzle neck
attached to the bolting flange shall be based on the goveming thickness as defined n 4.5.5.3 and used in Figure 4.1.
Additonally, the yeld streng and the tensle strength of the shell plate at the flush-type shell connection and e
slrcll reinforcing plate shall be equal to, or greater than, the yield strength and the tensle sength of the adjacent
lowest shell course plate material.
n

materialof the shell plate

5.7.8.6 The nozzle transition between the flush connection

in the shell and the crcular pipe flange shall be desgned

in a manner consstent wth the requirements of ths standard. Where ths sl,andard does not cover all deiails of design
and construction, the Manufacturer shall provide details of design and construction that ll be as safe as the detals
provided by this standard.
F to resist shell uplift, the devices shall be
spaced so that they wll be located mmediately adjacent to each side of the renforcng plates around the opening.

5.7.8.7 Where anchoring devces are requred by Annex E and Annex

5,7.8.8 Adequate provision shall be made for free movement of connected pping to minimize thrusts and momenE
appled to the shell connecon. Allowance shall be made for the rotation of the shell connection caused by the
restrant of the tank bottom-to-shell expansion from stress and temperature as well as for the thermal and elastc
movernent of the piping. Rotation of the shell connection is shown in Figure 5.15.
n the area of a flush-type connecton shall be prepared to support the bottom reinforcing
plate of the connection. The foundaton for a tank restng on a concrete ringwall shall prode uniform suppon for both
the bottom reinforcng plate and the remainng bottom plate under the tank shell. Dtrerent methods of supponing the
bottom reinforcing pate under a flush-type conneclon are shown n Fgure 5.13.

5.7.8.9 The foundation

API

Sr

ND^RD 650

ln USC units:

h2h.

,. = L+L
t|-O + C,t
'u
l,ooo' to''
3

where

the mnimum thickness of the bottom renforcng plate, n ncfies;

is

the vertical heght of dear opening, n nches;

the horizontal dth of dear opening, in nches;

11

the maximum desgn lqud level (see 5.6.3.2),

is the specmc gravity, not less than 1.0.

feet;

The minimum value of l shall be:

16 mm (5/8 n.) for
'f

7 mm

(11116

n.)

/c < i4.4

m (48 )

for't4.4 m (48 ft)

19 mm (si4 n.) for '16.8 m (56 fr) <

g)

< HG < 16.8 m (56 )

ic

< 19.2 m (64 )

The mnoded thckness of the nozzle neck and transiton pece, ,,, shall be not less than 16 mm (5/8 n.). Extemal
loads appled to the connecfion may require ,, to be greater than tO mm (5/8 n.).

5.7.8.5 All materials in the flush-type shell connedion assembly shall conform to the requirements in Sec{on 4. The
material ofthe shell plate n the conneclion assembly, the shell renforcng plate, the nozzle neck attached to the shell,
lhe transton pece, and the bottom renforcng plate shall confom to 4.2.9 and Fgure 4.1 for the respeclive thickness
nvolved at the desgn metal temperature for the tank. The notch toughness of the bolting fange and the nozzle neck
attached to the boltng flange shall be based on the goveming thckness as defned in 4.5.5.3 and used n Fgure 4.1.
Addtionally, the yeld strength and the tensle strength of the shell plate at the flush-type shell conneclon and the
shell reinforcing plate shall be equal to, or greater than, the yeld strength and the tensile strength of the adiacent
lowest shell course plate material.

5.7.8.6 The nozzle transion between the flush conneclion

in th shelland the crcular pipe f,ange shall be designed

with the requirements of ths standard. Vvhere ths standard does not cover all detals of desgn
and constucton, the Manufac{urer shall provide detals of design ad construc-tion that r rll be as safe as the detals
provided by ths standard.
n a manner @nsstent

5.7.8.7 Vvhere anchoring devices are requrd by Annex E and Annex F to resisl shell uplft, the devices shall be
spaced so that they will be located immedately adjacent to each side of the renforcng plates around the openng.

5.7'8.8 Adequate provision shall be made

for free movement of connected piping to mnimze thrusts and momenb

applied to the shell conneclon. Allowance shall be made for the rotaton of the shell @nnec{on caused by the
restrant of the tank bottom-to-shell expansion from stress and temperature as well as for the thermal and elaslic
movement ofthe ppng. Rotation ofthe shell connecton is shown in Fgure S.1S.

5.7.8.9 The foundaton

i _

n lhe area of a llush-type conneclon shall be prepared to support the bottom renforcing
plate of the conneclon. The foundaton for a tank resng on a conqete ringwall shall prode unifom
support for both
lhe bottom reinforcng plate and the remanng boftom plata under the tank shell. Dfferent methods of supporting the
bottom renforcing plate under a flush-type conneclion are shown n Fgure 5.13.

5-63

WELDED TANxs FoR OtL SToRAGE

lnitial shell radius = R

Shell

radius=R+AR

Height of bendng
varies with
tank radus and
thickness

n shell

\_->

lnitial cnterline
of connection
Anole of
rolaon

Reinforcing plate
Centerline of
connection after
elastic movement
of shell
75 mm (3 in.) min
Details A and B)

lnside diameter of shell

Notch to suit bottom reinforcing plate
lnside of shell at
centerline ofopening

try+ 300 mm (12 n.) min,

except as limted by
curvature of foundaton
(see Detail B)

Detal A

Detail B

Oetails of Notch in Ringwall

Fgure 5.1s-Rotation of Shell Connection

5,7.8.10 Flush-type connecons may be

nstalled using a common reinforcing pad; however, when this construction

is employed, the minimum distance between nozzle centerlines shall not be less than 1.51b1 + b + 65 mm (21lz in.)],
where 4 and bz are lhe widths of adjacent openings, or 600 mm (24 an.), whichever is greater. The wdth of each
opening, . shall be obtaned from Table 5.12a and Table 5.12b for the respective nominal flange size. Adjacent shell
flush-type connectons that do not share a common reinforcng plate shall have at least a 900 mm (36 n.) clearance
between the ends of their reinforcng plates.

5.7.8.11 All longitudnal hrtt-welds in the nozzle neck and transition pece, if any, and the frst circumferential buttweld in the neck closest to the shell, excluding neck{o-flange weld, shall receve 100 o/o radographic examination
(see 8.1). The nozzle-to-tank-shell and reinforcing plate welds and the shell-to-bottom renforcing plate welds shall be
examned for ther complete length by magnetc particle examnation (see 8.2). The magnetic partcle examnation
shall be peformed on the root pass, on every '13 mm (1/2 n.) of deposted weld meial whle the welds are made, and
on e completed welds. The completed welds shall also be visually examined. The examinaon of the completed
welds shall be performed after stress-relieving but before hydrostatic tesfng (see 8.2 and 8.5 for the approprate
inspection and repar criteria).

API

5.8

STANDARD

650

Shell Attachments and Tank ApPurtenances

5.8.1 ShellAttachments
5.8.1.1 St|ell anachments shall be made, inspected, and removed

a)

in conformance with section 7.

pennanent attachments are items welded to the shell at wll rernan while e tank s n its intended srvice.
These nclude items such as wnd girders, stars, gaugng systems, davits, walkwa)ls, tank anchors, supports for
intemal items such as heating cols and other Opng suppor6, ladders, floatng roof supports welded to the shell,
exterior pipng supports, grounding clips, nsulation rngs, and electrical conduit and fixtJres. ltems installed above
the maxmum lquid level of the tank are not permanent attachments.

b)'

Temporary attachments are items welded to the shell that wll be removed prior to the tank being commssoned
into its niended servce. fhese inctude items such as algnment clips, fming equipment, stablzers, and lifting
lugs.

S.g.1.2 When attachments are made to shell courses of materal in Group lV, lVA, V, or Vl, the movement of the
shell (partcularly the movement of the bottom co-rrse) under hydrostatc loadng shall be consdered, and the
attachments shall meet the followng requirements:

a)

permanent attachments may be welded drectly to the shell wth fillet welds having a maximuln leg dmension of
13 mm (1/z in.). The edge oi any permanent anachment welds shall be at least 75 mm (3 in.) from the horizontal
joints of the sell and ai lmst Sb mm (6 in.) from the vertcaljonts, nsert-plate jonts, or reinforcng-plate fillet
-welds.
permanent attachment welds may cross shell horizontal or vertical butt welds providing the welds are
contnuous within these limits and tfre angte of incdence between the two welds s greater than or equal to 45
(6 n.)
degrees. Additionally, any splice weld in the permanent anachment shall be located a minimum of 150 mm
to
rnodmcaons
acceptable
froit any shell weld unls ihe splice weld is kept from intersectjng the shell weld by
the attachrnent.

b)

The welding and nspection of permanent attachrnents to these shell courses shall conform to 7.2.3.5.

c)'

Temporary attachments to slEll courses shall preferably be made pror to weldng of the shelljoints. Weld spacing
for tmpoiary anachments made after welding of the shelljonts shall be the same as that requred for permanent
attach;En. Temporary attachments to shell courses shall be removed, and any resuhing damage shall be
repared and ground to a smooth profile.

5,8.2 Bottom Connections

connecons to the tank bottom are permtted subject to agreement between the Purchasef and the Manufacturer
in
wth respect to detals that provide strength, tghmess, and lity equal to the details of shell connections specfed
this standard.

5.8.3 Cover Plates

Unreinforced openings less than or equal to NPS 2 pipe sze are pemissible in flat_cover plates without
plate than
increasng the cover plaie thic-kness it the edgea of the openngs are not closer to the center of the cover
at
do not
ald
smller
sizg
N!!
for
openngs
Requirements
qtpe
the
opening.
of
one-fourt re heightbr diameter
?
5.8.3.4.
through
given
in
5.8.3.2
are
reinforced
openings
fof
larger
and
requrement
the
locatio
safsfy

5.8.3.1

Renforced openings in the cover plates of shell manholes and flush-type clean outs shall be limited to onehalf the diameter of the manhole or one-hfi the least dimension of the flush-type clean out openng but shall not
an increased
exceed NPS 12 pipe sze. The renforcement added to an oPenng may be a f9lnforclng plate or
no less than
area
reinforcng
provide
an
added
shall
reinforcement
case,
the
plate,
in
either
but
thickness of the cver
plate.
n
the
cover
the
opening
the cutout area of

5.8.3.2

WELDED TANKS FoR OrL SToRAGE

A cover plate with a nozzle attachrnent for product-mxng equpment shall have a thickness at least 1.4 times greater

an the thickness required by Table 5.3a and Table 5.3b. The added thickness (or pad plate) for replacement of the
openng cutout n the cover plate shall be based on Table 5.3a and Table 5.3b. The 40 % increase in thckness within
a radius of one dameter of the openng may be included as part of the area of replacement required. The mxernozzle attachment to the cover plate shall be a full-penetraton weld. The manhole bohing-flange thckness shall not
be less than'1.4 tirnes the thickness required by Table 5.3a and Table 5.3b. The manhole nozzle neck shall be
desgned to support the mixer forces wth a minimum thickness not less than the requirements of Table 5.4a and
Table 5.4b without comparson to the increased bolting-flange thckness noted n this section.

5.8.3.3 When cover plates (or blind flanges) are required for shell nozzles, the minimum thickness shall be that
given for flanges n Table 5.8a and Table 5.8b. Reinforced openings in the cover plates (or blind flanges) of shell
nozzles shall be limited to one-ha[f the diameter of the nozzle. The reinforcement added to an opening may be an
added pad plate or an increased thckness of the cover plate, but n either case, the reinforcement shall provde an
added reinforcing area no less than 50 o of the cutout area of the openng n the cover plate. Mixer nozzles may be
attached to cover plates.
5.8.3.4 Openings

in the cover plates of Rush-type cleanout fittings shall be located on the vertcal centerline of the

cover plate and shall be n accordance wth 5.8.3,1 and 5.8.3.2. Adequate provisons should be made for free
movement of connected pping to minimize thrusts and moments on the cover plate to 2225 N (500 lbs) and 60 N-m
(50O ft-lbs). Analysis or load leak test may be used to accept greater loads or moments.

5.8.3.5 Shell manhole covers shall have two handles. Those covers weighing more than 34 kg (75 lb) shall be
equipped with ether a hinge or davit to faciliiate the handlng of the manhole cover plate. The davt support arm shall
not be welded directly to the shell without a reinforcing plate.

5.8.4

Roof Manholes

Roof manholes shallconform to Figure 5.16 and Table 5.13a and Table 5.13b. The effects of loads (other than normal
personnel access) applied at the roof manhole and supporting roof structure shall be considered. Examples of such
loads may nclude fall protecton anchorage, hostng, or personnel retreval. The roof structure and plate around the
manhole shall be reinforced as necessary.

5.8.5

Roof Venting

5.8.5.1 Tanks desgned in accordance with this standard and having a fxed roof shall be vented for both normal
condions (resultjng from operatonal requremenB, ncluding maxmum flling and emptying rates, and anospheric
temperature changes) and emergency conditions (resutting from exposure to an e)dernal fire). Tanks with both a fxed
roof and a floatng roof satsfy these requirements when they comply wth the circulation venting requirements of
Annex H. All other tanks designed in accordance with this standard and havng a fxed roof shall meet the venting
requirements of 5.8.5,2 and 5.8.5.3.
5.8.5.2 Normal venting shall be adequate to prevent internal or extemal pressure from exceeding the conesponding
tank design pressures and shall meet e requiremenE specifed in API 2000 for normal venting.
5.8.5.3 Ernergency veming requrernents are satisfied if the tank is equipped with a weak roof-to-shell attiachment
(iangible joint) in accordance with 5.10.2.6, or if the tank is equpped with pressure relief devices meeng the
requrernents specFred n API 2000 for ernergerrcy venng. When pressure rdef devices are used to sasly the
ernergency venting requrernenb, they shall acheve the flow rates specmed in API 2m0 without exceedng the following
limits on intemal pressure.

a)

For unanchored tanks, the pressure relef devices shall be adequate to prevent ntemal pressure from exceedng
pressure as determined n F.4.1 (subject to the lmitatons in F.4.2 and F.4.3, as applcable). ln
calculating lmitations per F.4.2, use M= 0.

e tank design

API STANoARo 650

5-66

Table 5.13a-Dimensons

fol Roof Manholes

(Sl)
Dimensons in millmeters

Column

Size

of

Manhole

Column 2

Dameter
of Neck

ID

Column 3

Column 4

Diameter
of Cover

Diameter

Plate
D

Crcle
Dp

of Bolt

Column 5

Number
of Bolts

500

500

660

597

16

600

600

162

699

20

ppe may be used for neck,

trovidrE

NOTE

See

Folfe

Column 6

Column

Column 8

Column 9

Diameter of
Hole n Roof
Plate or
Reinforcng

Diarneter of

Gasket
lnside Outsde
660
s00

Diameier of

_-..........i-Plate

762

600

Outside
Reinforcng
Plate

Dp

Dp
524

1050

625

1150

mnmum nomnal wall hc*ness is 6 mm (/D and Dp shall be adjusted accordirEly.)

5,18.

Table 5.13b--Dmensions for Roof Manholes (USC)

Dmensons in inches

Column

Column 2

Size of

Daameter

Manhole

Column 4

Dameter

Diameter

of Cover

of Bolt

Plate

Crcle

Ds

Column 5

Number
of Bolts

Column 6

Column 7

Column 8

lnsde

Outside

Dameter of
Hole n Roof
Plate or
Renforcn9
Plate
Dp

Diameter of Gasket

Column

outside

Dp

20

26

23112

16

20

26

2o5lB

42

24

24

30

27112

20

24

30

24518

46

Ppe may be used for nec*, providrE

fie

minmum nomnal !!all lhckress is 1/. in. (lDand

,/

Dameter of
Renforcng
Plate

20

NOTE

b)

of Neck

Column 3

shallbe adjused acco.dingly.)

See Figure 5.18.

For anchored tanks, except those designed to F.1.3, the pressure relief devices shall be adequate to prevent
intemal pressure from exceeding the tank design pressure as determined n F.4.1 (subject to the limitaons n
F.4.3, as applcable).

c)

For tanks designed to F.1,3 (anchored ianks), the pressure relief devices shall be adequate to prevent internal
pressure from exceeding the design pressure specified by the Purchaser.

S.8.S.4 The fillng and emptyng rates are specified on the Data Sheet, Line 7. See the Data Sheet, Table 3 for
venting devices, whch shall be specifed by the Purchaser and verifed by the Manufacturer.
brd screens of a maximum opening
snow drifting or icng may be an
in
areas
where
that
sze of (19 mm [3/4 n.l nominal openng). lt s recomrnended
(iuch
or ncreased screen sze)
profile,
capacty,
alrangemert,
dameter,
as
to
vent
detals
ssue, special attenon
based on ancpated
requirements
modmed
ventng
shall
specry
the
Purchaser
situatons
made.
ln
these
should be
needs for a specfc environment. The smallest dimension of the openng in any mesh used for bird screen is the

5.8.5.5 All free vents shall be provided wth conosion-resstant coarse-mesh

governing size for the openng.

Flanged roof nozzles shall conform to Figure 5.19 and Table 5.'l4a and Table 5.14b. Slp-on nanges and
weld neck flages shall conform to e requiremenb of ASME 816.5 for Class 150 plate-ring flanges shall conform to

5.8.5.6

5,67

wELDEo TANKS FoR OrL SToMGE

16-mm (s/s-in.) diameter bolts i 20-mm (3 n.)

diameter holes (see Table 5-13a and fable $13t
for urfiber of bolts; bolt hols shall straddle

,somm(6in.)
+

t_

r-----i-----r-----| 0,,

-,".
in.)
tl -:-::Y
.
ptate

1'tl in.

150 mm (6

--- r-

,/t

16 mm (5/s in.)
diamter rod

Alternative Flage Detail

1.5 mm (1/16 in.)
thck gasket

Reinforcing plate

=>

in.) I
I

|f

6 mm (1/.

------n

6 mm (1/.

in.)

:
I

Axis alwavs

vlrcl

|
I

, --------------+]

Section A-A-Roof Manhole Wth Renforcng Plate

Altemave Neck-toRoof-Plate Jont

Base For Rool lanhole Wthout Reforcing Plate

Fgure 5.16-Roof Manholes (see Table 5.13a and Table 5.13b)

API

STANoARD

650

all of the dimensional requrements for slp-on weldng flanges with the excepon that t is acceptable to omit the
e)ended hub on the back of the slp-on or weld neck flanges. Raised face flanges shall be provided for nozzles with
attached pping. Flal face flanges shall be provided for roof nozzles used for the mountng of tank accessories.

5.8.5.7 Threaded roof nozzles shall confotm to Fgure 5.20and Table 5.15a andTableS.l5b.

5.8.6

Rectangular Roof Openings

Rectangular roof openngs shall conform to Figure 5.17 and Figure 5.18 and/or this section. The effects of
loads (other than normal personnel access) appled at the roof opening and supporting roof structure shall be

5.8.6.1

consdered. Examples of such loads may include fall protection anchorage, hoistng, or personnel retrieval. The roof
structure and plate around the opening shall be reinforced as necessary.
Table 5.14a-Dmensions for Flanged Roof Nozzles (Sl)
Dmensons in mllmeters

Column 3

Column 4

Column 5

Nozzle

outside Diameter

NPS

of Pipe Neck

Dameter of Hole n Roof

Plate or Renforcng Plate
Dp

Mnmum Height
of Nozzle

outsde Diameter of
Reinforcing Plat

Hn

Dp

1112

48.3

50

't50

125

60.3

65

150

115

88.9

92

150

225

114.3

120

150

215

168.3

170

150

375

219-1

225

'150

450

10

213.O

280

200

550

12

323.8

330

200

600

Column 2

Column

Reinforcing plates are not required on nozzles NPS 6 or snaller but rnay be used if desifed'

NOfE

Se

Fg[e 5.19.

5.8.6.2 The cover plate thickness and/or structural support shall be designed to lmit maxmum fiber stresses in
accordance with ths standard, however, cover plate thickness shall not be less than 5 mm (r/lo in.). ln addition to

other expected design loads, consider a 112 kg (250 lb) person standing in the center of the installed/closed cover.
The designer shall cnsider wind in the design of ninged openings and how rernoved covers wll be handled without
damage (adequate rigidity).

5.8.6.3 Rectangular openngs, other than shown in Figure 5.17 and Fgure 5.18, alg 9p9nngs larg:r.than indcated
inati Oe Oesignel ny n en-gineer experienced n tak design in accordance wth this standard. Hinqed coves
prescrH in igure .t a mafnot oe uied on roofs designed t contain internal Pressure. Flanged covers prescribed
in Figure s.t7 ay not be u;ed on tanks with internal pressures (acting acros e.cross seconal area of the tank
roo-that exceed tie weight of the roof plates. This section apples only to fixed steel roofs.

wEroEo TAN(S FoR OrL

s-69

SToRAGE

Table 5.14b--Dmensions for Flanged Roof Nozzles (USC)

Dmensons in nches

Column

Column 4

Column 5
Outsde Dameter of

NPS

outsde Dameter
of PiPe Neck

Diamter of Hole n Roof

Plate or Renforcng Plate
Dp

Mnimum Height
of Nozzle

Hp

Renforcing Platea
Dp

1112

'r.900

23ta

2112

3112

3s/s

4112

45lB

11

6s/8

63/1

'15

8s/8

81lB

18

10

103/{

1'1

22

12

12311

13

24

Nozzle

Column

Column 2

Reiffqcing plates are r|ot required on nozzles NPS 6 or smaller hrt may be used if desred.

NOTE

See

F$re 5.19.

Table 5.1sa-Dimensons for Threaded Roof Nozzles (Sl)

Dimensons n millmeters

Column

Column 2

Column

Dameter of Hole n Roof Plate

or Reinforcng Plate

Outsde Danreler of
Renforcng Plate

Dp

Dq

36

100

44

110

1112

1112

60

125

76

175

105

225

135

215

192

375

250

450

10

10

305

550

12

12

360

600

Nozzle

Coupling

NPS

NPS

3lt

3lt

Reinlorcing plates are not requred oo rpzes NPS 6 or srmller b|.f may be usd f desired.

NOTE

Column 4

See Fgue 5.20.

5-70

API SIANDARO 650

Table 5.1sb-Dmensons for Threaded Roof Nozzles (USC)

Dimensons n nches

Column

Column

Column 2

Column 4

Diameier of Hole n Roof Plate

or Renforcng Plate

outsde Dametef of

Dp

Dp

111i6

123h2

41lz

11lz

'1112

211h2

41la

511h2

1'l

111h2

15

9?/s

18

10

10

12

22

12

12

14111

24

Nozzle

Couplng

NPS

NPS

3lt

3lc

Renforcing Platea

Reiffo.cng plates are not requied on mzzles NPS 6 or sllaller brt may be ld if desred.

NOTE

See Fgwe 5.20.

5.8.7 Water Drawoff Sump

Water drawoff sump6 shall be as specied n Fgure 5.21 and Table 5.16a and TaUe 5.16b unless othenrvise specified by
the Purchaser.

5.8.8 ScaffoldcableSupport
The scaffold-cable support shall conform to Fgure 5.22. Where seams or other attachments are located at the center
of the tank rool the scatrold support shall be located as close as possible to the center.

5.8.9 ThreadedConnectons
Threaded ppng connections shall be female and tapered. The threads shall conform to the requrements of ASME
81 .20.1 for tapered pipe threads.

5.8.10 Plaoms, Walkways, and Staruays

a)

Plaorrs, walkwa)s, and staimays shall be n accordance with Table 5.17, Table 5.18, Table 5.19a, and Table
5.19b, and osHA29 cFR 1910, Subpart D, or equvalent national safety standard and the requrements heren,
except as noted heren.

b) For examples of acceptable

detals, see Process lndustry Practices standard details PIP STF05501, PIP

STF05520, and PIP STF05521 (see www.pp.org).

c)

Unless declned on the Data Sheet, Line 24, a roof edge landing or gauger's daorm shall be provded at the top
of all tanks.

wEroEo

TANKS FoR OtL

SfoFl

5-71

GE

Grid flush

_>
Y,*?
Sec{on

*l

[-

A.A Typical

75 mm (3 n ) typcl

oooooooooo
Typicl

Neck 6 mm (% in.)

hick mn.

Except for hadle, cover

plate not shown.

mm(3n)mar1.5 mm (146 in )thick gasket

Cover 5 mm (346 in.) lhck mnmum

5 mm (346 in.) galv.

150 mrn
(6 n.)

*l
100 mm (4 in.) mnmum
75 mm (3 in.) x 10 mm (3/s n.)

flage

'V
(10 i.) max

Note 3

:--i::::--=:----:
38 mm (1.5 in.) x 38 mm (1.5 n.) x 6 mm (t/ n.) lab

Secton

6 mm (1 n.) reinforcng plat, when required. See Not6 4.

Figure 5.17-Rectangular Roof Openings with Flanged Covers

512

API

STANDARo

650

ii
5 mm (3/16 in.) typical
16 mm (5/s n.) dameter rod handle, I place
for 900 mm (3 ) or less cor,/Er, 2 places at
t/.-poinls for largef opnngs
1800 mm
(6 fr) max

150 mm
(6 in.)

50 mm (2 in.) typical

I
5mm
(3/16

in )

Fabncate hinges from NPS 1

SCH 40 pipe and 22 mm (18 n.) rod,
mimum 2 each, maximum 600 mm
(2 ) O.C., equally spaced.

Neck 6 mm (1/4 in.) thck min.

Provde 2 lock tabs for opeings
larger than 900 mm (3 fl)

(3)max-l

|-soomm

l'-

rzs,n-

(s n')
mm (346 n.) mnimum thd( cover

50 mm (2 n.)

6mm
250 mm
(10 in )

(1L n.)
min.

Elevation

Fgure s.l8-Rectangular Roof Openings with Hinged Cover

5.8.11 Other Appunenances and Attachments

5.8.11.1 Floang sucton lines shall be provided when specifed on tlle Data Sheet, Table 4. Floang suction lines
usng rigid articulated (havng one or more swingjonts) ppe shall be designed to travel in a vertical plane and prevent

damage to the floatng roof and the suction lne through its design range of travel. These lnes shall be desgned so
that the venical plane s as close as possible to, and in no case greater than 10 degrees otr, a radial line from the tank
centerlne to the nozzle. Adjustments shall be made to clear ntemal stmctures.

5.8,11.2 lnlet diftsers shall be provded when specified by e Purchaser or the floang roof manufaclurer.
Tradional diffuser sizng to limit exit velocity to 3 fr/sec provdes proteclon for tank ntemal components and reduces
statc electrcity build up due to splashing and mstng however does not lmit static electricty buld up n tanks due to
higher velocity product flow in external nlet and olret pipng. See API 2003. Requirernents shall be included n the
Data Sheet (table 4 or Table 5).

WELDEo

faN(s roR OtL

5-73

SToRAGE

,a"-

R,T

Plain or raised-face

\.--f

slpon welding, welding-neck,

or plate ring ange

Altgmalive

Neck.{oooFlate
Jolnt

(See note)

'

Roof plate

Roof plate

Standard-weght lne pipe

DP

Base for Nozzle without Renforcing Plate

Nozzle wth Reinforcng Plate

Figure s.1g-Flanged Roof Nozzles (see Table 5.14a and Table 5.14b)

Axis always vertical

(See note)

rfi

(/

in.

Roof plate
Pipe coupling
DP

Nozzle wlhout Rinforcing Plate

Nozzle with Rsnforcig Plato

Figure s.2o-Threaded Roof Nozzles (see Table 5.15a and Table 5.15b)
_______________{

150

mm

<-

Tank shetl

f,

6 mm (t/. in

al

ltemalpipe

a3

f,

Detils

K._.,.

al-a,!

backup ba.

(allale acceplabl) to f,ange

-q
a )-".rRV87 -v\Wn
('lGmm

6 mm
100 mm (4 n.
Sand cushaon

NOTE

mm e/,6

c/.

Detail

c,ord

Detail b

Detal

Detal d

The eredim procedue shall be prloned by one of the following rnethods or by an aheate desgn approved by a gorage Tank

Engneer:

a)

For stmps being placed n le foundarbo berore bomrn placemert, e sump shall be placed n posilbn with at lea 1Cl0 mm (,t in.) of
thoroughty compacted sand, or oe. suitable fll rnateritl, arouod le su.rp. The sump leo shall be u,elded to the bdtom.

b)

For sumps being placed n ihe foundatbn afrer botorn placement, suaieot boorn plate shall be repved to allow for the sump to be
placed in positbn wil at least 100 mm (,1 n.) of ro.oughly cornpcted sand, or oftr suitable fill matefial, a.ond |e surp. The sup
shall len be welded !o lhe boor.

Figure s.21-Drawoff Sump (see Table 5.16a and Table 5.16b)

5-14

API SANDARo 650

6 mm (r/a in.) plate

6 mm (r/ in.)

-r

Schedule 40
pipe (see note)

10 mm

(3/s n.)

fomed plate

8 mm (3/!6 in.)
6 mm

l5O mm (6

(rilin.

mm (5r/ in.)

Tak roof

230 mm (9 n.) diameter

Figure s.zz-Scaffold Cable Support

Table 5.1oa-Dimensions for Drawoff Sumps (Sl)
Dameter of
Sump

NPS

mm
A

Depth of Sump

mm

610

300

910

450

1220

600

1520

900

NOTE

Distance from
Cenier Ppe to Shell
m

of
irinmum
Sump lntemal
mm
Pipe tidpss
,mm

Thckriess
Plates n

Mnmum Nozzle
Neck Thickness

mm

5.54

5.54

10

6.35

1.62

2.1

10

6.35

8.56

2.6

11

6.35

10.97

Thckness of
Plates n Sump
in.

Minimum
lntemal
Ppe Thckness

Minimum Nozzle
leck Thicknss

n.

3112

J/15

0.218

0.2'18

3ta

0.250

0.300

63/1

3tB

0.250

0.337

8112

1l$

0.2 50

o.432

'1

.1

See Figure 5.19.

Table 5.1Gb-Dimensons for Drawoff Sumps (USC)

Diameter of

Sump
in.

NPS

A
610 (24)

910 (36)

1220 148\

1520 (60)

NOTE

Depth of Smp
n.

B
12

18
24
36

Disiance

fror

cerer Pipe lo Shell

in.

See Fgure 5.19.

5.8,11.3 lf requred by the Purchaser, grounding lugs shall be provded

in the quantiqr specified on the Data Sheet,

The
lugs
be
equally
spaced
around the base of the tank. Provde a
wth
Fgure
5.23.
shall
Table 4, and comply
mnmum of four lugs. The suggested maxmum lug spacing is 30 m (100 ft).

NOTE

Tanks that rest directly on a foundaton of soil, asphalt or concrete are nherently grounded for Purposes of dissipation of
electrosauc charges. The additon of grounding rods or simlar devices will not reduce |e hzard assochted with electostatic
charges n the stored producl. API Recommended Practice 2m3 contans additonal information about tank grounding issues as
rt ell as comments aboul lightnng protecton.

.4

All non-circular miscellaneols pads shall have rotnded comers with a minimum radus of 50 mm (2 n.).
5.8.1f
Pads that rrust cover shell seams shall be Provded with a 6 mm (1ft n.) telltale hole (see 5.7.3 4).

WETDED TANKS

roR

O[

5-75

SfoRAGE

Table 5.17-Requirements for Plaorms and Walkways

All parts shall be made of metal

TheminimumWflhofthewalkwayshallbe610mm(24in.),afrefmakingadjustmentsatallPfojectons.
Flooring shall be made of gratng or nomliP rnaterial
The heght of the top raling above the ffoor shall be 1070 mm (42 in.).4
The mnimum

heltf

of the toeboard shall be 75 mm (3 n.).

(1/4 n.).
The maximum space beMeen the top of the floof and the bonom of the toeboard shall be 6 mm

raling.
The heght of rhe midral shall be approximately one-half the distance from lhe top of lhe walkway to the toP of the
The maximum distance between railng Posts shall be 24m mm (96 in ).
(1000 lbf), and the
The comoleted structufe shall be capable ol supponing a moving concentfated load of 4450 N
point on the
r'u"oiii trur srl oe capaur dt witr'standirig a bd of 9oo N (2oo lbO applied n any direclion at any
Handrails shall be on both sk es of the plaofm bul shall be disconnued where necessary for access.
At handral openings, any space wiJer an 150 mm (6 n.) between the tank and the plaom should be floored.
A tank runway that extends ftom one paft of a tank to any part of an aqjacernbnk, to the ground, of to anothef stfucture
that free relav movement of the siruclures joinedty the runwa{.
;hrtt be;Jpp'"rled
."^
nm anachment of the runwaY to one tank and the use of slipjoint a[the pont of contact between lhe
"".riLlJ,
without
the
other
runwaj and the-other tank. (This method pernits either tank to senle or be disrupted by an explosion

ryjry*:Ilt-T1y.f^-

fhs handral heigatt is required by OSHA specifications.

Table

5.1

8-Requirernents for Stainvays

1.

All pans shall be made of metal.

2.

The minimum width of the stars shall be 710 mm (28 n.).

3.

The maxmum anglea of the stairway with a horizontll lne shall be 50 degrees.

4.

The mnmum width of the star reads shall be 200 mm (8 n.). (The sum of twice the rise of the star treads Plus the run
ldefined as the horizontal distance between the noses of successive read piecesl shall not be less than 610 mm [24
n.l or more than 660 mm [26 in.l. Rises shall be uniform throughot t the heght of the staiMay.l)

5.

Treads shall be made of grating or nonslp material

6.

The top raling shalljon the plaom handral wittDrn ofiset, and the heighl measured vertically from tread level at the
nose ofthe trad shall be 760 mm to 860 mm (30 in. to 34 n.).

7.

The maxmum distance be^,een railng posts, rneasured along the slope of the railing, shall be 24@ mm (96 n.).

B.

The completed structure shall be capable of supponing a moving concentrated load of 4450 N (f000 lbD, and the
handrail iuclure shall be capable of withsranding a load of 9m N (2m lbf) aPplied in any direclon at any point on the

top ra|.
9.

Handrals shll be on both sdes of strailh stairs; handrails shall also be on both sk es of circular sars wtlen the
clearance between the tank shell and the star stringer exceeds 20o mm (8 in.).

10.

Circumferemial stairways shall be complelely supported on the shell of the tank, and the ends of the stringers shall be
clear of the ground. a-iMays shall extend fiom the bouom of the tank up to a roof edge landing or gauger's Plaofm.

alt is recommended that the same angle be employed for all stairwa)s in a tank grouP or

pla

area.

5-76

API SraNoaRo 650

Table 5.1ga-Rise, Run, and Angle Relatonshps for Starways (St)

Height of Rse

2.R+=610mm

2P+=660mm

wdrh of Run
mm
f

Degrees

Minutes
39

mm

Angle

wdrh of Run
mm
f

Degrees

Minutes

13

Angle

135

340

21

140

330

22

59

380

20

145

320

24

23

370

21

24

150

310

25

49

360

22

37

155

300

21

19

350

23

53

165

2AO

30

31

330

26

34

170

2'to

32

12

320

21

59

180

250

35

45

300

30

58

'185

240

37

38

290

32

190

230

39

34

280

34

32
'r0

'195

220

41

33

270

35

50

205

200

45

42

250

39

21

210

190

41

52

240

41

1',1

2'15

230

A?

220

220

45

225

210

46

5B

Table 5.1gb-Rise, Run, and Angle Relationships for Staarways (USC)

Heght of Rse
n.

2R +

r=

24 in.

W(lh of Run

2R+
Angle

=26in.

Width of Run

n.

Degrees

Mnutes

5112

13112

21

39

51lz

'13

22

53lq

12112

in.

Angle

Degrees

Mnutes

59

15

20

'r3

24

23

14112

21

24

12

25

49

14

22

31

6114

11112

21

19

13112

23

53

6112

1'l

30

3',1

13

26

34

63t1

1o112

32

'10

1111

9112

7112
1311
B

8114

12

12112

21

59

45

12

30

58

37

38

11112

32

32

39

34

11

34

10

8112

41

33

1O112

35

50

45

42

10

39

21

7112

47

52

9112

41

11

8112

43

83t

81h

45

46

58

5-71

WELoEo TANKS FoR OIT SToRAGE

qe/r6 in. Diameter hole

Notes:
1. Lug materia, shall be austendrc stanless
sleel when attached to carbon or low alloy
steel parts. When attached to other
materials, lug materia shall be similar lo the
material to whic attached.
2. See tank drawng/daia sheel for elevation
and orienttion.
3. Drawing courlesy of PIP (Proc6ss lndustry
Pracfces).

1/a n. thick
See Note 'l

lnsulaton
(if required)

Radius corners

// oo r'ror

parrr

i/

[Sl uts omitted for clarityl

Fgure s.23-crounding Lug

5.9

Top and lntermediate Stiffenng Rngs

5.9.1

General

An open-top tank shall be provded with stffening rngs to maintain roundness when the tank s subjected to wind
loads. The stiffenng rings shall be located at or near the top of the top course, preferably on the outside of the ank
shell. This design for rngs used as wnd grders also apples to floatng-roof tanks covered in Annex C. The top angle
and the wnd girders shall conform, in rnaterial and size, to the requirements of this standard.

5.9.2 Types of Stiffening Rings

Stffening rings may be made

of structural sections, formed plate sections, sections built up by weldng, or

combinatons of such types of sections assembled by welding. The outer periphery of stiffening rngs may be cirular
or polygonal (see Figure 5.24).

5.9.3 Restrictons on Stiffening

Rngs

5.9'3'1-

The- mnimum size of angle for use alone or as a component n a hllt-up sffenng ring shall be 65 x 65 x 6
mm(2112x2112x l/a in.). The minmum nomnalthckness of pte for use in tormeO or nui[-p siffening rings shall be

6 mm (0.236 in.).

5.9.3.2 When the stiffenng rings are located more than 0.6 m (2 ft) below the top of the she , the tank shall be
providedwitha65x6Sx6mm(2112x2112\.31l(.in.)opcurbangleforshellssmm(:hoin.rtrick,witnaT5xTSx6

API

5.78

mm (3

STANDARO

650

1/4 in.) angle for shells more than 5 mm (3ho in.) thck, or wth other members of equivalent section

modulus.

Rings that may trap liqud shall be provded with adequate drain holes. Unnsulated tanks having rings shall
have small water-shedding slopes and/or drain holes or slots unless the Purchaser approves an alternate means of
dranage. lf drain holes are provided, they shall be at least 25 mm (1 in.) diameter (or slot width) on 2400 mm (8 ft)
centeri or less. lnsulated tanks where the rngs function as nsulaton closures shall have no drain holes or slots.

5.9.3.3

5.9.3.4 Weldsjoning stiffening rngs to the tank shell may cross vertical tank seam welds. Any splice weld n the ring
shall be located a mnimum of 150 mm (6 in.) from any venical shell weld. Stiffenng rings may also cross vertical tank
seam welds with the use of coping (rat hole) of the stffenng rng at the vertical tank seam. Where the copng method
is used, the required section modulus of the sflening ring and weld spacing must be mantained.

5.9.4 StiffenrE

Rngs as Walkways

A stiffening ring or any ponon of it that is specifed as a walkway shall have a width not less than 710 mm (28 n.)
ctear of pecti-ons including the angle on the top of the tank shell. The clearance around local pKiectons shall not be
less tnan OiO mm (2 in.). nless the ank is covered with a fixed rool the stiffenng ring (used as a walkway) shall be

located 11OO mm (42 in.) below the top of the curb angle and shall be provided with a standard railng on the
unprotected sde and at the ends of the section used as a walkway.

5.9.5 Supports for Stiffenng

Rngs

Supports shall be provded for all stitrenng ings when the dmension of the horizontal leg or web exceeds 16 mes
the ieg or web thikness. The suppons sall be spaced at the intervals required for the dead load and vertical live
load; owever, the spacing shall not exceed 24 trnes the wdth of the outsde compression flange.

5.9.6

Top Wnd Girder

5.9.6.1 The requred minmum section modulus

of the sffenng ring shall be determned by the following equaon:

ln Sl units:

,=#(i,)'
where

Z
D

is the requred mnimum seclon modulus, in cm3;

H2

heigltt
is the heght of the tank shell, n rneters, including any fteeboard provided above the maximum filling

is the norninal tank diameter, n meters;

as a guide for a floating roof;

is the des(Jn wind speed (3-sec gust), in km/h (see 5.2.1[kD.

ln USC units:

z=o.wlHz({z)'

WEToEo fANKS FoR

O[

SToRAGE

where

Z
,

12

is the height of the tank shell, in feet, ncludng any fieeboard provided above the maximum flling height as

is the requred minimum section modulus, in inches3;

nominal tank diameter, in feeu

a guide for a floating roof;

is the design wind speed (3-sec gust), in mph (see 5.2.1[kl).

NOTE For tank dimeters over 60 m (2m fr), the seclion modulus requred by the equaton may be reduced by agreement
between the Purchaser and the Manufacturer, but the modulus may not be less lhan that required for a tank diameter of 61 m
(2m fr). (A descrption of the loads on the tank shellthat are included in the design wind speed can be found in ltem a of the nole to
5.9.7.1.)

5.9.6.2 The section modulus

of the sffening rng shall be based on the properties of the applied members and may
nclude a portion of the tank shell for a distance of 16below and, if applicable, above the shell-ring attachment where
is the as-bu[t shell thckness, unless otherwise specmed. When curb angles are attached to the top edge ofthe shell
ring by butt-weldng, ths distance shall be reduced by the width of the vertical leg of the angle (see Figure 5.24 and

Table 5.20a and Table 5.20b).

5.9.6.3 When a stair opening is nstalled through a stiffening rng. the section modulus of the portion of the ring
ouEide the opening, including the transition section, shall conform to the requirements of 5.9.6.1. The shell adjacent
to the openng shall be stiffened with an angle or a bar, e wide side of whch s placed n a horizontal plane. The
other sdes of the opening shall also be stiffened with an angle or a bar, the wde sde of whch is placed n a venical
plane. The cross-sectional area of these rim sffeners shall be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of the
portion of shell included in the section-modulus calculaons for the stiffening ring. These rim stifieners or additional
members shall provde a suitable toe board around the openng.

The stiffening membrs shall extend beyond the end of the opening for a distance greater than or equal to the
mnimum depth of the regular rng sections. The end sffening members shall frame nto the sde sfienng
members, and the end and side stiffenng members shall be connected to ensure that ther full strength ii
developed. Figure 5.25 shows the openng descrbed n this section. Altematve details that provde a load-carrying
capacity equal to that of the girder cross-section away from the opening may be provided.

5.9.7

lntermedate Wind Grders

5.9.7.1 The maximum

heght of the unstiffened shetl shall be calculated as follows:

ln Sl units:

a = r.nrrr6'(fl'
where

Hl is the vertcal distance, in meters, between e intermediate wind grder and the top angle of the shell or rhe
top wind girder of an open-top tank;

is the nominal thckness, unless otherwise specifed, of the thnnest shell course, n mllimeters (see Note
1);
is the nominal tank diameter, n meters;

5-80

API

STANDARD

650

Figure s.2/t-Typcal stffening-rng sections for Tank shells (see Table 5.20a and Table 5.20b)

5-81

WETDEo TANKS FoR OtL SToRAGE

Table s.2oa-Section Modul (cm3) of Stiffening-Ring Sections on Tank Shells (Sl)

Dimensons in millimeters

Column

Column 2

Column

Column 5

Column 6

10

11

30.73

32.O4

32.69

38.51

40.32
69.48
17 .60
104.08
124.68
159.79
193.08

70.59
78.90
105.78
126.91
't62.78

425.14

201.83
243 41
279.39
337.32
366.82
443.06

204.62
241.16
283.45
342.77
312.48
450.61

495.62

513.69

521.41

399

Column

As-Buih Shell Thcknrss

Member Sze

68

Top Angle: Figure 5.24, Detal a

65x65x6

65x65x8
75 x 75 x l0

6.54

ti.

8.46
13.82

8.63
13.97

Curb Angle: Figure 5.24, Detail b

65x65x6

2t.O3

65x65xB
75x75x6
75x75x10
100x100x7

28.16
t4.67
37.49
53.84

33.05
35.98
41 .24

100x100x'10

4.64

63.80

71 .09

87.69

One Angle: Figure 5.24, Detal c (See Note)

65x65x6
65x65x8
100x75x7
1O2x75xB
125x75x8
125x15x10
150 x 75 x 10
150 x-loox 10

29.15

28.09
34.63
60.59
66.97

36.20 I

134.'14

63.21 r
70.08 i
93.71
110.71
141.38

155.91

111.'t1

89.41

105.20

66.88
74.49
99.86
118.97

152.24
'r

84.11

41.11

196.62

Two Angles: Fqure 5.2,1, Detal d (Se Note)

lOOx7sxB
75 x 10
l25x75x8
125 x 75 x 10
150x75x8
15O x 75 x 10
150 x 10Ox 10

186.49 I
223.37

181.22
216.81
249.17
298.77
324.97
390.24

lmx

308.17

195.15
234.55
269.59
324.40

335.45

353.r2

256.84

402.92
413.51

461.11

Forrned Plate: Fgure 5.24, Detal e

b=25O

341

375

D=n

392

427

D= 350

519

413
517

496
606

= 400

615

687

723

618
131

b=450

117

802

D=500

824

923
1049

846
976

996

=550

937

,=600

1054
1176

D=650

b=l$

1436
1573
1716
1864
2016
2114

b=150
= 800

=950

= 1000

NOTE

13

1304

=850 I
D=9oo i

1181

The secton moduli for Detals c and

with uncvFn lcnq ar rl<prl

i
I

t7

1459
1607
1759
1917
2080

2248
2421

505

864

'11t1

1135

1252
1399

1280
1432
1589

1551

1709
1873

2043
2218
2398
25A4

17

52

1921
2096

2216
2463
2654

API

5-42

STANDARD

650

Table s.zob-Secton Modul (in.3) of Stffenng-Ring Sections on Tank Shells (Usc)

Dimensions in nches

Column

Column

Column

Column 5

Column 6

5/ro

3la

1le

1.87

1.93

2.OO

Column 4

As-Built shell Thickness

Member Sze

3ho

llc

Top Angle: Figure 5.24, Detail a

21l2x21lzx1la
21lz

2112

0.51

o.42
o.52

0.89

0.91

0.41

x5116

3x3x3/B

Curb Angle: Fgure 5.24, Detal b

21lzx21lzx1lc
2112

2112

x5116

3x3x1/r
3x3x3/g
4 x4 x114
4x4x3l}

.12

1.61

'r.89

2.O4

2.32
2.14
3.64
4.11

2.44
3.35
4.41

5.82

One Angle: Figure 5.24, Detail c (See Nole)

2112x2112x1ll

1.68

2rlzx21lz\5116

'1.98

4x3x1/l
4x3x5/16
5x3x5/16
5x31/2x5/16

5x3l/2x3l8
6x4x3/8

t.79
2.-t3

3.50

3.73

4.'t 4

4.45

5.53
6.13

5.96

2.23
3.89
4.66
6.25

6.60

2.40

4.00

4.10

4.82
6.41
7.16

4.95
6.64

1 .O2

7.61

8.33

8.58

9.02

10.56

11

.15

11.59

11.93

1.78
13.67
16.23

'12.20

12.53
14.60

12.81

8.03

Two Anges: Fgure 5.24, Detal d (See l{ote)

4x3x5/16

11.21

4x3xr/8

13.06
15.48
18.00
16.95

5x3x5/16
5x3x3/B
5x3l/2x5116

'19.75

5x31/2x3l8

6x4x3/B

21.74

'18.89

14.18
16.84
19.64

11

.34

14.95
11 .7

1't.10

18.31

20.26
'r
8.82

20.63

21.39

22.O1

20.11
19.23
22.54

28.92

29.95

30.82

31.55

23.29
29.21
35.49
42.06
48.97

24.63
31.07
37,88
45.07
s2.62
60.52
68.78
17.39

25.61

26.34
33.33
40.78
48.67
56.99
65.73
74.89
84.45

Formed Plate: Fgure 5.24, Detal e

= 10

b=12
b= 14
= 16

b=18
b=20
b=22
b=24

56.21

63.80
11.12
79.99

-
-
-

--6 44
--En

36
---T= 38
--l=--6:40
-NOTE The sectbn

8635

9079

8858

95.66

1oo6s

9t52

10531

110.88

106,.78

11530
1216/.
13632

11639

r2633
13650
Ml 21
nrc

wih uneven legs are us(

32.36
39.53
41 .10
55.07
63.43
12.18
81.30

d on the

147

35

15&71

94A1
10L17

11r52

uA7

126.66

132 A2

13817

:'!,tl3

150'07

155,40

f6Lu

A2

1749S

167

5-83

WEtDEo TANKS FoR OrL SToRAGE

--' --\Y.
Ii\
\

\\\

L-'---fi
\
--r

\"' - ttt
\ _/-)

Fgure 5.2s-Starway Openng through Stiffenng Ring

is the design wind speed (3-sec guso, in km/h (see 5.2.1[kl).

USC units:

i/ = 600,000

,W(H'

where

14

f
D
y
NOTE 1

s the vencal dstance, n feet, between the intermediate wind grder and the top angle of the shell or the top
wind girder of an open-top tank;
s

e nominal ickness, unless otherwise specited, of the innest shell course,

in inches (see Note

t);

is the nominal tank dameter, n feet;

is the design wnd speed (3-sec gust), n mph (see 5.2.1[kl).

.. The.ructrral stability check of wind girder stiffened shelh in accordnce with 5.9.6 and 5.9.7, shall be based upon
nomnal dimensons of the shell course and the wind grders respective of specifed coroson allowances whenever the 'ilo'
option is selected for "Check Bucklng in Conoded Cond.z on the Data Sheet, Line g. Vhenevr the "yes" opton is setected, the
check musl be based upon the nominal dmensions minus the specifed conosion allowance.

API SIANDARD 650

NOTE

This fomula is intended to cover tanks with either open tops or closed tops and s based on tlle following faclors (or the
gandard 650 Tank Shells): 21
Ure faclors given in this note, see ASCE 7 and'R. V Mccrath's '$ability of API

UiEounO fi

a)

The velocity pressure is:

p = 0.00256K2 Ka K Vz

C=

48 kPa (31 lbflft2)

where

I(z

equals the velocity pressure exPosure coecent = 1 .04 for exPosure C at a heght of 40 fl;

,(a

s 'l.O for all

,(d

equats 3-second gust design wnd speed = r9o kmih (120 mph) at 10 m (33 fr) above ground (see 5.2.1[kD;

I
G

equals the mportance factor = 1.0 for Category ll struclures;

slruclures except those on isolated hlls or escarpments;

the direclonality factor = 0.95 for round tanks;

equals the gust faclor = 0.85 for exposure C

top tanks for a

A 0.24 kpa (5 lbf/ftl intemal vacuum is added for inward drag on open-top tanks or for external Pressure on closed
(36
lbfrt2).
toral of 1.72 kPa

b)

for a shape factor

The wind pfessure is uniform over the theoretical buckling mode of the tank sttell, which eliminates the need
for the wind loadng.

c)

loadngs,
The modified U.S. Model Basin fomula for the critical unifom extemal Pressure on thn-wall tubes free from erd
subjecl to the total pressure specified n ltem a

d)'

c, the lotal load on the

When other factors are specmed by the Purchaser that are greater than lhe factors in ltems a, b, and
(36
modied
total Pressure.
to
th
lbt2)
1.72
kPa
ratio
of
by
e
decreased
be
nd
Hl
shall
shell shall be modifreO accorOing!,

5.9.7.2 After the maximum heght of the unstiffened shell, FI\, has been determined, the heght of the transfonned
shell shall be calculated as follows:

a)

of each shell
With the followng equaton, change the actual width of each shell course into a transposed wdth
course havng the top shell thckness:

w,,=

T*,"n)

whefe

Wi.

is the transposed wdth of each shell course, in millimeters (nches);

is the acual width of each shell course, in millimeters (nches);

t -

n millimeters (nches);
is the nominal thickness, unless otherwise specified, of the thinnest shell course,

,d,,risthenominalthickness,unlessotherwisespcified,oftheshellcourseforwhichthetfansposedwidth
is beng calculated, n millirneters (nches).

b)

the courses will give the height of

Add the transposed wids of the courses. The sum of the transposed wdths of
the transformed shell.

Petroleum lnsttute, Secton

21 'd.nrirg,
R.V Mccrath, "Stablity of API gandard 650 Tank Shells," PKEeedings of the Amercan

an eacan eeobum lnstitute, New York, 1963,

Vol 43'pP 458-469'

lll-

wELDED TANXs FoR OrL SToRAGE

s.9.2.3 tf the heght of the

transformed shell s greater than the maximum height 4, an intermediate wind girder is

requked.

5.9.7.3.1 For equal statility above and below the intermedate wind grder, the girder should be located at the

mdheght of the transforrned shell. The location of the girdef on the actual shell should be at the same course and sarne
relaiive postion as the locaton of the girder on the ransformed shell, using the thickness relatonship n 5.9.7.2.

5.9.7.3.2 Other locations for the girder nny be used, provided the height of unsffened shell on the transformed
shell does not exceed Hl (see 5.9.7.5).

5.9.7.4 tf har the height of the transfomed shell exceeds the maximum heght Il, a second intermediate grdef
shall be used to reduce the height of unsliffened shell to a heght less than the maxmlm.

S.9.7.S lntermedate wind girders shall not be attached to the shell within 150 mm (6 n.) of a horizontalioint of the
locaon of a girder is withn 150 mm (6 n.) of a horizontaljoint, the girder shall preferably
shell. When e preliminary-below
the joint; however, the maximJm unstiffened shell heght shall not be exceeded.
be located 150 mm (6 in.)

5.9.7.6 The required mnimum secon modulus of an ntermedate wind grder shall be determned by the followng
equation:

ln Sl units:

v\'
- dH,(
\-so)
n
'=
\-

where

is the requred minimum section modulus, in cm3;

is the nominal tank diameter. in meters;

s the venical distance, n meters, between the intermediate wind grder and the top angle of the shell or the
top wind girder of an open-top iank;

is the design wind speed (3-sec Aust), in km/h (see 5.2.1[kl).

ln USC units:

du,
-,= 10.000 v'
\ 120/
where

Z
D
iIl

is the requred minimum section modulus, in inches3;

s

the nomnal tank diameter, in feet;

the vertical distance, in feet, between the ntermedate wind grder and the top angle of the shell or the top

wnd girder of an open-top tank;

is the desgn wnd speed (3-sec gusl), in mph (see 5.2.1[kl).

API STANoARo 650

NOTE

A description of the loads on the tank shellthat are included

an

|e des(ln

nd speed can be found

n llem a of the note

to 5.9.7.1.

5.9.7.6.1 Where the use of a transformed shell pemits the ntermediate wind girder to be located at a height that is
less than fli calculated by the fomula n 5.9.7.1, the spacng to the md-height of the transformed shell, Eansposed to
the heght of the actual shell, may be subst.rted for Hl in the calculaon for the minimum secton modulus if the grder
is attaclrcd at tfle ansposed locaon.

5.9.7.6.2 The secton modulus of the intermedate wind gkder shall be based on the properties of the attached
members and may nclude a portion of the tank shell for a distance above and below the attachment to the shell, in
mm 0n.), of:

ln Sl unts:
13.4 ()ro

where

the nomnal tank darneter, n meters;

is the as-built shell thckness, unless otherwse specified, at the attachment, in millimeters.

ln USC units:
r.47 (DOo

where

the nominal tank dameter, in feeU

the as-buift shell thickness, unless otherwise specified, at the aachment, in nches.

5.9.7.7 An opening for a staMay n an intermediate stiffener is unnecessary when the intermediate stiffener
extends no rnore than 150 mm (6 n.) from the outsde of the shell and tfle nominal stairway widh is at least 710 mm
(28 in.). For greater outward extensions of a stiffener, the stain ,ay shall be increased n width to provide a mnimum
clearance of 450 mm ('18 in.) between the outsde of the stiffener and the handrail of the starway, subject to the
Purchaser's approval. lf an openng s necessary, it may be designed in a manner smlar to that specified n 5.9.6.3
for a top wind grder with the excepton that only a 560 mm (22 in.) wdth through the stiffener need be provided.

5.10 Roofs
5.10.1 Defnitons
The followng defnitions apply to roof designs but shall not be consdered as limitng the type of roof permitted by
5.10.2.8.

a)

A supported cone roof is a roof formed to approximately the sulace of a rght cone that s supported principally
ether by rafters on girders and columns or by rafters on trusses with or wilhout columns.

b)

A self-supportng cone roof s a roof fomed to approxmately the sulace of a rght cone that is supporled only
at its periphery.

c)

A self-supporting dome roof is a roof fonned to approxmately a spherical surface that is suPPorted only at its
periphery.

VIELDEo TANK FoR OIL SIoRAGE

d) A self-upportng umbrella oof

s a moded dome roof formed so that any horizontal secdon s a regular

polygon with as many sdes as there are roof plates that is supported only at its periphery.

5.'10.2 General

5.10,2.1 Loads: All roofs and supporting structures shall be desgned for load combinations (a), (b), (c), (e), (0, and
(e).

5,10,2.2 Rool Plate Thckness: Roof plates shall have a nominal lhckness of not less than 5 mm (3/i6

in.) or 7gauge sheet. lncreased thickness may be required for supported cone roofs (see 5.10.4.4). Any requred conosion
allowance for the plates of self-supportng roofs shall be added to the calculated thckness unless otheftvse specfied
by the Purchaser. Any conosion allowance for the plates of supported roofs shall be added to the greater of the
calculated thckness or the minimum thckness or [5 mm (36 in.) or 7auge sheetl. For frangible roof tanks, where a
conoson allowance is specified, the design must have frangible characleristcs in the nominal (unconoded) condton.

5.10.2.3 Strucfural Member Atlachmen.' Roof plates of supported cone roofs shall not be attached to the
supporting members unless otherwise approved by the Purcaser. Continuously attaching the roofto cone supporting
members may be beneficial when nterior lnng systems are requred, however, the tank roof cannot be considered
frangible (see 5.'l 0.2.6).

5.10.2.4 Structunl Member Thickness: All ntemal and extemal structural members shall have a minimum
nomnal thckness (new) of4.3 mm (0.17 n.), and a minimum conoded thickness of2.4 mm (0.094 n.), respeclvely,
n any component, except that the mnmum nomnal thckness shall not be less than 6 mm (0.236 n.) for columns
which by desgn normally resst axal compressive forces.

5.10.2.5 Top
the top sde.

Albcrrmeat Roof plates shall

be attached to the top angle of the tank wth a contnuous fillet weld on

5.10.2.6 Fnngible Roof.' A roof is consdered frangble (see 5.8.5 for emergency venting requrement) f the roofto,shelljont urill fal prior to the shelFto-bottom joint n the event of excessive ntemal pressure. VVen a Purchaser
specifes a tank wth a frangible roof, the tank desgn shall comply with a, b, c, or d, of the following:

a)

For tanks 15 m (50 fr) n dameter or greater, the tank shall meet all of the following.

1) The slope of the roof at the top angle attachment does not exceed 2:'12.

2) The roof support members shall not be attached

to the roof plate.

3) The roof is attached to the top angle wth a sngle continuous fillet weld on the top sde (only) that does not
exceed 5 mm (3/16 n.). No undersde weldng of roof to top angle (ncludng seal welding) is permitted.

4) The roof-to.top angle compression ring

s lmted

to deiails a through e in Figure F-2.

5) All members n the regon of the roof-to-shell jonl, includng nsulaton rings, are considered as contributing to
the roof-tcshelljont cross-sectional area (A) and this area is less than the limt shown below:

,
^-

D,"
ang

NOTE
The terms for this equation are defned
-2rF,

Annex

F.

The lop angle size requred by 5.1.5.9.e may be reduced n size if requred to meet the cross seciional area

limil

WELoED fANKS FoR OIL SfORAGE

is a rnodified dome roof fomed so that any horizontal secon s a regular

polygon with as many sdes as there are roof plates that is supported only at its periphery.

O A self-supportng umbrella roof

5.10.2 General

5.10.2.1 Loads. All roofs and supporting structures shall be desgned for load combinaons (a), (b), (c), (e), (f), and
(0.
5.10.2.2 R@f Ptate Thckness: Roof plates shall have a nominal thckness of not less than 5 mm (3h6 n.) or 7gauge sheet. lncreased thckness may be required for supported cone roofs (see 5.10.4.4). Any required coroson
allowance for the plates of self-supporting roofs shall be added to the calculated lhckness unless otheffvise specmed
by the Purchaser. Any conosion allowance for the plates of supported roofs shall be added to the greater of the
clculated thickness or the minimum thickness or [5 mm (3/16 n.) or 7-gauge sheetl. For frangible roof tanks, where a
conoson allowance s specmed, the desgn must have frangible characteristics in the nomnal (uncoroded) condifon.

5.10.2.3 Structural Menber Afrachrnent: Roof plates of supported cone roofs shall not be attached to the
supporting members unless othen se approved by the Purchaser. ContinuoJsly atachng le roof to cone suppoting
members may be benefical when nterior linng s)6terns are requred, however, e tank roof cannot be considered
frangible (see 5.10.2.6).

5.10,2.1 Saudural Merrer hickness.' All ntemal and external suctrral rnembers shall have a mnirrum
nomnal thickness (new) of 4.3 mm (0.17 in.), and a minimum conoded thckness of 2.4 mm (0.094 n.), resPectively,
n any componen[ except that the mnmum nominal thckness shall not be less than 6 mm (0.236 in.) for columns
which by desgn normally resst axal compressive forces.

5.10.2.5

Top

Aruchn

errr..

Rmf plates shall be afrached to the top angle of the tank with a contnuous fllet weld on

the top sde.

5.10,2.6 Frangibte Roof.' A roof is considered frangble (see 5.8.5 for emergency ventng requrement) if the roofto-shef jont wll fail prior to the shell-to-bonom jont in the event of excessive intemal pressure. When a Purchaser
specmes a tank with a frangible rool the tank desgn shall comply with a, b, c, or d, of the following:

a)

For tanks 15 m (50 ft) in dameter or greater,

e tank shall meet all of the follo rirE.

1) The slope of the roof at lhe top angle attachment does not exceed 2:12.

2) The roof support members shall not be attached to the roof plate.
3) The roof s anached to the top angle with a single connuous fillet weld on the top sde (only) that does not
exceed 5 mm (3/16 in.). No underside weldng of roof to top angle (including seal welding) s permmed.

4) The roof-to-top angle compresson rng

s lmited to detals a through e in Fgure F-2.

5) All members in the regon of the roof-to-shelljoint, ncluding insulaon rings, are consdered as contributing to
the roof-to-shelljont cross-sectional area (A) and this area s less than the lmit shown below:

o. =

DL,

l-nF, tang

NOTE

The terms for this equation are defined in Annex

F.

The top angle sLe requied by 5.1.5.9.e may be reduced n size if requred to meet the cross sectional area limit.

API

b)

For sef-anchored tanks with a diameter greater

shall meet all of le follong.

1) The

STANDARo

650

an or equal to 9 m (30 ft) hrt less than 15 m (50 ft), the tank

r,ank heght s 9 m (30 ft) or greater.

2) The tank shall meet the requrements of 5.'10.2.6.a.2-5.

3) The slope of the roof at e top angle attachrnent does not exceed 3/4:12.

4) Aachments (ncluding nozzles and manholes) to the tank shall be desgned to accommodate at least 100 mm
(4 n.) of vertlcal shell movement without rupture.

5) The bottom

c)

bntt-welded.

Altemately, for self-anchored tanks less than 15 m (50 ft) dameter, the tank shall rieet all of

e following.

1) The tank shall meet the requirements of 5.10.2.6.a.1 through 5.

2) An elastic analysis22 shall be performed to confirm the shell to bottomjoint strength is at least 1.5 times the top
jont strength wih the tank empty and 2.5 tiries the topjont streng with the tank full.
3) Attachrnents (ncluding nozzles and manholes) to the tank shall be desgned to accommodate at least 100 mm
(4 in.) of vertical shell movernent without rupture.

4) The bottom

d)

s bun-welded.

For anchored tanks of any dameter, the tank shall meet the requrernents of 5.10.2.6.a and the anchorage and
counterweght shall be desgned for 3 mes the failure pessure calculated by F.6 as specmed in 5.12.

5.10.2.7 Stifreners:

5.10.2.8 Altemate Designs: These rules cannot cover all detals of tank roof

For all types of roofs, the dates may be stiffened by sections welded to the plates. Refer to
5.10.2.3 for requirements for supported cone r@fs.
desgn and construction. With e
approval of the Purchaser, the roof need not comply with 5.10.4, 5.10.5, 5.10.6, and 5.10.7. The Manufaclurer shall
provide a roof designed and construcled to be as safe as otherwise provided for n this standard. ln the roof design,
panicular anention should be gven to preventing falure through nstablity.

5.10.2.9 Lateal Loads on Columns.' When the Purchaser specifes lateral loads that will be imposed on the roo[
supporting columns, the columns must be proportoned to rneet the requirements for combined axial compresson
and bending as specmed n 5.10.3.

5.10.3 Allowable Stresses

o 5.10.3.1

General

Ttle allowable strengh of roof componen6 shall be determined n accordance with the ANSUAISC 360 using
allowable strength design methodology (ASD).

22 A frangble roof satsfes the emergency venting requrement for tanks exposed to fire ouile tl|e !ank. See API 2OOO. Frangble
roob re not ntended to provide ernergency venting for other circumstances such as a fre inside the tank. lity falures,
chemcal reactions, or overfll. See API Publcation 937 and API Publcaon 937-4.

5,89

WELDED ANKS FoR OrL SToRAGE

5.10.3.2 MaxmumSlendemess Ratos

/ shall not
exceed 2OO. For all other members, except tie rods whose design is based on tensile force, the value / shall not

For columns, the value L I r, shall not exceed 180. For other compression members, the value

exceed 300.
where

r.

is the unbraced length, in mllimeters (inches);

is the least radius of gyration of column, in millimeters (nches);

is the governing radius of gyration, n millimeters (inches).

5.10.4 Supported Cone Roofs

by the Purchaser..lf the rafters are set diectly on

flattest rafter shall conform to the specified or
of
the
slope
chord grders, producing slightly varying rafter spes, the
ordered roof slope,

5.10.4.1 The slope of the roof shall be 1:'16 or greater if specified

5.10.4.2 Main supporting members, ncluding those supponing the rafters, nny be

rolled- or fabricated sectons or

ihese rembers may be in cnUct witn tne roof plates, the comPresson flange of a member or e
fusses. Although
"tuss
shall be consided as receivng no lateral support from the roof plates and.shall be laterally
top chord of a
brced, if necessary, by other acceptable meods.
5.10.3.

Tie

allowable stresses n these members shall be govemed by

5.10.4.3 Suctural members serving as rafters may be rolled or fabricated seclions but in all cases shall conform to
plates with
e rules of 5.10.2, 5.10.3, and 5.10.. Raftefs shall-be designed for the dead load of e rafters and roof

flange of ttre rafter consdered as receivig no lateral support from the.roof plates and shall be
(see s.t0.4.2). When consdering addional dead loads or live loads, the rafters in direct
pla
applying the loading to the rafters may be considered as reciving adequate lateral
contaci wirh the roof
te roof phtds and the compression flanges of the rafters, with the following
etween
support from the friction

"orpr"rsion
raieraity
braceO ir necssary
exceptions:

a)

trusses and open-webjoints used as rafters;

b)

rafters wi a nomnal depth greater than 375 mm (15 in.);

c)

rafters with a slope greater than 1 :6.

5.10.4,4 Rafters shall

b = t(1.5 Fy/ D'

be spaced to sasfy:

<2loo mm (8'l in.)

where
b

is the maximum allowable roof plate span, measured circumferentially from center-tccenter of rafters;

Fy s the specfied mnmum yield strength of roof plate;

is the uniform pressure as determined from load combinatons gven in 5.2.2.

the coroded roof thckness;

API

STANDARD

650

5.10.4.5 Roof columns shall be made from either pipe or structural shapes as selected on the Data Sheet, Line

11.

Pipe columns shalleither be sealed or have openings on both the top and bouom of the column.

5.10.4.6 Rafter clips for the outer row of rafters shall

be welded to the tank shell.

5.10.4.7 Roof support columns shall be provided at ther bases with

detals that provide for the following.

a)

Load Distibttton Column loads shall be disributed over a bearng area based on the specified sol bearng
cpacity or foundaon design. The pressure appled by the tank lquid height need not be considered when sing
column bases to dstrbute loads. lf an unstifiened horizontal plate is designed to dstribute the load, it shall have a
nominal thckness of not less than 12 mm (1/z in.). Alternatively, the column load may be distributed by an
assembly of structural beams. The plate or members shall be designed to dstribute the load without exceeding
allowable stresses prescrbed n 5.10.3.1.

b)

Corrosion and Abrasion Protection At each column a wear plate th a nominal thckness of not less than 6
mm (1/l in.) shall be welded to the tank bottom with a 6 mm (U4 in.) minmum fillet weld. A single adequate
thickness plate may be desgned for the dual functons of load distribrfion and conoson/abrasion Fotecon.

c)
d)

Veftcal hbvenArt The desgn shall allow e columns to move vertically relative to the tank bottom without
restraint n tf|e event of tank overpressure or bottom settlement.

Lateral Movemem. The columns shall be effectively guded at ther bases to prevent lateral rnovement. The
gudes shall remain effective n the event of vertical rnovernent of columns relative to tank bonom of up to 75 mm
(3 in.). The guides shall be located such that they are not welded directly to the tank bottom plates.

5.10.4.8 Three acceptable arrangements to provde the functons required by 5.10.4.7 are llustrated in Fgure
5.26.

5.10./t.9 For Annex F tanks, when supporting rnembers are attached to the roof plate, consderaton shall be given
to the design of the supporting rnembrs and their attachment details when consdering internal pressure.
5.10.4.10 Center columns shall be desgned for both the balanced snow load and unbalanced snow load.
lntermedate columns need only be desgned for the balanced snow load.

5,10.5 Self-Supporting Cone Roofs

NOTE Self-supportng roofs whose roof plates are stiffened by sections lvelded to lhe plates need not conform to the minmum
ickness requirements, brt the nominal thckness of the roof plates shall not be less lhan 4.8 mm (3/16 n.) when so desgned by
the Manufacturet subjecl to the approval of the Purchaser.

5.10.5.1 Sef-supportng cone roofs shall conform to the followng requirements:

o < 37 degrees (slope = 9 12
0 > 9.5 degrees (slope = 2:12)

ln Sl unib:
Nomnal thickness shall not be less than the greatest of

Conoded thickness shall not be more than 13 mm.

**aU^E

- ao,

Ok ffi+

CA, a 5 mm

WELoED TANKS FOR

O[

5-91

STOMGE

Plate aclng as Seald Wear

Plate that is also thick enough
to dstribute load

Plate that is thick enough

to dstribute load

Fgure 5.26-Some AccePtable Column Base Detals

5-92

API

STADARD

650

where

,
f

is the greater of load combnations

is the nominal dameter of the tank, n meters;

e greater of load combnaons 5.2.2 (eX1) and

5

(e)(2) with balanced snow load S, in kPa;

.2.2 (et(1) and (eX2) with unbalanced snow load S n kPa;

the angle of cone elemenE to the horzontal, in degrees;

C,4 is the conosion allowance.

ln USC units:
Nominal thickness shall not be less than the greatest of

Conoded thckness shall not be rnore than

#-^E.aO.rrftffi*Ce.anO

%o in.

1/2 in.

where

,
I
U
0

the nomnal diameter of the tank shell, in feet;

is the greater of load combinatons 5.2.2 (eX1) and (eX2) with balanced snow load S (lbf/ft2);
is the greater of load combinatons 5.2.2 (e)(1) and (eX2) with unbalanced snow load So (|bflft2);

the angle of cone elements to the horizontal, n degrees;

C,4 is the cofiosion allowance.

5.10.5.2 The particPatng area at the roof-to-shell jdnt shall be determined usng Figure F.2 and the nomnal
materialthickness less any conosion allourance shall equal or exceed the folloring:

p
84

tano

where

p
D
0

F,

equals (0.6

&

is the Least Yeld Strength of roof-to-shelljoint material at maxmum desgn temperarre.

is the greata of load combnatons 5.2.2 (eX1) and (eX2);

is the nominal dameter of the tank shell;

the angle of cone elernents to the horizontal;

4),

the least allowable tensile stress for the materials in the roof-to-shelljoint;

5.10.6 Self-Supportng Dome and Umbrella Roofs

NOTE Sef-supporting roots t/vose roof plates are stifiened by seclions welded to the plates need not confom to the minmum
thckness requremerts, brt e thckness of the roof plates shall not be less than 4.8 mm (3^6 in.) when so desgned by e
Manufac{trer, suqject to the approval of the Purchaser,

WELoED TAN(S FoR OIL SIORAGE

5.10.6.1 Sef-supportng dome and umbrella roofs shall confom to ttle

Mnimum radius =

0.8,

follotving fequirenrents:

(unless otherwise specifed by the Purchaseo

Maxmum radus = 1.2D

ln Sl units:

Nomnal thckness shall not be less than the greitest of

*E-

r"

,',

E+

CA" anrl 5 mm

Coroded thckness shall not be more than 13 mm.

where

D
f

the nominal diameter of the tank shell. n meters;

the greater of load combinations

the greater of load cornbinaons 5'2.2 (eX1) and (exz) with unbalanced

is the roof radius, in meters.

.2.2 (e)(1) and (eX2) with balanced snow load

snal

(kPa);

load , (kPa);

ln USC units:
CA, and }16 in'

Nomnal thickness shall not be less than the greatest of

Conoded thckness shall not be more than 1/2 in.

^fr-"";*,8+

where

D is the nomnal diarneter of the tank shell, in feet;

I is the greater of load combnations 5.2.2 (eX1) and (eX2) with balanced sriow load S (lbf/ft2);
U s the greater of load combnaons 5.2.2 (eX1) and (eX2) wih unbalanced snow load S, (lbf/ft2);
rr s the roof radius, n feet.
5.10.6.2 The partcipang area at te rooftGshell jont deremned usng Figure F.2 and the nominal material
thickness less any conosion allowance shall equal or exceed:

tan0

where

p
D

the greater of load comtinaliofls 5.2.2 (eX1) and (eX2);

is the nominal diameter of the tank shell;

API STANoARo 650

5-94

the roof angle to horizontal at the shell. n degrees;

Fa equals (0.6

&), the least allowable tensile sEess for the materials

the roof-to-shelljoinu

Fy is the Least Yeld Senglh of roof-to-shelljont material at maximum desgn temperature.

5.10.7 TopAngle Attachmert for Self-Supporting Roofs

lnformation and certain restrctons on types of top-angle jonts are provided n ltem c of 5.1.5.9. Deiails of welding are
provided n 7.2.

5.1'l

Wind Load on Tanks (Overturning Stabil9

5.11.1 Wnd Pressure

Overtrming stablity shall be calculated usng e wnd pressures given in 5.2.1(k).

5.11.2 Unanchored Tanks

Unanchored tanks shall meet the requrements of 5.11.2.1 or 5.11.2.2. See Figure 5.27.
Wnd upli load

t
lntemal pressure oad

Wind load on shell

H/2 for uniform

pressure on shell

I
/

Mo!ents about

shellto bottom Joint

Dead load (DL)
I

Liquid hold dolwr weigtrt 1w"

Figure s.27-Ovenurning Check for Unanchored Tanks

5.11.2.1 Unanchored tanks shall sasfy all of the following uplift criteria:

'll

O.6M*+ Mp< Mp11.5 + Mpp

2) M,+ FfMp) < (M+ MllZ

3)

Mws + Fp (MPi) < MDL l1-5 +

+ MpyT

WLR

WETDED TANKS FOR OIL STOR^GE

wnere

Fp

is the pressure combinaon factor,

Mp

is the moment about the shell-to-bottom jont from design ntemal pressure;

Mw
Mu
Mp

is the ovemrming moment about the shell-to-bottom jont from horizontal plus vertcal wind pressure;

Mp

se

5.?.2;

the moment about the shell-to-bottom jont from the nominal weight of lhe shell;

the nromenl about the shell-to-bottom

is

e nnment about the shell-to-bottom joint from e

jdnt from

liqud weight
nomnal weght of the roof plate plus any aached

stuctural;

Ma6

is the

overtlming moment about the shell-to-bottom jont from horizontal wind Pressure.

5.11.2.2 Unanchored tanks with supported cone roofs meeting the requirements of 5.10.4 shall

sasry the followng

criteria:

M*+ F, Mn)

<

Motll.S

Mpy

S.11.2.3 The lquid weight (w) is the weght of a band of lqud at the shell usng a specific gravity of 0.7 and a heght
of one-hatf the d;sign tqud hight w ahall be the lesser 140.8 HD or Sl Units (0.90 HD for USC units) or the
following:

\-

ln Sl units:
wL

= |g\rFb,H (Ntm)

ln USC unts:
wL

= 4.67tb,1 :,H (ltft)

where
Fa, is the minimum specifed yield stress of the bottom plate under the shell, in MPa (lbf/in.2);

l{

is the tank darneter, n meters (ft);

the requred conoded thickness of the bottom plate under the shell, n mm (inches), that s used to resist
wind ovenuming. The bottom plate shall have the following restrictions:

the desgn lquid height, in meters (fr);

f, used to calculate
any shell conoson allowance.

1) The conoded thickness,

shall not exceed the frst shell course conoded thickness less

2) When the bottom plate under the shell s thicker due to nd overtuming lhan the remainder of the tank bottom,
the mnmum projecton of the supplied thicker annular ring nside the tank wall, , shall be the greater of
450 mm (18 n.) or 16 however, need not be more than 0.035D.

API SfANoARo 650

ln Sl units:
Lb = o.ozgt

to{-rn< o.oss D (in meters)

ln USC units

= 0.365 to^fFa<0.035 D (in feet)

5.11,3 Anchored Tanks

When the requrements of 5.11.2 cannot be sasfied, anchor the tank per the requirements of 5.12.

5.11.4 SldrEFrcton
Unless otherwse requred, tanks that may be subject to slidng due to wind shall use a maxmum allowable sliding
friction of 0.40 multipled by the force aganst the tank bottom.

5.12

Tank Anchorage

5,12,1

When a tank s required to be anchored per 5.11, Annex E, Annex F, or when a tank is anchored for any other
reason, tlle following mnmum requirements shall be met.

5.12,2

Anchorage shall be pro\rded to resst each of the uplift load cases listed in Table 5.21a and Table 5.21b. The
load per anchor shall be:

t= UN
where

is the load per anchor;

y'f

is the number of anchors (a mnmum of 4 s required);

5.12.3

the net upln load per Table 5.21a and Table 5.21b;

The spacng between anchors shall not exceed 3 m (10ft).

5.12.4 Allowable stresses for anchor bolts shall be in accordance with Table 5.21a and Table 5.21bfor each load
case. The allowable stress shall apply to the net (root) area of the anchor bolt.

5,12,5 The Purchaser shall specify any conoson

allowance that s to be added to the anchor dimemons. Unless

othenvise specified, conosion allowance for anchor bolts shall be appled to the nominal diameter. The mnimum
anchor bolt diameter s 1 n. plus any specified conosion allowance.

5.12,6 Attachment of the anchor bolts to the shell shall be through stitrened chair-type assembles or anchor rings of
sufficient size and heighl. An acceptable procedure for anchor char design is gven n AlSl eel Plate Engineering
Data, Volume 2, Pan 5, 'Anchor Bolt Chairs.'When acceptable to the Purchaser, anchor sfaps may be used if the
shell attjachment s va char-type assembles or anchor rings of suffcent sze and height.
Other evaluations of anchor attachments to the shell rnay be made to ensure at localzed stresses in the
stlell wll be adequatety handled. An acceptable evaluaon technique is given in ASME Secton Vlll Division 2,
4, usng the allowable stresses given n this section for Sr?. The method of attachment shall take into consderation
effect of deflection and rotation of the shell.

5.12.7

Annex .-.
\
the

5-97

WEtoEo TANKS FoR OtL SToMGE

Table

5.21a-Uplift Loads (Sl)

Allowable Anchor

Net Uplifr Formula, U(N)

Uplift Load Case

0.08f, x x7851-

Desgn Pressure

l(P

Test Pressure

[(Pr 0.08rrxdx785]

Failure Pressurea

l(1.5 x Pr- 0.08i

Wind Load

,fl

x IP x 785 + [4

Seismc Load

14x

Desgn Pressureb + Wind

l(FpP+ na - 0-08$ x

Design Pressufeb + Sesmc

t(rpP-

Frangibility Pressurec

[(3xP-0.0810

/q-

Bolt Stress (MPa)

shzx F,

tuy

-l{

xdx785l -

ltl3

x lulwulfl -

Wz

wz0 -0.4Ai

0.08r) x

x7851 + 14 Mwul

x7851+

14

M",l D

D0

Wt

- 0.4Av\

Allowable Shell
Stress al Anchor
Attachment (MPa)

4t

F,

slsx Fr

5t6 FD,

Fr

Fy
516

Fry

0.8xry

\e Fo

slsx Fy

516

Fry

0-8xry

\a

r,

wtlere

Av
D
Fp
Fq,
Fr
,
nlhx
M*
I p
I O
I p,
I

I n
"
I an.
I ,"
I
I

is the vencal eanhquake acceleration coecient, in % g;

h the tank diameter, in melers;

is the pressure combinaton factor:
is the minimum yield strength of the bonom shellcourse, in MPa;
s

the mnimum yeld strength ofthe anchor boh or 250 MPa, whchever s less' in MPa;

is the tank hegh, n meters;

equals

.EJvs

x D x Plz, in N-m;

is the sesmic moment. in N'm (see Annex E)i

is the desiqn pressure, in kPa (see Annex F);
is the failure Pressure, in kPa (see Annex F);

b the test pfessure, in kPa (see Annex F);

is the wind upli pressure on roof, n kPa;
is lhe wind pressure on shell, in N/mz;
is the roof plate thckness (the conoded thckness

0.8 x Fy

Fr

xdx785] - t/

wien used with l4 and nominalthckness when used with

wr), n millimeters;

is lhe dead load of shell minus any conoson allowance and any dead load other than roof plate actng on the
I W,
shell minus any conosion allowance, in N;
I
is the dead toad of strcll minus any conosion allowance and any dead load includng roof plate acting ofl the
I *,
shell mnus any corosbn allowarrce, n N;
I
is lhe dead load of the shell using nomnal thcknesses and any dead load other than roof Plate acling on the
I *,
shell usinq nominallhicknesses, n N.
I
,
to tanks fallrE under F.1.3 onty. The falue press.re shall be calcuhted using rprralthckriesses
arr,r" ,,"orr"
|
"pfrfies
I o *"r", ,o ,.r., ao,"eminq the pressure combnation factor appled to the design Yessure.
l" r.angUty p.essue apptes only to ianks degned to 5.10.2.6 d. The fiarEbility pressue shall be cahulated usrg nomiral thcknesses.

API

5-S8

STANDARD

650

Table 5.21b-Uplift Loads (USC)

Allowable
Anchor Bolt

Net Uplft Formula, U (lbf)

Uplft Load Case

Stress (lbflin.2)

I{

sltzx

F,

2h

Fv

x 4.08]

ltlr

Slsx Fy

\e

F,

516

Fy

l(P-stlx

Test Pressure

f(&- 8tl

Falure Pressurea

f(1.5

Wind Load

.ffypx,dx{.08+ [4 x WHID|-

Sesmic Load

14 x

Design Pressureb + wind

l(FrP+

8tA x

M*lDi -

Desgn Pressureb + Sesmc (FpP

Frangblity Pressurec

Pr

f(3 x Pf

l4z

tj

x 4.081

8tA

x
\d

F..

lY3

W2

0.8

0 - 0.4Ai

fue-8t)x

- &tl

in.2)

Desgn Pressure

><

Attachment (lbfl

x4.081

Allowable Shell
Stress at Anchor

x4.Bl+14 MeslDi

W1

x4.O8l+l4LtntD)-W0-O.LAi
x 4.081

'l

0.8x&

tk F,,

5lgx Fy

sla

F,

x F},

sls

F,

0.8

F,,

W3

Fry

where

Av
,
Fp
FA,
Fy
/
+ws
Mr\,
P
P
P
4R
fus

the venical earthguake acceleration coefficiern, n % g;

is the tank diameter, in feet;

is the pressure combnation

fador;

is the minmum yield strength of the bottom shellcourse, in psi;

is

the minimum yield strength of the anchor bolt or 36,000 ps, whchever is less. h psi;

is the tank heillht, n feet;

equals 8^/s x Dx
s

#/2,

in fr-lbs;

the ssmic momert, in ft-lbs (see Annex E);

is the desn pressure, n nches of water column (see Annex F);

s

the failure pressure, in inches of water column (see Annex F);

is the test pressure, n anches of water column (see Annex F);

is the wnd uplift pressure on roof, n irEhes of waler column;
is the wind pressure on shell, in lbs/fr2;

the roof phte lhickness (the conoded thckness when used with l,yl and nominalthickness when used with ,l/r, in
iriches;
s

is the dead load of shell minus any conoson allowance and any dead load other than roof plate acing on the shell
minus any conosion allowance, n lbf;

W2

is the dead load of shell minus any conosion allo^arrce and any dead load includng roof plate adng on tlle shell
mnus any cofroson allowance, in lbf;

W3

is the dead load of the shell using nominal thicknesses and any dead load other than roof plate adng on the shell

using nomnal thicknesses, n

b
c

lbl

Failure pfesstre applies to tanks falling under F.1.3 only. The faie prese.re shall be calculated usng norinal thickriesses.
Refer to 5.2.2 concemng le pressure combinaon factor appled to the desgn pressure.
Frangibility

presqre

apdes only to tanks desgned to 5.10.2.6 d. The hangtnlry

Fes$-re shall be cahrlated using nominal tlclnesses.

wEtoEo TANKs FoR OrL SfoR

5.12.8 Allowable stresses for anchorage parts shall be

GE

n accordance with 5.10.3.

A33% increase of the allowable

stress may be used for wind or sesmc loading conditons.

n the shell at the anchor attachment shall be in accordance with Table
5.21a and Table 5.21b unless an alternate evaluation is made in accordance with 5.12.7.

5.12.9 The maxmum allowable local stress

S.12.lO When specified by the Purchaser, the anchors shall be desgned to allow for thermal exPansion of the tank
resulng from a temperature greater than 93 "C (20O "F).
5.12.11 Any anchor bolts shall be unformly tightened to a snug

frt, and any anchor straps shall be welded whle the

tank is flled wth test water but before any pressure is applied on top of the water. Measures such as peening the
threads or addng locking nuts, shall be taken to prevent the nuts from backing off the threads.

S.1Z.,IZ he embedment strength of the anchor in the foundaton shall be suffcient to develop the specified
minmum yield strength of the anchor. Hooked anchors or end plates may be used to resist pullout.

5.12.13 The foundation shall provide adequate countefbalancng weight to resist the design uplift loads

in

accordance with the following.

5.12.13,1 The counterbalancng weight, such asa concrete ringt rall, shall be designed so that the resstance to net
uplift is n accordance with Table 5.21a and Table 5.21b. When considering uplift due to a wnd or seismc moment, an
evaluaon shall be made to nsure overtuming stability of the foundaon and to nsure soil-bearing pressures are
within allowable stress levels as determned usng the recommendations of Annex B.

5..12.13.2 When a footing is ncluded n the rngwall desgn, e effective weight of the soil above the footing may be
ncluded n the counterbalancing weight.

SECTION o_FABRICATION

6.1

General

6.1.1 Workmanship

, 6.t.t.l

All work of fabricating API e.g. 650 tanks shall be done in accordance with ths standard and with e

permissible ahematives specified n the Purchaser's nqury or order. The workmanship and fnsh shall be frst class
in every respect and subject to the closest inspection by the Manufacturerb inspector even f the Purchaser has
waived any part of the insPection.

6.1.1.2 When material requires straghtening, the work shall be done by Fessing or another noninjurious method

prior to any layout or shapig. Heatin or hammering s not permssible unless the material s mantaned at forging
temperaure during straightening.

6.1.1.3 Materials used to ad ine fabrcation of tanks shall not have a detrimental efiect on the structural integrity
of e tank. Lubrcants, crayons, adhesives, and anti-weld spaer compounds shall not contain materials that will be
detrimental to the tank, e.!. sufur and chloride compounds for stainless steel materials. Attachments that wll be

(0.5 n.) of
welded to the pressure bou;dary shall not have a znc or cadmium coatng in the weld area within 12 mm
the weld.

6.1.2

Fnish of Plate Edges

The edges of plates may be sheared, machned, chipped, or machine gas cut. Shearing shall be limted to plates less
io mr 1:7s r., rhick used for butt-wetded joins andio plates less thn or equal to 16 mm (s/8 in.)
r"
"rfirlio
thick used for lap-welded jonts.

. NOTE

Wiih the purchaser's approval, the shearing lm ation on plates used for hfi-welded jonts may be increased lo a

thickness less than or equalto 16 mm (5/8 in.).

When edges of plates are gas tt, the resulting surfaces shall be uniform and srnooth and shall be freed from scale
and slag ccumulations beiore wetding. After cut or sheared edges are wre brushed, the fine flm of rust adhering to
me eOgs need not be removed befoie weldng. Circumferentil edges of roof and bottom plates may be manually
gas cut.

6.1.3 Shapn{, of Shell Plates

Figure 6-1 provdes critera for shaping of plates to the curvature of the tank prior to nstallation in the.tank. Shaping of
ptes conuneny with inshllaon in e tank shell s permmed if the tank diameter exceeds the limit in Fgure 6.1 or
if the Mandacturer's altemate procedure for any diameter has been accepted by the Purchaser.

6.1.4

Markng

All specal plates that are cut to shape before shipment as well as roof-supporting structural members shall be
marked as shown on the Manufacturer's drawings.

6.1.5 Shipping
plates and iank material shall be loaded n a rnanner that ensures delvery without damage. Bolts, nuts, npples, and
other small parts shall be boxed or put n kegs or bags for shpment. All flange faces and other machined surfaces
shall be protected against conosion and from physcal damage.

6-'1

API SIANoARD 650

6-2

.J

40

60

120

t
Shaping required
prior to installation
o)

q8

16

,9

1rg
o

1tz

U)

3la

10

Shapng not required

ll
18

31rc

Tank Dameter

36

NOTE Any combinaton

of dameter and thickness falling on or

above the solid line requires shapng prior to insiallaton.

Fgure 6.1-Shaping of Plates

6.2

Shop lnspecton

6.2.1 The

Purchaser's inspector shall be permitted free enry to all parts of the Manufacturer's plant that are
concerned with the contract whenever any work under the contract is being performed. The Manufacturer shall afford
the Purchasers nspector all reasonable facilties to assure the inspector that the material is being furnished in
accordance with this standard. Also, the Manufacturer shall fumsh samples or specmens of materals for the
purpose of qualifyng welders in accordance with 9.3.
Unless otherwise specifed, nspecton shall be made at the place of mandacture pror to shipment. The Manufactrer
shall gve the Purchaser ample notice of when the mill will roll the plates and when fabrcaton will begin so that the
Purchaser's nspector may be present when required. The usual mill test of plates shall be deemed sufficient to prove
the quality of the steel furnished (except as noted n 6.2.2). Mill test reports or certmcates of complance, as provided
for in the material specification, shall be furnished to the Purchaser onty when the opton s specmed in the original
contract that they be provded.

6.2.2

Mll and shop inspecton shall not release the Manufacturer from responblity for replacng any defectve
material and for repairing any defectve workmanshp at rnay be dlscovered n the leld.

6.2.3 Any materal or workmanship that in any way fails to meet the requrements of ths standard may be rejected
by the Purchaser's inspector, and e material involved shall not be used under the contract. Material that stnws
njurious defecb subsequent to its acceptance at e mill, subsequent to its acceptance at the Manufacturerb works,
or durng erection and inspectng of the tank will be rejected. The Manacturer will be nofied of this n wrtng and wll
be requred to fumish new material prompdy and make the necessary replacements or suitable repairs.

WEtoEo TANKS FoR OlL SToRAGE

6.2.4.a fhe Manacturer shall visually inspect all edges of shell and roof plates before installing the plates n the
tank or before inserting a nozzle into the plate to determine if laminations are present. lf a lamination is visually
detected, the Manufacturer shall ultrasoncally examine the area to determine the extent of the laminations and shall
rqect the plate or make repars in accordance with 6.2 4b.

For laminatons found not exceeding 75 mm (3 in.) n length or 25 mm (1 in.) in depth, repairs may be made
by edge gouging and rewelding to seal the minaton. The Mandacturer shall submit the edge repair procedure for
elrcns acieitance prior toihe start of fabricaton. For laminations exceeding these lmits, the Manufacturer shall

6.2.4.b

either reject th plate'or repar the plate by enfrely removing the lamination. Before making such repars the
Manufaciurer shail document the extent of th lamination and submit a case-specfc repair Procedure for Purchaser
approval.

SECTION 7_ERECTON

7.1

General

7.f.1

Requred foundation and grade work shall be supplied by the Purchaser, unless otherwise specified in the

the
Contract. ihe Manufacturer shai check level tolerances and contour before staning work, and shall notify
purchaser of any deficiency discovered that might affect the qual of the finished wofk. Deficiences noted shall be
rectfed by the Purchaser unless otherwise agreed by the Mantfacturer'
maniain
After the purchaser has tumed the tank foundalon over to the Mantfacturer, e Manufacturer shall
or
metal
scraps,
cnders,
clay,
coal,
such
as
the grade under the tank n true profile and free of foregn materials
grade
or
foundaon
the
to
either
damage
repair
any
nim'ai o, ueg"taOte maner of any so. The Manufactureishall
sulace caused by the Manufacturer s operaons.

7.1.2

7.1.3 Coang or foreign

materal shall not be used between surfaces n contact in the constructon of the tank,

except as permitted by 7 .2.'1.1o.

be as specmed n
Coatng or othef protecton for structural work nside and outside of the tank shall
contraci and shall be apPlied by competent workers'

7.1.4

notceable projections
All temporary attachme s welded to the exterior of the tank shall be removed and any
tearng of the plate
of
nadvertent
ln
the
event
plate.
ot weld metalitrall-be ground smooth with the suface of the
grindng of the
and
subsequent
welding
by
iepaired
be
when atrachments are iemoved, the damaged area shall
surface to a smooth condton.

7.1.5

ncluding the shell, roof, tank bottom' roof

projections of weld metal shall be groxnd
columns and other internal stsuctufes shall be removed and any notceable
the damaged area shall be
smooth. ln the event of inadvenent tearing of the plate when ttachments are removed,
work must be completed
This
r"puir"O Uy welding and subsequent grining of e surface to a smooth conditon.
of
a floating roof, and any
floatng
uefore tre apptfariion of intemai linn, rhe;ir rasing of a fixed rool the nitial
other circumstance whereby projecons may cause damage.

7.1.6 All temporary attachments welded to the interior of the tank,

7.2

Details of Weldng

7.2.1 General
gas
7.2.1.1 Tanks and ther suctufal a[achments shall be welded by lhe shelded metal-arc, gas metal-arc,
equpment'
process
suitble
using
or
electrogas.
electroslag,
submerged-arc,
oxyfuel, flux-cored arc,
irngi

and the
tt" oxyfet, electroslag, or electrogai process shall be by agreement between the Manufacturer
ot"n-ura,
tank
weldng
purchaser. Us of ttre oryfuel irocess is noipermitted when impact testing of the material is required. All
with
lhe
n
accor_dance
sntt Oe pertormeO by- manual, semiautomatc arc, machine, or automatc weldng
the
lX
of
in
Section
,"qrr"r"k of Secto 9 of this standard and welding procedure specificaons as descrbed

uid

nShE Coe. welOng shall be performed in a manner that ensures complete fusion with the base metal.

At the Purchaser's request, the Purchaser may designate aPplicable sections of API 582 for supplementary
welding guidelines and practices.

7.2.1.2

7.2.1.3 No welding of any kind shall be performed when the sufaces to be welded are wet from rain, snow or ice;
when rain or sno*-6 fallirig on such surfces; or during periods of high winds unless the welder and the work are

properly shielded. elso, pre-heat shall be applied when metal temperature is below the temperature required by Table
i.l aO faOle 7.1b. ln that case the base metal shall be heated to at least the temperature indcated(3n Table 7.1a
in ) ahead of
and Table 7.1b within 75 mm (3 in.) of the place where welding s to be started and mantained 75 mm
the arc.
1.1

API STANoARD 650

1-2

Table
Material Group
per Table 4-4a
Groups l, ll, lll
tA

&

Groups lV lVA,

7.1a-(Sl) Minimum Preheat Temperatures

Thickness (t) of

Minimum Preheat

Thcker Plate (mm)

Temperature

t<32
32< t<40

0"c
10 .c

f > 40

93 'C

t<32

10.c

32<t<40

V&VI

40

> 40

"c

93 "C

Table 7.1b-(USC) Mnmum Preheat Temperatures

Material Group
per Table 4-4b
Groups l, ll, lll
& ItA

Thckness (/) of
Thcker Plate (in.)

Mnmum Preheat
Temperature

t<1.25

32 "F

1.25 < 1< 1.50

50 "F

1.50
t<

Groups lV lVA,

V&VI

.25

1.25 < 1< 1.50

,>

1.50

200 .F
50

.F

100 "F

2m

"F

7.2.1.1

Each layer of weld metal or multlayer welding shall be cleaned of slag and other deposits before the next
layer s appled.

7.2.1.5 The edges

of all welds shall merge smoothly with the surface of the plate wthorit a sharp angle.

7.2.1.6 All welding shall

be free from coarse ripples, grooves, overlaps, abrupt rdges, and valle)6 that interfere with

nterpretaton of NDE results.

7.2.1.7

During the weldng operation, plates shall be held n close contact at all lapjclints.

.7.2.1.8

The method proposed by the Manufacturer for holding the plates in position for welding shall be submined to
the Purchaser's inspector for approval if approval has not aheady been gven n writng by the Purchaser.

.9

7.2.f
Tack welds used during the assembly of verticaljonts of tank shells shall be removed and shall not reman in
the fnshedjon6 when thejoinb are welded manually. When suchjons are welded by the submerged-arc process,
the lack welds shall be thoroughly cleaned of all welding slag but need not be removed if they are sound and are
thoroughly fused into the subsequently applied weld beads.

Whether tack welds are removed or left n place, they shall be made using a fllet-weld or butt-weld procedure
qualifed in accordarice with Section lX of the ASME Code. Tack welds to be left in place shall be made by welders
qualmed in accordance wi Section lX of the ASME Code and shall be visually examned for defecls, whch shall be
removed if found (see 8.5 for criteria for visual examinaton).

7.2.1.10 lf protective coatngs are to be used on surfaces to be welded, the coangs shall be ncluded in weldingprocedure qualmcation tests for the brand formulation and maxmum thickness of coating to be applied.

7-3

WELoED TaNKs FoR OrL SToRAGE

7.2.1.11 Low-hydrogen electrodes shall be used for all manual metal-arc welds n annular rings and shell courses,
ncluding the attachment of the frst shell course to bottom or annular plates, as follows.

a)

Where the plates are thcker than 12.5 mm (r/2 n.) (based on the thckness of the thicker member being ioned)
and made of materal from Groups l-lll.

b)

For all thicknesses when the pates are made of material ftom Groups lV, IVA'

V and Vl.

Non-structural small attachments such as nsulation clps, studs and pins but not insulation support rings or
bars may be welded by the arc stud, capacitor dscharge or shielded rnetal arc process to the exterior of the shell
irrcluding reinforcing pltes or PWHT assembles and roof either before or aftef hydrostatic tesiing s performed, hjt
before the tank will be flled with product provded:

7.2,1.'l2

a)

The attachment locafons meet the spacng requirements of 5.8.1.2a.

b)

The arc stud weldng process s lmited to 'lO mm (3/0 in.) maxmum darneter studs or equvalent cross-seclon.

c)

The maximum shielded rnetal arc electrode is limited to 3 mm (1/8 n.) diarneter and shall be a low-hydrogen type.

d)

The atrachment welds, except for those made by the capacitor discharge method, shall be insPected per 7.2.3.6.
The attachment welds rnade by the capacitor discharge method shall be visually examined for all tyPes and
groups of shell materials.

e)

All stud welding and capactor discharge procedures have been qualfed in accordance with ASME Section lX.
Capacitor dischlrge procedures do not requre procedure qualifcation provded the power output s 125 watt-sec
or less.

The shelded metal arc weld procedures shall meet the requirernents of Section 9 for qualificaon for use.

7.2.2 Bottoms
7.2.2.1 After the bottom plates are laid ort and tacked, they shall

be joned by welding the joints n a sequence that

the Manufacturer has found to result in the least distorton from shrinkage and thus to provide as nearly as possble a
plane surface.
weldng of the shellto the bottom shall be practically completed before the welding of bottomjoints that
may have been left open to compensate for shrinkage of any welds previolsly made is completed.

7,2.2.2 fhe

7.2.2.3 Shell plates may be aligned by metal clips attached to the bottom plates, and the shell may be tack welded

to the bottom before connuous welding is started between the bottom edge of the shell plate and the bottom plates.

7.2.3 Shells
7.2.3.1 plates to bejoined by butr welding shall be matched accurately and retaned in postion during the welding
o/o
operaon. Misalignment n completed vencljoints for plates greater than 16 mm (5/8 in.) thick shall not exced'lo
(s/e
in.)
(t/a
plates
16
mm
less than or equalto
in., whichre, is less; misalignment for
oi th" ptut" tt ick"ss or 3 mm
thick shall not exceed 1.5 mm (1/16 in.).
tn completed horizontal butt jonts, the upper pate shall not project beyond the face of th_e lower plate at any
point by more than 20 9/o of e thckness of the upper plate, with a maxmum projection of 3 mm_(r/s n.); however, for
upper flates less than 8 mm (s/to in.) thck, the naximum projecon shall be limited to 1.5 mm (1/lo in.).

7.2.3.2

The upper plate at a horzontal buttjoint shall have a 4:1 taper when its thckness is more than 3 mm (1/8 in.)
greater than the lower plate.

7.2.3.3

API STANoARo 650

1-4

7.2.3.1 lhe reverse side of double-welded butt jonts shall be thoroughly cleaned in a manner that will leave the
exposed $Jrface sasfaclory for fusion of the weld metal to be added, prior to the applcton of the frst bead to the
second side. Ths cleaning may be done by chpping; grinding; rnehing oLrt; or where the back of the initial bead s
smooth and faee from crevices that might entrap slag, another method that, upon field nspection, is acceptable to the
Purchaser.

7.2.3.5 For crcumferential and verticaljonts in tank shell courses consfuded of mrterial more than 40 mm

(11/2

in.) thck (based on the thckness of the thicker plate at the joint), rrultpass weld procedures are requred, with no
pass over 19 mm (3/4 in.) thick permitted.

7.2.3.6 The requirements of ths secton shall be followed when weldng to Group lV, lVA, V, and Vl materials.
Permanent and temporary attachrnents (see 7.2.1.11 for nformation on shell-tGbottom welds) shall be welded with
low-hydrogen electrodes. Both permanent and temporary attachmenE shall be welded in accordance with a
procedure that minmizes the potential for underbead crackng. The welds of permanent attachmens (not including
shell-to-bottom welds) and areas where temporary auachrnents are removed, shall be examined vsually and by
either the rnagnetic particle method or by the liquid penetrant method (see 8.2,8.4, or 8.5 for the appropriate
examnaon criteria).

7.2.3.7 Completed welds of stress-relieved assemblies shall be examined by visual, as well as by magnetic partcle
or penetrant rnethods, after stress relief, but before hydrostatic test.
7.2.3.8 Flush-type connections shall be nspected according to 5.7.8.11.

7.2.4 Shell-to-BottomWelds
7.2./t.1 The initial weld pass inside the shell shall have all slag and non-rietals rernoved from the surface

of the weld
and then examined for its entre circumlerence both visually and by one of the followng methods to be agreed to by
Purchaser and the Manufacturer. lf method "a" s applied, either inside or outside weld may be deposited frst. lf
method b, c, d, or e s applied, the inside weld shall be deposited frst:

a) magnaic panicle;
b)

applying a solvent lqud penetrant to the weld and then applyng a developer to the gap between the shell and the
bottom and examining for leaks after a minmum dwell me of one hour;

c)

applying a water-soluble lqud peneant to either sde of the joint and then applying a developer to the other sde
of the jont and examining for leaks after a mnmum dwell tme of one hour;

d)

applying a hgh flash-point penetrang oil such as light diesel to the gap between the shell and the bottom, letting
stand tor at least four hours, and examinng e weld fof evdence of wcking.

NOTE Residual oil may reman on the surfaces yet to be welded even aner the cleaning required below and comamnaton of
the subsequent weld is possible.
e)

Apptying a bubblejormng solution to the weld, using a right angle vacuum box, and examining for bubbles.

Thoroughly clean all residual examnaton mateials from the as yet to be welded sufaces and from the unwelded gap
between the shell and bottom. Remove defective weld segments and reweld as required. Reexamine the repaired
welds and a minimum of 150 mm (6 in.) to either side in the manner descrbed above. Repeat ths clean-removerepair-examine-and-clean process unlthere s no edence of leakirE. Complete allweldng passes of thejont both
insde and outside the shell. Visually examne the fnished weld surfaces of thejoint both insde and ortsde the shell
for their enre crcumference.

WELDED faNKS FoR OtL SroRAcE

7-5

nitial weld passes, inside and outside of the stlell, shall have all slag and
welds and the welds shall be examined vsually. Additionally, after the
from
surface
of
the
removed
the
non-metals
compleon of the inside and outsde fillet or partial penetfation welds, the welds may be tested by Pressurzing the
volume beNveen the insde and ouEide welds with ar pressure to 1OO kPa (15 lbf/in.2 gauge) and applyng a soluton
flm to both welds. To assure that the air pressure reaches all parts of the welds, a sealed blockage in the annular
passage between the nside and outsde welds must be provded by welding at one or more ponE. Additionally, a
small Ppe couplng communcatng with the volume between the welds must be connected at one end and a pressure
gauge connected to a couplng on the other end of the segment under test.

7.2.4.2 As an altemative to 1.2.4.1,lhe

7.2.4.3 By agreernent between the Purchaser and the Mandacturer, the examinatons of 7 .2-4.'l may be waived if
the following examinatons are peformed on the entire crcumference of the weld(s).

a)

Visually examine the intial weld pass (nside or outside).

b)

Visually examine the finshed joint welded surfaces, both inside and outside the shell.

c)

Examine either sde of the fnished joint weld surfaces by magnetc partcle, or liqud penetrant, or right angle
vacuum box.

7.2.5 Roofs
Except for the stiFllaton that the structural framng (such as the rafters and girders) of the roof must be reasonably
true to lne and surface, ths standard does not nclude specal stipulatons for erection of the roof.

7.3

Examination, lnspection, and Repairs

7.3.1 General
7.3.1.1 The Purchaser's nspector shall at all times have fiee entry to all parts of the job whle work under the

contract is being performed. The MandactJrer shall afford the Purchaser's nspector reasonable faclities to assure
the nspector at the work is being performed n accordance with this standard.

7.3.1.2 Any material

or workmanship shall be subject to the replacement requirements of 6.2 3.

Materal that is damaged by defedive workmanship or that s otherwise defective will be rejected. The
Manufacturer will be notifed of this in wring and will be required to fumish new material promptly or to conect
defectve workmanshp.

7.3.i.3

2.3.1.4 Before acceptance, all work shall be completed to the sasfaction of the Purchaser's inspecto and the
enre tank, when filled wth oil, shall be tght and free from leaks.

7.3.2

Examnation of Welds

7.3.2.1 Butt-Welds
Complete penetration and compleie fuson are required for welds jonng shell plates to shell plates. Examnation for
the quality of the welds shall be made using ether the radographc mehod specified in 8.1 or altematively, by
agreement between the Purchaser and the Manufacturer, using the ultfasonic method specified n 8.3.1 (see Annex
Ur. ln addion to the radographic or ultrasonc examination, these welds shall also be vsually examined.

Furthermore, the Purchaser's inspector rnay visually examine all butt-welds for cracks, arc strkes, excessive

undercut, surface porosity, incomplete fuson, and other defects. Accepiance and repar criteria for the visual method
are specmed n 8.5.

API

7-6

STANoARD

650

7.3.2.2 Fillet Welds

Fillet welds shall be examined by the vsual method. The fnal weld shall be cleaned of slag and other deposits pror to
Visual examination acceptance and repair crtera are specified in 8.5.
examination.
I

7.3.2.3 Responsblity
The Manufacturer shall be responsible for making radiographs and any necessary repars; however, if the
Purchaser's nspeclor requires radiographs n excess of the number specifed in Secton 6, or requres chp-outs of
fllet welds n excess of one per 30 m (100 ft) of weld and no defect is dsclosed the additional examinations and
associated work shall be the responsibility of the Purchaser

7.3.3 Examination and Testing of the

Tank Bottom

Upon completion of weldng of the tank bonom, the bottom welds and plates shall be examned visually for any
potential defec and leaks. Partcular attenon shall apply to areas such as sumps, dents, gouges, three-plate lapls,
bonom plate breakdowns, arc strikes, temporary attachment rernoval areas, and weldng lead arc burns- Msual
examination acceptance and repar critera are specfied n 8.5. ln addition, all welds shall be tested by one of the
following methods.

a)

A va@um-box test in accordance with 8.6.

b)

A tracer gas test in accordance with 8.6.1

c)

After at least the lowest shell course has been atiached to the bottom, water (to be suppled by the Purchaser)
shall be pumped undemeath the bottom. A head of 150 mm (6 n.) of liqud shall be mantained using a temporary
dam to hold that depth around the edge of the bottom. The line containng water for testng may be installed
temporarily by running it through a manhole to one or more temporary flange connectons n the bottom of the

1.

tank, or the line may be installed permanently in the subgrade beneath the tank. The rnethod of installaton should
be governed by the nature of the subgrade. Reasonable care shall be taken to preserve the prepared subgrade
under the tank.

7.3.4 lnspecton of Reinforcing-Plate Welds

After fabrcation is completed but before the tank is filled with test water, the reinforcing plates shall be tested by the
Manufacturer by applying up to 10O kPa (15 lbn.z) gauge pneumatc pressure between the tank shell and the
renforcement plate on each opening using the telltale hole specfied n 5.7.5.'1. While each space is subjected to such
pressure, a soap flm, linseed o1, or another material suitable for the detection of leaks shall be applied to all
attachment welding around e reinforcement, both nside and outside the tank.

7.3.5 Testng of the Shell

After

entire tank and roof structure s completed, the shell (except for

shell of tanks designed in accordance

wi Annex F) shall be tested by one of the following rnethods, as speciled on the Data Sheet, Lin 14.
1) lf water

s avalable for testing the shell, the tank shall be flled with water as follows: (1) to the maximum design
liqud level, II, (2) to a tank with a tight rool to 50 mm (2 in.) above the weld connectng the roof plate or
compression bar to the top angle or shell; (3) to a level lower than that specmed in Subtem 1 or 2 when
restricted by overflows, an nternal floatng rool or other freeboard by agreement between ttle Purchaser and
the Manufacturer, or 4) to a level of seawater producrE a bottom of shell hoop stress equal to that produced by
a fullheght fresh water test. The tank shall be inspected frequently during the fillng operation, and any welded
jonts above the test-water level shall be examned n accordance with ltem 2 below. Ths test shall be

conducted before permanent external pipng is connected to the tank. Attachments to the shell defined n
5.8.1.1, located at least 1 m (3 ft) above the water level, and roof appurtenances may be welded during the
filling of the tank. After completion of the hydro-test, only non-structural smal attachments may be welded to the
ta

nk n accorda nce with

7 .2. 1 .1 1 .

WELDEo TANKS FoR OtL SToRAGE

1-1

2) lf sufficient water to fill the tank is not available, the tank rnay be tested by (1) painting all of the joints on the
nside with a hghly peneating oil, such as autornobile sping oil, and carefully examinng the outside of tlle
joins for leakag; iZ) applying vacuum to either sde of the jonts or apPlyng ntemal air Pressure as sPecmed
ior the roof t in 7.3.7 nd-carefully examining the joints for leakage; or (3) using any combnation of the
meods stpulated in 7.3.5, Subitems 1 and 2.

7.3.6 HydrostaticTesting Requrements

7.3.6.1 Ths hydrostatic test of the tank shall be conducted before permanent extemal pipng is connected to the
tank. Attachments to the shell defined in 5.8.1.'1, located at least 1 m (3 ft) above the water level, and roof

appurtenances may be welded during the filling of the tank. After completion of the hydro-test,.only non-structural
trall anu"hments inay be welded to-ttre tant in accordance with 7 .2.1.12- Any welded joints above the test-water
level shallbe examined for leakage by one ofthe following rnethods:

1) applyng a hghly penetratng oil on all interor weld joints, e.g. automoble spring oil, and carefully examinng the
orrtside of thejonts for leakage;

2) applying vacuum ro ether sde of thejoints or applyng internal air pressure as specfied for the roof test n 7.3.7
and carefully examning thejonts for leakage; or

3) using any combnation of the methods stipulated

n Subitems 1 and 2.

7.3.6.2 The Manufacturer shall be responsible for the followng.

1)' preparng the tank for tesring. Ths shall include removal of all trash, debrs, grease, o1, weld scale, weld
any other foreign matter from the nterior and the roof(s) of the trnk'
.puer,
"d
2) Furnishing, layng, and removng all lnes from the water source te-n location and to the water dsposal Pont as
prescribed on the Data Sheet, Line 14.

3)

permits for dsposal of

Fllng and empryng the tank. (See 1.3 for Purchaser responsbility to obtan any required
water.)

4) Cleaning, rinsing, drying, or other prescribed activty, if specmed on Data Sheet, Line 14, followng the hydrotest to make the tank ready for operation.

5) Takng se ement measurements (unless explicitly waved by the Purchaser on the Data Sheet, Lne 14).

6) Furnishing allother test materals and facilies, including blnds, bolting, and gaskets (see 4.9).

7) Checking the wind girders for propef dranage during or following the hydro-test. lf water is retained, additional
dranage shall be provded subject to the Purchaser's approval.

7.3.6,3 The Purchaser shall be responsible for the followng.

l)'

Fumishng and dsposng of le water for hydrGtestirE the tank ftom the water source tie-in location as
designate on the ata heet, Lne 14. lf biocide or caustic additions are specified to the Manacturer, the
purc-haser is responsble for determinng or identifyng disposal resictons on the eated water.

2) Specifyng the test water quality. Potable water

s prefered for hydro-testing. Ths does not.preclude lhe use of

condesate. reverse osmosis water, well water, river water, or sea water. The Purchaser shall consider issues
such as{ow temperature brie fracture, freeze damagq amount of suspended solds, sanitation ssues, animau
plant incubao and/or groMh, acdity, general corrosion, ptting, protectng aganst . cathodic cells.
microbiologically-induced cnosion, material dependent sensivity to trace chemical attack, dsposal, rnsing,

1-8

API SfANDARD 650

and resduals left n the tank after emptying. lf the Purchaser-supplied test water causes corroson, the
Purchaser is responsible for the required repars.

3) For the follo\ ring rnetallurgies, describe on the Data Sheet, Line 14, (using a Supplemental Specificaton) any
addtional restrctions on the water quality.

a)

Carbon

b)

Stanless Steel-See Annex S.

c)

Aluminum Components-See Annex H.

eel-For carbon steel equpment where water contacl exceeds 14 days, including fillng and
dranng (e.9. consder adding an oxygen scavenger and a bocide, and rase the pH by the additon of
caustic).

7.3.6.4 For carbon and low-alloy steel tanks, the tank metal temperature durng hydrostatic testing shall not be
colder than the desgn metal temperature per Fgure 4.1, as long as the water s prevented from freezng. The
Manufaclurer s responsible for heang the test water, if heating is required, unless stated otherwise on the Data
Sheet, Line 14.

7.3.6.5 The minimum fill and discharge rate, if any, shall be specified by the Purchaser on the Data Sheet, Line 23.
When settlement measurements are specified by the Purchaser, the maxlmum llling rates shall be as follows, unless
otherwise restricted by the requrements in 5.8.5.
Water Fllng Rate

Bottom Cou6e Thickness

Tank Ponion

Maxmum Fllng Rate

Top course

300 mm (12 in.)/hr

Below lop course

460 mm (18 n.)/hr

Top thrd of tank

230 mm (9 in.)/hr

Middle third of tank

3O0 (12 n.)ihr

Bonom third of tank

460 (18 in.)/hr

Less than 22 mm (7/8 n.)

22 mm (7/B n.) and thcker

Fllng may continue whle elevaon measurements are beng made as long as the change n water elevation for a set

of readings does not exceed 300 mm (12 n.). Unless waived on the Data Sheet, the Manufacturer shall make shell
elevation measurements in accordance with the following.

a)

Shell elevaton measurerrents shall be made at equally-spaced intervals around the tank circurnference not
exceeding 10 m (32 ft). The minmum number of stell measurement ponts shall be eght.

b)

Observed elevations shall be referred to a permanent benchmark. The level instrument shall be set up at least
11/2 times tank diameter away from the tank when tank elevaon readings are taken. Six ses of settlement
readngs are required:

1) Before stan of the hydrostatic test;

2) With tank flled to lk test height (1600 mm

[2 ftl);

3) With tank llled to

1/2

test height (1600 mm [2 ftl);

4) With tank flled to

3/4

test height (i6oo mm [2 ftD;

WELDED TaNxs FoR OtL SToRAGE

\/

5) At least 24 hours after the tank has been filled to the maximum test height. Ths 24-hour period may be
incresed to duraton specified on the data sheet if the Purchaser so requires for conditons such as:

i.

The tank is the frst one n the area,

The tank has a larger capacty than any other exsting tank in the area,

i. The tank has a hgher unit bearing load than any other existing tank

iv.

in the area,

There s a question regarding the rate or rnagntude of setement that will take place;

6) After tank has been emptied of test water.

NOTE

The three sels of settlemert readings described n paragraphs 2, 3, and 4 above may be omitred if specmed by the

Purchaset

7.3.6.6 lf setement measurements are specifed by the Purchase any differenal settlernent gfeater an 13 mm
per 10 m (1/z in. per 32 ft) of circumference or a unifom senlement over 50 mm (2 n.) shall be reported to the
Purchaser for evalualion. Filling of the tank shall be stopped untl cleared by the Purchaser.

7.3.6.7 For floating-roof tanks, the maximum and minimum annular space between the shell and the roof rim plate
p{or to initial flotaton and at the maxmum test fll heght shall be measured and recorded.

7.3.6.8 lntemal bottom elevation measurements shall be made before and after hydrostatic tesling. Measurements

shall be made at maximum intervals of 3 m (10 ft) measured on diarnetrical lines across the tank. The dametrical

lines shall be spaced at equal angles, wi a maxmum separaton measured at the tank circumference of 10 m (32 ft).
A minimum of four diametrical lnes shall be used.

\-

7,3.6.9 All elevation rneasurements shall be included in the Manacturer's Post-Consucon Docurnent Package
(see W.1.5).

7.3.7 Testing of the Roof

7.3.7.1 Upon completion. the roof of a tank designed to be gas{ight (except for roofs designed under

.3.7

.2, F.4.4,

and F.7.6) shall be tested by one of the following methods.

a)

Applying intemal air pressure not exceeding the weight of the roof plates and applying to the weld jonE a bubble
soluton or other material suitable for the detection of leaks.

b)

Vacuum testing the weld joints n accordance with 8.6 to detect any leaks.

7.3.7.2 Upon completion, the roof of a tank not desgned to be gas-tght, srrch as a tnk with peripheral circulation
vents or a tank with free or open vents, shall receive only visual examnation of its weld jon, unless otherwse I
specified by the Purchaser.

7.4
.

Repars to Welds

7,4.1 All defects found n welds shall be clled to the attenon of the Purchaser's nspector, and the nspector
approval shall be obtained before the defects are repared. All completed repairs shall be subject to the approval of
the Purchaser's nspector. Acceptance criteria are specifed n 8.2, 8.4, and 8.5, as applicable.
Pnhole leaks or porosity n a tank bonom joint may be repared by applying an addtional weld bead over the
defective area. Other defects or cracks n tank bottom or tank roof (ncluding floang roofs n Annex C) jonts shall be
repaired as requred by 8.1.7. Mechanical caulking is not permmed.

7.t.2

\-

7.4.3

All defects, cracks, or leaks in shelljonts or the shell-to-bottom jont shall be repared in accordance with 8.1.7.

API

7-10

STANDARo

650

7.4.4

Repairs of defects dscovered after the tank has been flled with water for testing shall be made with the water
level at least 0.3 m (1 ft) below any point beng repaired or, f repairs have to be made on or near the tank bottom, with
the tank empty. Welding shall not be done on any tank unless all connecting lines have been completely blinded.
Repairs shall not be attempted on a tank that s flled with oil or that has contaned oil until the tank has been emped,
cleaned, and gas freed. Repairs on a tank that has contaned oil shall not be attempted by the Manufacturer unless
the manner of repair has been approved n wrtng by the Purchaser and the repars are made in the presence ofthe
Purchaser's inspector.

7.5

DimensionalTolerances

7.5.1 General
The purpose of the tolerances given in 7.5.2 through 7.5.7 is to produce a tank of acceptable appearance and to
permit poper functioning of floatng roofs. Measurements shall be taken prior to tlle hydrostatic water test. Unless
waived or modfed by the Purchaser on Data Sheet, Lne 15, or established separately by agreement between the
Purchaser and the Manacturer, e following tolerances apply.

7.5.2 Plumbness
a)

The maximum out-of-plumbness of the top of the shell relatve to the bottom of the shell shall not exceed 1/2oo of
the total tank height. The out-of-plumbness in one shell course shall not exceed the permssible variations for
flatness and wavness as specifed n ASTM AOWA6, ASTM A20lvUA20, or ASTM A4801WA480, whchever is
applicable.

b) The

maximum out-of-plumbness of roof columns, gude poles, or other vertcal intemal components shall not
exceed 1/zoo of the total heght. The 1/2OO criteria shall also apply to fixed roof columns. For tanks with internal
floang roofs, apply the criteria of ths secton or Annex H, whchever is more stringent.

7.5.3 Roundness
Radi measured at 0.3 m (1 ft) above the bottom corner weld shall not exceed the following tolerances:
Tank Dameter
m (ft)

Radus Tolerance
mm (in.)

< 12 (40)

1 13 (1/2)

Fmm 12 (40) to < 45 (150)

a 19 (3/1)

From 45 (150) to < 75 (250)

> 75 (25O)

2s

(l)

32 (1111)

7.5.4 Local Devations

Local devations from the theoretical shape (for example, weld dscontinuities and flat spots) shall be limited as
follows.

a)

Deviaons (peaking) at vertical weld joints shall not exceed 13 mm (1/2 in.). Peakng at vertical weld jonts shall be
determned usng a horzontal sweep board 90O mm (36 in.) long. The sweep board shall be made to the nomnal
radius of the tank.

b)

Devatons (bandng) at horizontal weld jcnts shall not exceed 13 mm (1/2 n.). Banding at horizontal weld jonts
shall be determined usng a straight edge vertical sweep board 900 mm (36 n.) long.

c) Flat spots measured n the vertical

requrements gven in 7.5.2.

plane shall not exceed the appropriate plate flatness and waviness

WTOEO fANKS fOR

\'

O[

7.11

STORAGE

7.s.5 Foundations
.5.2, 7 .5.3, and 7.5.4, it s essential that a foundaton tfue to the
the trueness of the
plane be provded for the tank erection. The foundaton should have adequate bearing to rnaintain

7.5.5.1 To achieve the tolerances specified

foundaon (see Annex B).

7.5.5.2 Where foundations true to a horizontal plane are specmed, tolerances shall be as follov.'s.
(1/8 n ) in
ringwall is provided under the shell' the top of the ringvvall shall be level withn 13 mm
from the
measured
any 9 m (ao 0 of th crcumference and within 16 mm (1i in.) in th total circumference
averaqe elevation.

a) where a concrete

within t3 mm (1/e in') in

b) Where a concrere ringwall is not provded, the foundation under the shell shall be level
rneasured from the
any 3 m (10ft) of the ccumference and within r13 mm (1/z in.) in the total circurnference
average elevation.

c)

(or width of the annular ring)'

whefe a concrete slab foundaon s provded, the first 0.3 m (1 ft) of the foundaon
with the concrete ringwall
comply
shall
center,
the
measured from the ouSide of the iank radially towards
(1/z in.) of the design shape'
requrement. The remander of the foundation shll be withn r'13 mm

shall be calculated
7.5.5.3 Where a sloping foundation s specified, elevation diffefences about the circumference
from the
be
determined
oitr"r"n es abo the circumference shall
from the specfed ngh';"i. "t r"l
calculated
the
from
point. The actual elevaton differences shall not devate
hish "l"i,ution
thJ
elevaton

+;iiJ

actual

"f than the following tolerances

dfierences by more
a) where a concree ringwall

\-,

is pfovded, 13 mm (1/8 in.) in any

m (30 ft) of circumference and

total circumference'
ringwall s not pfovideil,
in the total circumference.

b) where a concrere

7.5.6

t3 mm

(1/s in.) in any 3 m (10 ft) of circumfefence and

Nozzles

Nozzles (excludng manholes) shall be nstalled within the follong tolerances:

a)specifiedpojectonfiomoutsideoftankshelltoextfemefaceofflange:15mm(3h6in.);
b)elevationofshellnozzleorradiallocationofaroofnozzle:rGmm(1/4n);

c)

flange tlt in any plane, measured on the flange face:

r1lz degree for nozzles greater than NPS 12

in

nomnal dameter'

13 mm (1/s in.) at the outsde flange dameter for nozzles NPS 12 and smaller;

d)

flange boh hole orentaton:

?.5.7

t3 mm

(1/8 n')'

Shell Manholes

Manholes shall be nstalled within the following tolerances:

\-.

t6 mm (1/l in ) in the

a)

(1/z in )
specified projection from ou6ide of shell to extrerne face of flange' t13 mm

b)

elevation and angular location,

c)

(1/2 in.)
flange lt in any plane, measured across e flange darnetef, 113 mm

i'|3

mm (1/2 in )

tl3

mm (1/2 in )

SECTION HTIETHODS OF EXAMINING JOINTS

NOTE

ln this standard, the term nspeclor, as used in sections

Purchaser's inspector.

8.1

and

vlll

of the ASME Code, shall be intefpreted to rnean the

RadographcMethod

n ther
For the purposes of ths paragraph, plates shall be considered of the same thickness when the dierence
specifii ordesign thckness does not exceed 3 mm (1/8 in.).

8.1.1 Application
butt-welds
Radographc examnation s requred for shell brtt-welds (see 8.1.2.2, 8.1.2.3, and 8.1.2.4), annular-plate
for
requked
s
not
(see
examnation
5.7.8.11). Radographic
(see g:l..g), an Rush-pe conneclions wth bun-welds
joinng
welds
roof
or
shell,
jonng
the
to
either
the top angle
e fottowing: roof-ptate Us, bonom-plate welds, welds
welds to the
ttre shell plaie to t bonom plate. welds n nozzle and manway necks made from plate, or appurtenance
tank.

8.1.2

Number and Locaton of RadiograPhs

g.1.2.1 Except when omined under the

provsons of A.3.4, radographs shall be taken as sPcifed in 8.1.2 through

8.1.9.

8.1.2.2 The following requrements apply to verticaljoints.

a)

For butt-welded joints in whch the thnner shell plate is less than or equal to 10 mm (3/8.n.) ck, one spot
radograph shall-be taken in re first 3 m (10 ft) of completed verticaljoint of each type and thckness welded by
eachivelder or weldng operator. The spot radraphs taken in the verticaljonts of the lowest course may be
used to meet the reqirements of llot g in Figure 8.1 for individual joints. Thereafter- without regard to the
number of welders or welding operators, one addional spot radiograph shall be taken in each.addional 30 m
(1OO ft) (approximately) and a;y;emaning major fraction of venicaljont of the same Pe and ickness. At least
)s " i t sebcted-spors sntt fe at.unains of vertical and horizontal jonts, with a minmum of two such
intersections per tank. ;n addion to e foregong requirements, one random spot radograph shall be taken n
each verticaljoint n the lowest course (see the top panel of Fgure 8.1).

b)

For hrtt-welded joints in whch the thinner shell plate s greatef than 10 mm (3/8 in.) hrt less than or equal to
25 mm (t n.) in thickness, spot radographs shall be taken according to ltem a. ln addion, alljunctions of venical
and horizon6ljoints in plates n ths ickness range shall be radiographed; each flm shall clearly show not less
than 75 mm (3 in.) of vertcal weld and 50 mm (2 n.) of weld length on each sde of the vertcal intersection. ln the
lowest course, two spot radiographs shall be taken in each vertcaljoint one of the radiograPhs_shall be as close
to the bonom as s paicaUtel ,irA me other shall be taken at random (see the center Panel of Fgure 8.1).

c)'

Verrcaljoinrs n which the shell plares are greater than 25 mm (1 in.) thick shall be fully radographed. Alljunctons
of venil and horizontaljoints ir ths thckess range shall be radographed; each flm shall cleariy show not less
(see
than 75 mm (3 in.) of venical weld and 50 mm (2 n-.) of weld length on each side of the veftical intefsecon
the bottom panel of Fgure 8.1).

The butt-weld around the perphery of an nsen plate that extends less than the adjacent shell course heght and
that contains shell openig (i.e.-nozzle, manway, flush-type cleanort, flush Fe shell'connection) and ther
renforcng elements shalt be comdetely radiographed.

8-1

8-2

API SfANDARD 650

Top of

shelll

(Numbers n squares refer to notes below)

50 mm (2 n

)-.

e
rn

I
lso mm (6iJ[

r---r--r----l_1tfi,o

r_l
r -'l

* p^,n. r",,r,, I l

150 mm (6 in.)l

fank bottom
Top or shell

_}

Plate Thckness

'.10 mm

(l

10 mm (Y3 n.)

(3/s n.)

> 10 mm (% n.)

25 mm

:i:r

50 mm (2 in.)

n.) maxmum

t0 rn

(3/r n.) < Plate

> 10 mm

Thicknsss s 25 rr ('l n.)

(3/s n.)

s 25 mm (1 n.)

> 25 mm (1 in.)

rant onom

Plate Thckness > 25 mm (1 n.)

tlotes:

1.

Vertical spor radbgraph in accordance with 8,1.2.2. ltem ar one

25 % ol wt*,l shal be at irtersecliorE.

h le f

3 m (10 ft) and one

h each 30 m (100 i) thereafrer,

2. fbizo al spot radbgraph in codance wilh 8.1.2.3: one in le rsl 3 m (t0 ) and ooe in each 60 m (2@ ) thereafrer.
3. Venical spot radbgrat in each vertaal seam n the lowest course Isee 8.1.2.2, ltem b). Spot radiivaphs at satjsfy le
requreents ol Note

1.
5.
6.

1 for

lhe lowes couse may be used to satsfy lhis requrement.

Spot radbgrapis of all ntersecrbns over 1O mm (3/s n.) (see 8.1.2.2, ltem b).
Spot radbgaph ot bonom of

eeh velticalseam

n lourest shell

couse ove.10 nyn

(3/s n.) (see 8.1.2.2. ltem b).

Comdete radocaph of each vertcal seam over 25 mm (1 n.). The comdere radogfaph may irrclude |e spot radographs
interseclion it itle flm has a mirimum width of lm mm (1 n.) (see 8.1.2.2, ltem c).

Fgure 8.1-Radiographic Requirements for Tank Shells

oa

WELDED faNKs FoR OrL SToRAGE

e)

8-3

The butt-weld around the periphery of an insert plate which extends to match the aq,acent shell course height
shall have the venical and the horizontal butt joints and the intersections of vertical and horizontal weld jonts
radiographed using the same rules that apply to the weldjoints n adjacent shell plates in the same shell course.

n the first 3 m (10ft) of completed horizontal buttjont of the same type

and thickness (based on the ickness of the thinner plate at thejoino wthout regard to the number of welders or
welding operators. Thereafter, one radograph shall be taken n each addional 60 m (200 ft) (approxmately) and any
remaning major fracton of horzontaljont of the sarne type and thckness. These radographs are in addition to the
radiographs ofjunctions of verticaljoints required by ltem c of 8.1 .2.2 (see Fgure 8. 1).

8.1.2.3 One spot radiograph shall be taken

8.1.2.4 The number of spot radographs required heren shall be applcable on a per tank basis, inespective of the
number of tanks being erected concurently or continuously at any locaton.

8.1.2.5 lt s recognzed that in many cases the same welder or welding operator does not weld both sides of a butt
jont. lf two welders or weldng operators weld opposite sides of a butt jont it s permissible to examine ther work wth
one spot radiograph. lf the radiograph is rejected, addtonal spot radiographs shall be taken to determne whether
one or both of the welders or welding operators are at fault.

8.1.2.6 An equal number of spot radiographs shall be taken fiom the work of each welder or welding operator

in

proportion to the length ofjoints welded.

8,1.2.7 As welding progresses, radographs shall be taken as soon as it is practcable. The locatons where spot
radiographs are to be taken may be determined by the Purchasers inspector.

8.1.2.8

Each radiograph shall clearly show a mnimum of 150mm (6 in.) of weld length. The film shall be centered
on the weld and shall be of srifficient wdth to permit adequate space for the locaon of denfcaton marks and an
image quality indcator (lQl) penetrometer

8.1.2.9 When bottom annular plates are required by 5.5.1, or by M.4.1, the radialjoints shall be radiographed as
follows: (a) For double-welded buttjoints, one spot radograph shall be taken on 10 o/o of the radialjolnts; (b) For
single-welded buttjonts with permanent or removable back-up bar, one spot radograph shall be taken on 50 % of the
radal joints. Extra care must be exercised in the interpretation of radiographs of single-welded joins that have a
permanent back-up bar. ln some cases, addional exposures taken at an angle may determine whether questionable
ndcations are acceptable. The minimum radiographc length of each radialjoint shall be 150 mm (6 in.). Locations of
radiographs shall preferably be at the outer edge of thejoint where the shell plate and annular platejon.

8.1.3 Technque
8.1.3.1

Except as modified in this secton, the radiographic examinaton method employed shall be n accordance
with secon v, Anicle 2, of the ASME code.

8.1.3.2

Personnel who pelorm and evaluate radographic examinaons according to this secton shall be qualifed
and cenifed by the Manufacturer as meeting the requirements of certifcation as generally outlned n Level ll or Level
lll of ASNT SNT-TC-1A (including applicable supplemens). Level-l personnel may be used if they are gven written
acceptance/rejection procedures prepared by Level-ll or Levellll personnel. These wrnen procedures shall contan
the applcable requrements of Secon V, Anicle 2, of the ASME Code. ln addition, all Level-l personnel shall be under
the drect supervision of Level-ll or Level-lll personnel.

8.'1.3.3 The requirements of T-285 n Section V Article 2, of the ASME Code are to be used only as a gude. Fnal
acceptance of radographs shall be based on whether the prescrbed pen et ramet er mage and the specifed hole
can be seen.

API SfANoARo 650

fnshed surface of the weld reinfo.cement al the location of the radograph shall either be flush wth the
plate or have a reasonably uniform crown not to exceed the following values:

8.1.3.4 The

mm (n.)

Maximum Thickness of
Renforcement
mm (in.)

< 13 (1/z)

1.5 (1/r6)

> 13 (1/2) to 25 (1)

2.5 (3h21

> 25 (1)

3 (1/8)

Plate

Thickness

8.1.4 Submission of Radiographs

Before any welds are repaired, the radographs shall be submitted to the inspector with any nfonnaton requested by
the nspector regardng the radiographic technque used.

8.1.5

Radographc Standards

Welds examined by radiography shall bejudged as acceptable or unacceptable by the standards of Paragraph UW51(b) in secron vlll of the ASME code.

8.1.6 Determination of Limts of Defectve Welding

When a secton of weld s shown by a radiograph to be unacceptable under the provisions of 8.1.5 or the lmts of the
defcent welding are not defined by the radiograph, two spots adjacent to the seclion shall be examned by
radiography; however, if the original radiograph shows at least 75 mm (3 n.) of acceptable weld between the defect
and any one edge of the flm, an addtonal radiograph need not be taken of the weld on that side of the defect. lf the
weld at either of the adjacent sectons fails to comply wth the requirements of 8.1.5, addtonal spots shall be
examined until the limits of unacceptable welding are determned, or the erector may replace all of the welding
performed by the welder or welding operator on that joint. lf the weldng s replaced, the nsPeclor shall have the
opon of requiring that one radograph be taken at any selected location on any otherjont on which the same welder
or weldng operator has welded. lf any of these additional spots fail to compy with the requrements of 8.1.5, the limits
of unacceptable welding shall be determined as specifed for the initial section.

8.1.7

Repair of Defective Welds

8.1.7.'l Defects in welds shall be repaired by chipping or melting out the defects from one side or both sdes of the
jont, as required, and reweldng. Only the cuttng out of defectve joints that s necessary to corect the defects is
requred.

'l

in joints shall be checked by repeang the orignal examination procedure and by

methods
of 7.3, sutiect to e aPproval of tfle Purchaser.
repeafng one of the tetng

8.1.7.2 All repaired welds

8.1,8

Record of Radiographic Examination

8.1.8.1 The Manufacturer shall prepare a radiograph map showing the fnal locaon of all radiographs taken along
with ttle flm idenfication marks.

s completed, the flrm shall be the property of the Purchaser unless otherwse agreed
Purchaser
and
the
Manufacturer.
upon by the

8.1.8.2 After the structure

WEIoED TaNKS FoR OrL SToFiAGE

\7

8.2

Magnetc Partcle Examnation

partcle examnaton is specified, the method of examination shall be in accordance with
Article
7,
of
the
ASME Code.
V

8.2.1 When magnetic

Secton

8.2.2

Magnetc particle examnation shall be performed in accordance with a written procedure that is certified by
the Manacturer to be in compliance with e applicable requirements of Section V of the ASME Code.

8.2.3

a)

b)

The Manufacturer shall determine that each magnetic particle examiner meeE the followng requirements.

Has vsion (wi conection, if necessary) to be able to read a Jaeger Type 2 standard chart at a dstance of not
less than 300 mm (12 n.) and is capable of dstingushng and differenating conrast between the colors used.
Examners shall be checked annually to ensure tha they meet these requremenE.
ls competent n the technique of the magnetic partcle examinaton method, including performing the examnation

and interpreng and evaluating the results; however, where the examnaton rnethod consists of more than one
operation, the examiner need only be qualmed for one or rnore of lhe operatons.

8.2.4

Acceptance standards and the removal and repar of defects shall be n accordance with Section Vlll, Annex
6, Paragraphs 6-3, 6-4, and 6-5, of the ASME Code.

8.3

UltrasonicExamination

8.3.1 Ultrasonic

.
\-

Examinaton in Lieu of Radiography

When utrasonc examination is applied in order to fulfll the requirement

.3.2.'1, the provisions of Annex U shall

appty.

8.3.2 Ultrasonc Examinaton

NOT in Lieu of Radiography

8.3.2.1 When the radiographic rnethod is appled

n order to fulfll the requirement o 1.3.2.1, then any utrasonic

examination specmed shall be n accordance with this section.

8.3.2.2 The method of examnaon shall be n accordance

wth Section

V Article 4, of the ASME Code.

Ultrasonic examinaon shall be perfomed in accordance wih a written procedure that is certified by the
Manufacturer to be in compliance with the applcable requrements of Seclion V of the ASME Code.

8.3,2.3

Examiners who perform ultrasonc examinatons under this section shall be qualified and certifed by the
Manufacturers as meeting the requrements of certifcaton as generally outlined n Level ll or Level lll of ASNT SNTTC-1A (ncludng applicable supplernen6). Level-l personnel may be used if hey are given wrinen acceptance/
rejection criteria prepared by Level-ll or Level-lll personnel. ln additon, all Level-l personnel shall be under the drect
supervison of Level-ll or Level-lll personnel.

8.3.2.4

8.3.2.5 Acceptance standarG shall be agreed upon

8.4

by the Purchaser and the Manufacurer

Liquid Penetrant Examnation

8.4.1 When liquid penetrant examination s specified, the method of examination shall be n accordance
secton

8.4.2

\_

wth

Article 6, of the ASME code.

Lqud penetrant examinaon shall be performed in accordance with a written procedure that s cerlifed by the
Manufacturer to be in compliance with the applcable requrements of Section V of the ASME cod.

API

8./t.3 The

STANDARo

650

Manufacturer shall determine and certify that each lqud penerant examiner meets the followng

requirements.

a)

Has vision (wth corection, if necessary) to enable hm to read a Jaeger Type 2 standard chart at a distance of not

less than 300 mm (12 in.) and s capable of dsngushing and dfferentiating contrast between the colors used.
Examiners shall be checked annually to ensure that they meet these requrements.

b) ls competent in the technque of the liquid

penetrant examinaon method for whch he s certifed, including

making the examinaon and nterpreting and evaluating the results; however, where the examnaton method
conssts of more than one operation, the examiner may be certfied as being qualifed for one or more of the
operatons.

Acceptance standards and e removal and repar of defects shall be n accordance with Secton Vlll, Annex
8, Paragraphs 8-3, 8-4, and 8-5, of the ASME Code.

8,4.4

8.5

vsual Examnaton

8.5.1

a)

b)

The Manufacturer shall determine and certify that each visual examiner meets the following requiremen.

Has vson (wi conection, if necessary) to be able to read a Jaeger Type 2 standard chart at a dstance of not
less an 300 mm (12 in.) and s capable of passng a color contrast test. Examners shall be checked annually to
ensure that they meet ths requirernenu and
ls competent n the technique of

e visual examinaon, ncludng performing the examinaton and interpreting and

evaluating the resuhs; however, where the examination rnethod consists of more than one operation, the
examner performing only a portion ol the test need only be qualifed for the porton that the examiner performs.

8.5.2

A weld shall be acceptable by visual examnation if the inspecon shows the following.

a)

There are no crater cracks, other surface cracks or arc strkes n or adjacent to the weldedjoints.

b)

Maximum permissible undercut s 0.4 mm (1/64 in.) in depth for vertical buttjoints, vertically oriented permanent
attachments, attachment welds for nozzles, manholes, flush-type openngs, and the insde shell-to-bottom welds.
For horizontal buttjonts, horizontally oriented pennanent attachments, and annular-ring buttjonts, e maximum
permissible undercut s 0.8 mm (U:z in.) in depth.

c)

The frequency of surface porosty in the weld does not exceed one cluster (one or more pores) in any 100 mm
(4 in.) of length, and the dameter of each cluster does not exceed 2.5 mm (3/gz in.).

The renforcement of the welds on all butt jonts on each side of the plate shall not exceed the followng
thicknesses:

Plate Thickness
mm (in.)

Maxmum Reinforcement Thickness

mm (n.)
Vertcal Joints

Horzontal Jonts

< 13 C/2)

2.s 1s1.r,

3 (1/8)

> 13 (1/2) to 25 (1)

3 (1/s)

5 (3/16)

> 25 (1)

5 (3^6)

6 (1A)

\ /ELoEo

TANKS FoR OtL SToRAGE

The reinforcement need not be removed except to the extent that it exceeds the maxmum acceptable hickness or
unless its removal s required by 8.1.3.4 for radographic examnation.

8.5.3

A weld that Fals to meet the criteria given n 8.5.1 shall be reworked before hydrosiatc testing as follows:

a) Any defecis shall be removed by mechanical means or thermal gouging processes. Arc strikes discovered

or

adiacent to welded jonts shall be repared by grindng and rewelding as requred. Arc stikes repaired by welding
shall be ground flush with the plate.

b) Rewelding is requred if the resulting thckness s less than the

mnmum required for desgn or hydrostatc test

conditons. All defecls n areas thcker than the mnmum shall be feathered to at least a 4:l taper.

c)

The repar weld shall be sually examined for defec{s.

DELETED

8.6

Vacuum Tesng

8.6.1 Vacuum testng is performed using a testng box approximately 150 mm (6 in.) wde by 750 mm (30 in.) long
with a clear wndow in the top, which provdes proper visibility to vew the area under examnation. Durng testng,
lluminaon shall be adequate for proper evaluaon and nterpretation of the test. The open bottom shall be sealed
against the tank surface by a suitable gasket. Connec{ions, valves, lghtng and gauges, as required, shall be
provided. A soap lllm solulion or commercial leak delection solution, applcable to the conditions, shall be used.
8.6.2 Vacuum testng shall be performed
fhe procedure shall require:

n accordance wth a written procedure prepared by the Manufacturer of

the tank.

a) pelormng a vsual

examination of the bottom and welds prior to performng the vacuuF,box test;

b)

verirying th conditon of lhe vacuum box and its gasket seals;

c)

veriryng that there is no quick bubble or spittng response to large leaks; and

d) applying the film solution to a dry area, such that the area

s thoroughly wetted and

a minmum generation of

applcaton bubbles occurs.

8.6.3

A partial vacuum of 2'l kPa (3 lbin.2, 6 in. Hg to 35 kPa (5 lbfin.2,

1O

in Hg) gauge shall be ued for the test.

If specified by the Purchaser, a second partal vacuum test of 56 kPa (6 lbfln.2, '16 n. Hg) to 70 kpa (10 lbn.2, 20 in.

Hg) shall be performed for the dteclon of very small leaks.

8.6.4
a)

The Manufacturer shall determine that each vacuum-box operator meets the following requremen:

has vison (with coreclon, f necessary) to be able to read a Jaeger Type 2 standrd chart at a dstance of not less
than 300 mm (12 n.). Operators shall b checked annually to ensure that they meet this requrement; and

b) is competent in the technque of lhe vacuum-box lestng,

ncluding performing the examnaton and nterpreng

and evaluating the results; however, where the examination method mnsists of more than one operaton, the
operator performng only a portjon ofthe test need only be qualfied for that porton the operator performs.

8.6.5 The vaqJurr} box test shall have at least 50 mm (2 in.) overlap of previously vewed surface on each
applicaton.

API STANDARo 650

8.6.6 The metal surface temperature lmts shall be beiween 4'C

(40 "F) and 52 "C (125 "F), unless the flm

soluton s proven to work al temperatures oulsde these limits, either by testing or Manufaciurer's recommendatons.

8.6.7 A minmum light ntensity of 1000 Lux (100 fc) at the pont of examnaton s required durng the applcaton of
the examnaton and evaluaton for leaks.
8.6.8

The vacuum shall be maintaned for the greater of either at least 5 seconds or the time requred to view the
area under test.

8.6.9

The presence of a through-thckness leak indcated by contnuous formation or growth of a bubble(s) or foam,
produced by air passng through the thckness, s unaccptable. The presence of a large openng leak, indicated by a
quick bursng bubble or spttg rsponse at the initial setting of the vacuum box s unacceptable. Leaks shall be
repared and retested.

8.6.10 A record or report of the test ncluding a statement addressng tmperature and lght ntensity shall be
completed and fumshed to the Purchaser upon request.

8.6.11 As an altemate to vcuum-box testng, a suitable tracer gas and compatible detcior can be used to test the
integrity of welded bottom jonts for ther entire length. Vvere tracer gas testng s employed as an altemate to
vacuum-box testng, it shall meet the followng requrements:

a) Tracer gas testng shall be performed n accordance with a written procedure which has been revewed and
approved by the Purchaser and whch shall address as a mnmum: the type of equipment used, surface
cleanliness, type of tracer gas, test pressure, sol permeabiliv, sol moisture content, satisfac,tory verifcaton ofthe
extent of tracr gas permeaton, and the mthod or technque to be used includng scannng rate and probe
standofi dstance.

b)

The technique shall be capable of deteclng leakage of 1 x

c)

The test system parametrs (detector, gas, and systm prssure, i.e., level of pressure under bottom) shall be
calbrated by placing the approprate calibrated capllary leak, whch will leak at a rate consstent wth (b) above, in
a temporary or permanent fitting n the tank bottom away from the tracer gas pressurizing pont. Altemavely, by
agreement bet\veen the Purchaser and the Manufadurer, the calibrated leak may be placed n a separate fittng
pressurized n accordance with the syslem parameters.

d)

Vvhle testng for

calbration.

leaks

Pa m3/s (1 x 10-3 std cm30 or smaller.

the welded bottom ionb, system parameters shall be unchanged from those used during